JP6787710B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that plays a game.

As a game machine, a slot machine in which a predetermined number of bets is set and a plurality of types of identification information are variably displayed based on a start operation, or a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device. There is a pachinko gaming machine or the like in which a plurality of types of identification information are variably displayed when a game medium wins a prize in a starting area such as a winning opening provided in the game area.

Further, a slot machine that displays a history according to an operation of a player is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Further, a gaming machine provided with a movable member and performing an initial operation of the movable member is known (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-023124 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-215416

However, for example, some players find it annoying if the history is displayed during the initial operation of the movable member. As described above, some players find it annoying if specific control such as history display is performed during the confirmation operation of the movable member, such as during the initial operation of the movable member.

The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that prevents specific control from being performed while the movable means is operating.

(1) A game machine (slot machine 1) capable of playing games.
A first movable means that can be displaced to an initial position and a position other than the initial position,
A second movable means that can be displaced to an initial position and a position other than the initial position,
A movable means control means that controls the operation of the first movable means and controls the operation of the second movable means .
Reception means for accepting player operations and
Specific control execution means that performs specific control according to the reception of the reception means, and
A reception notification means for notifying that the player's operation can be accepted, and
A decorative display executing means capable of executing a decorative display corresponding to the first movable means,
With
The movable means control means includes a confirmation operation control means that controls the confirmation operation of the first movable means and controls the confirmation operation of the second movable means .
The confirmation operation control means controls the confirmation operation of the second movable means after controlling the confirmation operation of the first movable means.
The reception notification means, Oite during the verify operation control means verify operation execution period confirmation operation and a period for sequential control of the check operation and the second movable means of said first movable means, said first movable from the end check the operation of the means, make a notification to the effect it is possible to accept the player's operation,
The decorative display execution means
When the first movable means is displaced to a position other than the initial position during the game may execute the decorative display,
Wherein when said first movable means in the check operation of the first movable means is displaced to a position other than the initial position does not execute the decorative display,
A game machine characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent specific control from being performed while the movable means is operating.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The specific control execution means may not execute the specific control even if the reception means receives the operation of the player during the confirmation operation execution period.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent specific control from being performed while the movable means is operating.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above
It has a display means (liquid crystal display 51) that displays an effect in the display area.
The movable means operates so as to overlap the display area of the display means.
In the specific control, specific information may be displayed in the display area of the display means.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of specific information from being hindered.

(4) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above
It has a display means (liquid crystal display 51) for displaying the effect in the display area, and a setting means (sub-control unit 91) for setting the display means to display the effect.
Until the setting of the setting means is completed, the specific control may not be executed even if the receiving means accepts the operation of the player.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being performed in a state where the effect display is not normally performed.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (4) above
The confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control means and the setting by the setting means may be performed in parallel.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting for performing the effect display from requiring a long time.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above.
While the door (front door 1b) is open, the reception means may be invalidated.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the settings related to the production from being tampered with or accidentally tampering with the settings related to the production while the door is open.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above.
The effect control means (sub control unit 91) includes power consumption setting means for setting a normal state and a power saving state.
When the demonstration effect is executed, the normal demonstration effect is executed when the normal state is set by the power consumption setting means, and the power saving state is set when the power consumption setting means sets the power saving state. Demonstration effects may be performed.

According to such a configuration, a process for executing the demonstration effect is preferably performed.

(8) In the gaming machine described in (7) above
The normal demonstration effect is an effect of repeating the effect for a specific time, and the power saving demonstration effect may be an effect of keeping the effect means in a specific state.

According to such a configuration, a process for executing the demonstration effect is preferably performed.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above.
When an error (abnormality) occurs during the game, an error signal (security signal) is output after the end of the game, and when an error occurs during the game with payout, the error signal is output before the external output of the payout signal is completed. You may want to start the output.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine the trigger of the error.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above.
The decorative display executing means displays predetermined information that is not displayed during the game during the confirmation operation of the game machine (for example, as shown in FIG. 83B, during the confirmation operation of the accessory 2000. , If the setting has been changed, the text "Settings are being changed" is displayed).

According to such a configuration, during the confirmation operation, it is possible to display predetermined information that can identify that the confirmation operation is being executed, and the visual recognition of the predetermined information is hindered by the decorative display. Can be prevented.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10) above.
When the movable means is displaced to a position other than the initial position, any one of a plurality of types of effects can be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 73, as a fanning effect, a large flame effect and a large flame effect (It is possible to execute multiple effects including a small flame effect)
The decorative display executing means can execute different decorative displays depending on the effect executed by the effect executing means (as shown in FIG. 82B, a large flame image is displayed in the large flame effect. A small flame image is displayed in the small flame production).

According to such a configuration, different decorative displays can be executed according to the effect executed by the effect executing means, so that the effect of the effect of linking the displacement of the movable means and the decorative display can be improved. Can be done.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (11) above.
The movable means can be changed to any one of a plurality of modes (for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (C), the finger member 311 of the accessory 2000 is any one of goo, choki, and par. Can be changed to),
The decorative display executing means can execute different decorative displays depending on the changed mode of the movable means (for example, as shown in FIG. 82, the effect image 320 according to the shape of the changed finger member). indicate).

According to such a configuration, since it is possible to execute the decorative display according to the mode after the change of the movable means, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect of linking the change of the movable means and the decorative display. ..

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12) above.
In response to the operation of the movable means, the notification means (for example, the sub-control unit 91) for notifying that the predetermined effect condition has been achieved (for example, the mission achievement notification executed in S128 of FIG. 72) ,
When the movable means performs an operation different from the effect operation, the notification is restricted (for example, even if the confirmation operation of the accessory 2000 is executed in S52 of the activation process shown in FIG. 71, the mission achievement notification is executed. Further provided with limiting means (not).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent notifying that a predetermined effect condition has been achieved when the movable means operates due to a cause other than the effect operation.

(14) In the gaming machine described in (13) above,
There are a plurality of timings at which the movable means performs the effect operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 74, the timing at which the accessory 2000 operates is the timing at which the accessory 2000 operates when the mission achievement condition of the mission M3 is satisfied. , The timing at which the accessory 2000 operates when the mission achievement condition of the mission M5 is satisfied, or the timing at which the accessory 2000 operates when the accessory operation condition including the condition satisfied by winning the bonus is satisfied. is there).

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest and increase the chances of achieving the production conditions.

(15) In the gaming machine according to (13) or (14) above.
It is provided with a variable display unit (for example, a sub reel that is electronically displayed as described in [Mission achievement notification] of Modification 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each.
After variable display of the variable display unit, the display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit.
The notification means is
When the variable display unit is variable display, the fact that the effect condition has been achieved is displayed with priority over the variable display of the variable display unit (while the sub reel is changing, a mission is sent to the layer in front of the sub reel. Show achievement characters),
When the display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, the display result is prioritized to indicate that the effect condition has been achieved (the display result is derived by stopping the sub reel). When this is done, the mission achievement character is displayed in an area different from the area from which the display result is derived).

According to such a configuration, it is possible not to interfere with the visual recognition of the derived display result.

(16) In the gaming machine according to any one of (13) to (15) above.
When the displacement of the movable means is impossible, it is assumed that the effect condition has been achieved (for example, as shown in FIG. 72, when it is determined in S108 that the mission achievement condition of the accessory-related mission has been satisfied. In addition, if it is determined that the accessory 2000 cannot operate due to the fact that the mark is not detected even after the lapse of a predetermined time, the mission achievement notification is executed in S128).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the absurdity that the production condition is not achieved due to the inability to operate the movable means due to a failure or the like, and thus it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

(17) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (14) above.
Equipped with a variable display unit that can variablely display multiple types of identification information that can be identified by each.
After the variable display unit is variable-displayed, the variable display of the variable display unit is stopped to derive a display result, and a prize can be generated according to the display result (for example, slot machine 1).
A notification unit (for example, a payout number display unit 12) that notifies information about a game, and
A notification state control means for controlling the notification state of the notification unit (for example, main control unit 41, FIG. 80 (b)) and
Setting change control means (for example, main control unit 41) for controlling the advantage to a setting change state in which the advantage can be changed by changing to one of a plurality of types of setting values (for example, numerical values 1 to 6). ) And
The notification state control means
As a result of the game, the notification state of the notification unit can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a state in which the number of payouts is displayed on the payout number display unit 12).
When the power of the game machine is turned on, the notification state of the notification unit is controlled to the notification state when the power failure occurs (for example, the same display state as the display state of the payout number display unit 12 when the power failure occurs).
After the setting change state is completed, the notification state of the notification unit is controlled to a predetermined state (for example, a state in which "0" is displayed on the payout number display unit 12).
When the notification state of the notification unit is controlled to the specific state (for example, the state in which the number of payouts is displayed on the payout number display unit 12), the notification of the notification unit occurs when a predetermined time elapses (for example, 30 seconds elapses). The state is controlled to the predetermined state (for example, a state in which "0" is displayed on the payout number display unit 12) (for example, FIGS. 80 (b) and 80 (e)).

According to such a configuration, by controlling the notification state of the notification unit to the predetermined state when the predetermined time elapses in the specific state, it is possible to prevent the preparation while reducing the work load of the clerk.

(18) In the gaming machine according to (17) above.
The notification unit notifies information regarding the value for games (for example, information regarding the number of medals to be paid out).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to take measures against the preparation for the notification unit which the player can easily execute the preparation.

(19) In the gaming machine according to (17) or (18) above.
When the notification state control means controls the notification state of the notification unit to the specific state (for example, a state in which the number of payouts is displayed on the payout number display unit 12) when the power is turned on, the predetermined time elapses (for example, the state). After 30 seconds have passed), the notification state of the notification unit is controlled to the predetermined state (for example, a state in which "0" is displayed on the payout number display unit 12).

According to such a configuration, even if the notification unit is not in the predetermined state when the power is turned on, the notification state of the notification unit can be controlled to the predetermined state by the elapse of the predetermined time. The notification state of the notification unit can be controlled to a predetermined state by the power-on operation at the time of opening the store without waiting.

(20) In the gaming machine according to any one of (17) to (19) above.
A customer waiting state (for example, a state in which a demo effect is executed 30 seconds after the end of the previous game) occurs when the predetermined time elapses without starting a new game after the end of the previous game. ..

According to such a configuration, the timer for controlling the notification state of the notification unit to a predetermined state and the timer for controlling the customer waiting state can be shared.

(21) In the gaming machine according to any one of (17) to (20) above.
A power saving mode that suppresses the power consumption of the game machine by elapse of the predetermined time without starting a new game after the end of the previous game (for example, the power saving mode is set after 30 seconds have passed since the end of the previous game. ).

According to such a configuration, the timer for controlling the notification state of the notification unit to a predetermined state and the timer for switching to the power saving mode can be shared.

(22) In the gaming machine according to any one of (17) to (21) above.
A plurality of the variable display units are provided, and a prize can be generated according to a combination of display results of the plurality of variable display units.
Predetermining means (for example, internal lottery processing) to decide whether or not to allow the occurrence of winning, and
Derivation operation means (for example, stop switches 8L to 8R) operated by the player to derive the display result, and
A derivation control means (for example, reel rotation processing) that controls to derive a display result according to a determination result of the predetermining means and an operation of the derivation operation means.
Among the combinations of display results of the plurality of variable display units, a prize is awarded based on the combination of identification information on a predetermined line (for example, the winning line LN) straddling the plurality of variable display units. Winning judgment means (for example, winning judgment processing) that makes a judgment,
Suggesting means suggesting that the determination result of the prior determination means is a predetermined result (for example, strong cherry lip winning) that allows the occurrence of a predetermined prize (for example, a process suggesting cherry lip winning by the sub control unit 91). And with more
The derivation control means
When the determination result of the prior determination means is the predetermined result (for example, strong cherry lip winning) and the derivation operation means is operated in a specific procedure (for example, the stop switch is operated at the timing when the pressing is successful). When), a display result in which the identification information on the predetermined line becomes the specific identification information is derived as the display result of the specific variable display unit (for example, the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C) among the plurality of variable display units. (For example, as shown in FIG. 75 (c), the cherry symbols are aligned on the winning line LN),
When the determination result of the prior determination means is the predetermined result (for example, strong cherry lip winning) and the derivation operation means is operated in a procedure different from the specific procedure (for example, stop at the timing when the push failure occurs). When the switch is operated), as a display result of the specific variable display unit (for example, the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C), the identification information on the predetermined line becomes the identification information different from the specific identification information. (For example, as shown in FIG. 75 (f), the replay symbols are aligned on the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C on the winning line LN), while a predetermined variable display unit different from the specific variable display unit (for example, , Right reel) to derive a display result in which the identification information on the predetermined line becomes the specific identification information (for example, as shown in FIG. 75 (f), cherry on the right reel 2R on the winning line LN. The design is derived).

According to such a configuration, even when the derivation operation means is operated by a procedure different from the specific procedure, the identification information on the predetermined line becomes the specific identification information as the display result of the predetermined variable display unit. Is derived, so that it is possible to prevent misidentification of the identification information displayed on the predetermined line.
When operated in a specific procedure, the variation display is stopped in a specific order when the derivation operation means is operated at a specific timing or when the derivation operation means is operated so as to stop the variation display in a specific order. It may be an operation and a predetermined specific operation such as when the operation is operated at a specific timing.

(23) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (22) above.
Equipped with a variable display unit that can variablely display multiple types of identification information that can be identified by each.
After the variable display unit is variable-displayed, the variable display of the variable display unit is stopped to derive a display result, and a prize can be generated according to the display result (for example, slot machine 1).
A game control means (for example, main control unit 41) that controls a game,
An effect control means (for example, sub-control unit 91) that performs an effect based on control information (for example, a command) transmitted from the game control means, and
Derivation operation means (for example, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player to derive the display result, and
It is provided with a notification means (for example, a game auxiliary display 12) capable of performing notification.
The game control means
After the variable display of the variable display unit is started, the derivation operation activation means for activating the operation (for example, stop operation) of the derivation operation means when the activation condition is satisfied,
The notification means includes a notification control means capable of performing control (navigation notification) for notifying operation mode information (navigation number) capable of identifying the operation mode of the derived operation means.
The derivation operation activation means is re-enabled after the power supply is restarted when the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped while the operation (stop operation) of the derivation operation means is enabled. The operation (stop operation) of the derivation operation means is not enabled until the condition is satisfied.
The power supply of the notification control means is stopped in a state in which the operation of the derivation operation means is enabled and a control (navigation notification) for notifying the operation mode information (navigation number) is performed by the notification means. After that, when the power supply is restarted, the control (navigation notification) for notifying the operation mode information (navigation number) by the notification means at a timing earlier than the operation of the derivation operation means is enabled. Resume (see, for example, FIG. 63).

According to such a configuration, after the power supply is stopped with the operation of the derivation operation means enabled, when the power supply is restarted, until the activation condition is satisfied again after the power supply is restarted. Since the operation of the derivation operation means is not enabled during the period of, it is possible to prevent the display result from being derived in a situation where it is unknown whether the rotation is normal after the power supply is restarted.
Further, when the operation of the derivation operation means is enabled and the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped while the notification means is controlling to notify the operation mode information, the derivation is performed. Since the control for notifying the operation mode information by the notification means is restarted at a timing earlier than the operation of the operation means is enabled, the player erroneously informs the operation mode information without knowing that the operation mode information has been notified. It is possible to prevent the derivation operation means from being operated in an operation mode other than the operation mode identified by.
In addition, in (23), the operation mode of the derivation operation means includes an operation mode of operating at any one of a plurality of different operation timings, an operation mode of operating at any one of a plurality of operation orders, and the like. The operation mode and the like according to the combination of are applicable. Further, an activation condition in which the operation of the derivation operation means is activated after the variable display of the variable display unit is started, and an activation condition in which the operation of the derivation operation means is activated after the power supply is restarted. , May be the same condition or may be different conditions.

(24) In the gaming machine described in (23) above,
After the start of the game, the notification control means operates mode information on the notification means (for example, the game auxiliary display 12) at a timing earlier than the operation of the derivation operation means (for example, the stop operation) is activated. Control to notify (navigation number) (for example, navigation notification) is started.

According to such a configuration, after the start of the game, the control for notifying the operation mode information by the notification means is started at a timing earlier than the operation of the derivation operation means is enabled, so that the player can start the operation mode information. It is possible to prevent the derivation operation means from being operated by an operation mode other than the operation mode identified by the operation mode information without knowing that the is notified.

(25) In the gaming machine according to (23) or (24) above.
The derivation operation enabling means does not enable the operation (stop operation) of the derivation operation means when a fluctuation abnormality (reel rotation abnormality) is detected after the operation of the derivation operation means is enabled.
The notification control means has operation mode information (navigation number) on the notification means (game auxiliary display 12) even when a fluctuation abnormality (reel rotation abnormality) is detected after the operation of the derivation operation means is enabled. ) Is notified (navigation notification) is continued.

According to such a configuration, after the operation of the derivation operation means is enabled, when a fluctuation abnormality is detected, the operation of the derivation operation means is not enabled, while the control for notifying the operation mode information by the notification means. Is continued, so that it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the derived operation means in an operation mode other than the operation mode identified by the operation mode information without knowing that the operation mode information has been notified.

(26) In the gaming machine according to any one of (23) to (25) above.
The game control means (main control unit 41) can transmit control information (push order command) capable of specifying operation mode information (navigation number) to the effect control means (sub control unit 91).
The effect control means (sub-control unit 91) is a notification effect (navigation) capable of specifying the operation mode identified by the operation mode information based on the control information (push order command) that can specify the operation mode information (navigation number). (Direction) can be executed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the operation mode identified by the operation mode information by the effect device controlled by the effect control means, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect when the operation mode information is notified. it can.

(27) In the gaming machine according to (26) above
The game control means (main control unit 41) is a control (navigation number) for notifying the operation mode information (navigation number) by the notification means (game auxiliary display 12) in a state where the operation of the derivation operation means is enabled. When the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped while the navigation notification is being performed, the operation mode information (navigation number) is provided at a timing earlier than the operation of the derivation operation means is enabled. Specifiable control information (pushing order command) is transmitted to the effect control means (sub control unit 91).

According to such a configuration, the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped in the state where the operation of the derivation operation means is enabled and the control for notifying the operation mode information is performed by the notification means. When this is done, the control information that can specify the operation mode information is transmitted to the effect control means at a timing earlier than the operation of the derivation operation means is enabled, so that the derivation operation is performed when the power supply is restarted. It is possible to start the notification effect before the operation of the means is activated, and the operation mode other than the operation mode erroneously identified by the operation mode information without the player knowing that the operation mode information has been notified. It is possible to prevent the derivation operation means from being operated by.

(28) In the gaming machine according to any one of (23) to (27) above.
The variable display unit (reel 2L, 2C, 2R) is provided with a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified by stepping motors (reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R) that are driven by changing the excitation state. It is configured to change and display by moving the reels (reels 2L, 2C, 2R).
The game control means includes an excitation state control means (main control unit 41) that controls to change the excitation state according to a control pattern (excitation pattern).
The excitation state control means is supplied with electric power in a state where the excitation state is changed according to a predetermined control pattern (starting pattern, constant speed pattern as the excitation pattern) for moving the reel among the control patterns (excitation patterns). When the power supply is restarted after the stop, the control that changes the excitation state from the first excitation state in the start control pattern (starting pattern) that starts the movement of the reel in the control pattern (excitation pattern) is started. To do.

According to such a configuration, the power supply to the game machine is stopped while the control for changing the excitation state is performed according to a predetermined control pattern for moving the reel, and then the power supply to the game machine is restarted. At that time, the first excitation state in the start control pattern that starts the movement of the reel instead of starting the control that changes the excitation state from the continuation of the excitation state when the power supply in the predetermined control pattern is stopped. Since the control for changing the excitation state is started from, the movement of the reel can be started smoothly even after the power supply is restarted.
The predetermined control pattern for moving the reel may include a start control pattern for starting the movement of the reel.
Further, the start control pattern may be a control pattern that starts the movement of the reel toward the reel variation mode in the predetermined control pattern, or may be a variation mode different from the reel variation mode in the predetermined control pattern. It may be a control pattern that starts the movement of the reel toward the reel.

(29) In the gaming machine according to any one of (23) to (28) above.
The variable display unit is a reel (reel 2L, 2C) on which a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified by stepping motors (reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R) that are driven by changing the excitation state are arranged. , 2R) is configured to change and display by moving.
The game control means
Steps after the start of rotation or the previous reel reference position is detected without detecting the reel reference position when normal rotation is not detected when the activation condition is satisfied (the acceptance of stop operation is enabled). When the number exceeds a predetermined number of steps), a rotation abnormality determining means (main control unit 41) for determining a rotation abnormality (reel rotation abnormality), and
A restart control means (main control unit 41) that performs restart control that changes the excitation state according to the pattern (starting pattern) at the start of rotation of the reel when it is determined that the rotation is abnormal.
When the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped in the state where the activation condition is satisfied (the state in which the reception of the stop operation is enabled), the excitation state is changed from the state when the power supply was stopped. Including a restart means (main control unit 41) for restarting the control to be changed,
The restart control means also performs restart control when a rotation abnormality (reel rotation abnormality) is determined after the control for changing the excitation state is restarted by the restart means.
The derivation operation activation means is
When the operation of the derivation operation means is enabled (the reception of the stop operation is enabled) and it is determined that the rotation is abnormal (reel rotation abnormality), the operation is restarted from the time when the rotation abnormality is determined. The operation of the derivation operation means (stop operation) is not activated during the period from when the control is performed until the activation condition (constant speed rotation and detection of the reel reference position) is satisfied.
After the power supply is stopped in the state where the operation of the derivation operation means is enabled (the state where the reception of the stop operation is enabled), when the power supply is restarted, when the power supply is restarted. , Normal rotation is detected (reel reference position detection), or rotation abnormality (reel rotation abnormality) is determined and restart control is performed, and then the activation condition (constant speed rotation and reel reference position detection) is set. The operation of the derivation operation means (stop operation) is not enabled in the period until it is established.

According to such a configuration, when the rotation of the reel is started and the operation of the derivation operation means is enabled and it is determined that the rotation is abnormal, the excitation state is changed according to the pattern at the start of rotation of the reel. Since the start control is performed, the progress of the game is not disabled every time it is determined that the rotation is abnormal, so that the game can proceed smoothly. In addition, since the operation of the derivation operation means is not activated during the period from the determination of the rotation abnormality to the establishment of the activation condition after the restart control is performed, the display result is derived in a situation where the rotation is not normal. It can be prevented from being stowed.
In addition, when the power supply is stopped while the operation of the derivation operation means is enabled and then the power supply is restarted, the control for changing the excitation state from the state when the power supply was stopped is restarted. After that, when normal rotation is detected, it is possible to activate the operation of the derivation operation means from that time, so even if a momentary power failure occurs, if the normal rotation is maintained, the game will be played immediately. Can be advanced.
Further, even if the torque for rotating the reel is insufficient and it is determined that the rotation is abnormal when the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped with the operation of the derivation operation means enabled. Since the restart control is performed and the progress of the game is not disabled, the game can proceed smoothly. Further, in such a case, the operation of the derivation operation means is enabled during the period from the time when the power supply is restarted until the activation condition is satisfied after the restart control is performed after the rotation abnormality is determined. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display result from being derived in a situation where it is unknown whether the rotation is normal after the power supply is restarted.

(30) In the gaming machine according to any one of (23) to (29) above.
The game control means (main control unit 41)
Predetermining means (internal lottery) to determine the display result that is allowed to be derived before the display result is derived,
When the determination result of the advance determination means (internal lottery) becomes the notification target result (notification target combination) that is the target of notification (navigation notification), an advantageous operation mode (favorable stop for the player) for the player. Notification state control means for controlling the notification state (state in which navigation notification is executed) to notify (in order), and
Specific control information for transmitting specific control information (first internal winning command, second internal winning command) regarding the determination result of the prior determination means (internal lottery) to the effect control means (sub-control unit 91). Including transmission means (internal winning command setting process)
Regardless of whether or not the specific control information transmitting means is controlled to the notification state (the state in which the navigation notification is executed), the determination result of the advance determination means (internal lottery) is the notification target result (notification target combination). ), The specific control information (second internal winning command) that can identify the result to be notified but cannot specify the advantageous operation mode (stop order advantageous for the player) is used as the effect control means. Send to.

According to such a configuration, in a configuration in which the game control means and the effect control means are provided and the information regarding the determination result of the prior determination means is specified from the specific control information transmitted from the game control means, the game control means side. In addition to controlling the notification state in which the advantageous operation mode is notified, the game control means is notified when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the notification target result regardless of whether or not it is controlled in the notification state. Since the specific control information that can specify the result but cannot specify the advantageous operation mode is transmitted to the effect control means, the specific control information regardless of whether or not the game control means controls the notification state. Since the advantageous operation mode is not specified according to the determination result of the prior determination means, the process related to the transmission of the specific control information can be simplified, and even if the effect control means side is fraudulent, the notification state is controlled. It is possible to prevent the advantageous operation mode from being notified in a state where the operation mode is not performed.

(31) In the gaming machine according to any one of (23) to (29) above.
The game control means
Predetermining means (internal lottery) to determine the display result that is allowed to be derived before the display result is derived,
Numerical value setting means for setting different numerical values (winning numbers) for each determination result of the prior determination means (internal lottery), and
Predetermined control means that performs predetermined control (setting of internal winning flag, navigation notification, command creation, stop control of reels 2L, 2C, 2R, etc.) according to the numerical value (winning number) set by the numerical value setting means.
When the determination result of the advance determination means (internal lottery) becomes the notification target result (notification target combination) that is the target of notification (navigation notification), an advantageous operation mode (favorable stop for the player) for the player. Notification state control means for controlling the notification state (state in which navigation notification is executed) to notify (in order), and
The specific control information transmitting means for transmitting the specific control information (first internal winning command, second internal winning command) regarding the determination result of the prior determination means (internal lottery) to the effect control means is included.
A continuous numerical value consisting of a predetermined numerical range is assigned as a numerical value (winning number) set by the numerical value setting means when the notification target result (notification target combination) is obtained.
The specific control information transmitting means notifies when the numerical value (winning number) set by the numerical value setting means is within a predetermined numerical range in a state other than at least a notification state (a state in which navigation notification is executed). The effect control means (sub-control unit) provides specific control information (second internal winning command) that can identify the target result (notification target combination) but cannot specify the advantageous operation mode (stop order advantageous for the player). It is transmitted to 91).

According to such a configuration, in a configuration in which the game control means and the effect control means are provided and the information regarding the determination result of the prior determination means is specified from the specific control information transmitted from the game control means, the game control means side. In addition to controlling the notification state in which the advantageous operation mode is notified, the game control means becomes the notification target result when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the notification target result at least in a state other than the notification state. Since the specific control information that can be specified but the advantageous operation mode cannot be specified is transmitted to the effect control means, the predetermined control means is determined from the specific control information regardless of whether or not the game control means controls the notification state. Since the advantageous operation mode is not specified according to the result, it is possible to prevent the advantageous operation mode from being notified in a state where the notification state is not controlled even if the effect control means side is fraudulent. Further, as a numerical value set by the numerical value setting means when the notification target result is obtained, a continuous numerical value consisting of a predetermined numerical range is assigned, and the game control means determines whether or not the notification target result. , Since it can be determined whether or not the numerical value used when performing the predetermined control is within the predetermined numerical range assigned to the notification target result, it is possible to simplify the process when transmitting the specific control information.

It is a front view of the slot machine of this embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the internal structure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the store side setting switch. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation of the movable means. Confirmation of movable means Operation execution period, period for prohibiting input acceptance of the player side setting switch, period for turning off the player side setting switch, period for permitting input acceptance of the player side setting switch, and player side setting It is a figure which showed the period in which a switch is turned on. When the confirmation operation execution period is longer than normal, the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means, the period for prohibiting the input acceptance of the player side setting switch, the period for turning off the player side setting switch, and the player side setting It is a figure which showed the period which allowed input reception of a switch, and the period which the player side setting switch was turned on. Confirmation of movable means Operation execution period, period for prohibiting input acceptance of the player side setting switch, period for turning off the player side setting switch, period for permitting input acceptance of the player side setting switch, and player side setting It is a figure which showed the period in which a switch is turned on. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the store side payout rate setting process executed by the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the store side effect setting process executed by a sub-control unit. It is a figure which shows the setting screen for adjusting a volume and a light amount. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the state of the store side setting switch, the volume and the amount of light. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of lighting and extinguishing of a player side setting switch executed by a sub-control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the player side effect setting process executed by a sub-control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the volume change operation process executed by a sub-control unit. It is a figure which shows the setting screen of the store side in the modification 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the setting screen for adjusting the volume | volume in the modification 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the setting screen for adjusting the volume | volume in the modification 1. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the demonstration effect executed by a sub-control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the control content of the demonstration effect executed by the sub-control unit. It is a figure for demonstrating the change screen of a power saving mode. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the demonstration effect after the setting is changed on the change screen of a power saving mode. It is a figure which shows the start condition of the demonstration production by a sub-control unit. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow until the demo production is started for each production mode. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow from the execution of the production menu to the start of the demo production. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification 1 of the start timing of the demonstration effect after the end of the change state of a power saving mode. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification 1 of the start timing of the demonstration effect after the end of the change state of a power saving mode. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification 1 at the time of browsing the game history during the demonstration production. It is a figure which showed the example which displays the operation explanation on the screen when the production switch is used for transition to a setting screen. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the glass door and the front frame of the pachinko gaming machine in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows the whole structure of a game system. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a mobile terminal. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of management server. It is a front view of the slot machine of the embodiment to which this invention is applied. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of a reel. It is a perspective view which shows the internal structure of a slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the type of a bonus, the symbol combination of a bonus, and the technical matter related to a bonus. It is a figure for demonstrating the type of the re-game combination, the symbol combination of the re-game combination, and the technical matter related to the re-game combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the type of the re-game combination, the symbol combination of the re-game combination, and the technical matter related to the re-game combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the type of a small combination, the symbol combination of a small combination, and the technical matter related to a small combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the type of a small combination, the symbol combination of a small combination, and the technical matter related to a small combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the type of the roll, the pattern combination of the roll, and the technical matter related to the roll. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the lottery target combination read out as the lottery target combination for each game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the lottery target combination read out as the lottery target combination for each game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the correspondence procedure of push order combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the winning number and transmission number of a special combination in the 1st internal winning command transmitted by a main control unit. It is a figure for demonstrating the winning number and the transmission number of the general combination and the re-game combination in the 2nd internal winning command transmitted by the main control unit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the control content of the internal winning command setting process performed by the main control unit. It is a figure for demonstrating the navigation number in the push order command transmitted by a main control unit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the control content of the push order command setting process performed by the main control unit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the control content of the winning judgment command setting processing performed by the main control unit. It is a timing chart for explaining the establishment timing of the stop operation activation condition in a reel rotation process. It is a timing chart for explaining the establishment timing of the stop operation activation condition in a reel rotation process. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the establishment timing of the reel rotation error in the reel rotation processing. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the establishment timing of the stop operation activation condition in the reel rotation processing after power failure recovery. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of the game auxiliary display. It is a figure for demonstrating the notification mode by navigation notification. It is a figure for demonstrating modification 2 or 3 of the notification mode by navigation notification. It is a figure for demonstrating the notification mode by error notification. It is a figure for demonstrating the switching timing of the display mode of a game auxiliary display in a game. It is a figure for demonstrating the switching timing of the display mode of a game auxiliary display before and after a power failure. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the selection situation of the excitation pattern of a reel motor in the control of a game. It is a figure for demonstrating the switching timing of the display mode of a game auxiliary display when an error occurs. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of control about the control concerning the switching of the display mode of a game auxiliary display. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of control about the modification of the control concerning the switching of the display mode of a game auxiliary display. It is a figure for demonstrating the signal input / output between a slot machine and a test apparatus. It is a figure for demonstrating the game history database and the like. It is a figure for demonstrating the flowchart of the start-up process (main). It is a figure for demonstrating the flowchart of the start process (sub). It is a figure for demonstrating the flowchart of the process (sub) during a game. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating the mission database. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control at the time of winning a re-game combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control at the time of winning a re-game combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control at the time of winning a small winning combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control at the time of winning a re-game combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control at the time of winning a small winning combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the notification mode of various notification units. It is a figure for demonstrating the display pattern of the payout number display part. It is a figure for explaining the rock-paper-scissors production. It is a figure for demonstrating the difference of processing between the execution of a fanning effect and the execution of a start processing.

[First Embodiment]
A mode for carrying out a slot machine, which is an example of the gaming machine according to the present invention, will be described below.

[Slot machine configuration]
As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is composed of a housing 1a having an open front surface and a front door 1b rotatably pivotally supported at a side end of the housing 1a. .. The front door 1b can open and close the opened front side of the housing 1a by rotating with respect to the housing 1a.

As shown in FIG. 2, inside the housing 1a of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter, left reel, middle reel, and right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer circumference are arranged. (Also referred to as) are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and as shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols among the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided on the front door 1b. It is arranged so that it can be seen from.

On each of the outer circumferences of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, for example, "black 7", "net 7", "white 7", "BAR", "replay", "watermelon", "white cherry", and "bell". , 21 of which are mutually distinguishable, are drawn in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the perspective window 3, respectively.

The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided corresponding to each other and are rotated by the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 4), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously connected to the perspective window 3. While being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed as display results in the perspective window 3.

Inside the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, there are reel sensors 33L, 33C and 33R that detect the reference position for each of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, and a reel LED 55 that irradiates the reels 2L, 2C and 2R from the back. Is provided. The reel LED 55 is composed of 12 LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols of reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and each symbol can be irradiated independently.

A display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1) is arranged at a position on the front side (player side) of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R of the front door 1b. The player can visually recognize the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R through the transmission region 51b and the perspective window 3 corresponding to the perspective window 3 of the display region 51a.

On the front door 1b, a medal insertion section 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a player-owned game value that can be used to set the number of bets). One BET switch 5 operated when setting the number of bets for one medal using, and the maximum number of bets determined according to the gaming state within the range using credits. The MAXBET switch 6 operated when setting the number of bets (2 when the game state is RB (BB) in this embodiment, 3 in the normal game state), and the medals and the number of bets stored as credits. The settlement switch 10 operated when the medals used for the setting are settled (the medals used for setting the credit and the number of bets are returned), the start switch 7 operated when the game is started, and the reel. Stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, which are operated when the rotations of 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, are provided so as to be operable by the player.

In the present embodiment, the single BET switch 5 and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are provided on the front surface of the operation panel constituting the front door 1b, that is, on the same surface.

The front door 1b is provided with a player-side setting switch 70 for setting the effect mode during the game. Since the player side setting switch 70 is provided on the front side of the front door 1b (that is, outside the front door 1b), the player side setting switch 70 is located on the front side of the slot machine 1 when the front door 1b is closed. .. Therefore, it is possible to perform operations from the outside, such as being operated by a player who plays in the slot machine 1. The player can set the volume and the amount of light in the production during the game by operating the player side setting switch 70. The player-side setting switch 70 is provided with an LED inside, and can notify whether or not to accept an operation by turning on and off. For example, by turning on the player-side setting switch 70, the player-side setting switch 70 notifies that the operation is accepted. Further, for example, by turning off the player-side setting switch 70, the player-side setting switch 70 notifies that the operation is not accepted.

On the front door 1b, an error occurs such as a credit display 11 displaying the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals acquired in the BB, and foreign matter other than regular medals being inserted into the medal insertion unit 4. A game auxiliary display 12 is provided, which sometimes displays an error code indicating the content.

On the front door 1b, 1BETLED14 that notifies by lighting that the number of bets is set to 1, 2BETLED15 that notifies that the number of bets is set by 2 by lighting, and 3 that the number of bets is set are set. A 3BET LED 16 that notifies by lighting, an insertion request LED 17 that notifies by lighting that a medal can be inserted, a start effective LED 18 that notifies that the game start operation by operating the start switch 7 is effective, and a weight. (The state of waiting for the start of rotation of the reel because a certain period of time has not passed since the start of the previous game) The waiting LED 19 that notifies by lighting that the game is in progress and the lighting that notifies that the replay game is in progress. An LED 20 is provided during replay. A replay game is a game started after the number of bets is automatically set.

Inside the MAXBET switch 6, a BET switch effective LED 21 is provided to notify by lighting that the operation of setting the number of bets by operating the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is effective. Inside the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, there are left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, respectively, which notify by lighting that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is effective. It is provided.

Inside the front door 1b, there is a reset switch 23 that detects a reset operation for canceling an error state and a stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until the reset operation is performed) by a predetermined key operation. A setting value display 24 is provided so that the setting value at that time is displayed while the setting value is being changed or the setting value is being confirmed.

Inside the front door 1b, the flow path of medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 is placed on either the hopper tank 34a (see FIG. 2) side or the medal payout outlet 9 side provided inside the housing 1a. A flow path switching solenoid 30 for selective switching and a insertion medal sensor (located closer to the hopper tank 34a than the flow path switching solenoid 30) for detecting medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 and flowing down to the hopper tank 34a side are provided. A medal selector (not shown) is provided.

Inside the front door 1b, a store-side setting switch 60 is provided for setting a reference for the effect mode during the game. Since the store clerk owns the key for opening the front door 1b, the store side setting switch 60 can be operated from the outside by opening the front door 1b. On the other hand, a person other than the store clerk, such as a player, cannot open the front door 1b, so that the store side setting switch 60 cannot be operated. That is, the store-side setting switch 60 is an operating means for a game store in which the slot machine 1 is installed. By operating the store-side setting switch 60, the store clerk can set a reference for the volume and the amount of light in the production during the game.

As shown in FIG. 3, the store-side setting switch 60 is a switch that switches a total of 16 channels from “0” to “F”. The clerk can switch between these channels by rotating the knob 61. For each channel "0" to "F", the volume and the amount of light in the production are graded. The volume stage corresponding to the channels "0" to "F" is referred to as the first volume stage, and the light amount stage corresponding to the channels "0" to "F" is also referred to as the first light amount stage. For example, if the channel is "0", it is set to the first volume step set to the minimum volume and the first light amount step set to the minimum light amount. If the channel is "F", it is set to the first volume step set to the maximum volume and the first light amount step set to the maximum light amount.

The steps for the volume and the amount of light set by the store clerk based on the operation of the store side setting switch 60 are referred to as the first volume step and the first light amount stage, whereas the player side setting switch 70 is operated. The steps for the volume and the amount of light that can be set by the player are also referred to as a second volume step and a second light amount step.

Inside the housing 1a, the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, and the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R that can detect the reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, respectively (FIG. A reel unit 2 including (see 4) is provided. Inside the housing 1a, an external output board 1000 for outputting an external output signal, a hopper tank 34a for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, and medals stored in the hopper tank 34a are paid. A hopper unit 34 including a hopper motor 34b for paying out from the outlet 9 and a payout sensor 34c for detecting medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b is provided.

An overflow tank 35 for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a is provided on the side of the hopper unit 34. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full tank sensor 35a made of a pair of conductive members separated to the left and right provided at a height at which a predetermined amount of stored medals can be detected is provided. In the full tank sensor 35a, when the conductive member comes into contact with the conductive member via the medal stored in the overflow tank 35 and conducts, the amount of medals stored inside becomes equal to or more than a predetermined amount, that is, the overflow tank is full. Detects that it is in a tongue state.

A power supply box 100 is provided inside the housing 1a. On the front of the power box 100, enable / disable the stop function that controls the stop state (the state in which the progress of the game is restricted until the reset operation is performed) at the end of BB or the end of AT (Assist Time). A stop switch 36a for selection is provided. The AT is a period in which a navigation effect is executed in which the player is notified of the pressing order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in order to generate a predetermined prize. It is controlled by AT on condition that it has Navistock, which is the right to control AT. The AT is controlled over a predetermined number of games (50 games per set in this embodiment) based on the number of navigator stocks held. Therefore, the number of navigation stocks indicates the number of rights controlled by the AT, and the more the number of navigation stocks is held, the longer the number of navigation stocks is controlled by the AT.

Further, on the front of the power box 100, enable / disable of the automatic settlement function that controls the automatic settlement process (the process of settling (returning) the medal stored as credits regardless of the player's operation) at the end of BB. An automatic settlement switch 36b for selection, a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state and a setting confirmation state when the power is turned on (at startup), and a setting key switch 37 for canceling an error state or a stop state in normal times. The reset / setting switch 38, which functions as a reset switch and functions as a setting switch for changing the set value of the winning probability (payout rate) of the internal lottery in the setting change state, and is operated when the power is turned on / off. A power switch 39 is provided.

The power box 100 includes a setting key switch 37, a reset / setting switch 38, and a power switch 39 that are operated when changing a set value.

The clerk can operate the setting key switch 37 from the outside by opening the front door 1b. On the other hand, a person other than the clerk, such as a player, cannot open the front door 1b, so that the setting key switch 37 cannot be operated. That is, the setting key switch 37 is an operating means for a game store where the slot machine 1 is installed.

A door opening detection switch 25 for detecting the opening / closing of the front door 1b is provided at a position above the side surface facing the side surface where the power supply box 100 is provided. The door open detection switch 25 is turned on when the front door 1b closes the open front side of the housing 1a, while the front door 1b opens the open front side of the housing 1a. When it is, it turns off.

When playing a game on the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, or the number of bets is set using credits. To use the credit, one BET switch 5 or MAXBET switch 6 may be operated.
When the specified number of bets (for example, 3) determined according to the game state is set, the winning lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 1) are valid, and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, that is, the game. Is ready to start. If more than the maximum number of medals are inserted out of the specified number corresponding to the game state, that amount will be added to the credit.

The winning line is a line set to determine whether or not the combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a combination of specific symbols. In addition, in this embodiment, these combinations are also referred to as "winning combination" or "winning combination", and a winning combination occurs when the combination of symbols constituting either combination stops on the winning line. Also called. For example, when a symbol combination constituting the re-game combination is derived on the winning line, a replay game is activated in which the player can play the next game without setting the number of bets using medals. It is also said that a replay prize (replay prize) occurs when the symbol combination constituting the replay combination is derived on the winning line.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the winning lines L1 set across the symbols arranged in the middle of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, and the symbols arranged in the upper stages of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are straddled. The winning line L2 set in the above, the winning line L3 set across the symbols arranged in the lower row of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, the upper row of the reel 2L, the middle row of the reel 2C, the lower row of the reel 2R, that is, downward to the right. Five types of winning lines are the winning line L4 set across the arranged symbols, the lower row of the reel 2L, the middle row of the reel 2C, and the upper row of the reel 2R, that is, the winning line L5 set across the symbols lined up to the right. It is defined as.

When the start switch 7 is operated while the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously changed. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the perspective window 3.

When all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, if the combination of symbols that generate a small winning combination is not stopped in any of the activated winning lines L1 to L5, one game ends at the time of the stop. To do. On the other hand, when the combination of symbols that generate a small winning combination is stopped on any of the activated winning lines L1 to L5, the number of medals determined according to the winning of the small winning combination is given to the player. Granting (addition of credits, when the maximum number of credits (50 in this embodiment) is reached, medals are ejected from the medal payout exit 9 (see FIG. 1)), and one game ends.

As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101, and the game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the effect control board 90 is provided. The effect is controlled according to the game state, and the power supply board 101 generates a drive power source for the electric components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies the drive power source to each part.

The power supply board 101 includes a hopper motor 34b, a payout sensor 34c, a full tank sensor 35a, a stop switch 36a, an automatic settlement switch 36b, a setting key switch 37, a reset / setting switch 38, and a power switch 39. Is connected.

The game control board 40 includes one BET switch 5, a MAXBET switch 6, a start switch 7, a stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, a settlement switch 10, a reset switch 23, a door open detection switch 25, and the like. The reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R are connected, and the payout sensor 34c, the full tank sensor 35a, the stop switch 36a, the automatic settlement switch 36b, the setting key switch 37, and the reset are connected via the power supply board 101. / The setting switch 38 is connected, and the detection signals of these connected switches are input.

The game control board 40 includes a credit display 11, a game auxiliary display 12, a payout display 13, 1-3 BETLEDs 14 to 16, an input request LED 17, a start effective LED 18, a wait LED 19, and a replay. The LED 20, the BET switch effective LED 21, the left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are connected. At the same time, the hopper motor 34b is connected via the power supply board 101, and these electric components are driven under the control of the main control unit 41 mounted on the game control board 40.

The game control board 40 is equipped with a main control unit 41 that controls the game. The main control unit 41 includes a microcomputer including a main CPU 41a, a ROM 41b, a RAM 41c, and an I / O port 41d.

The game control board 40 includes a random number circuit 42 that generates random numbers in a predetermined range (0 to 65535 in this embodiment), a pulse oscillator 43 that supplies a clock signal of a constant frequency to the random number circuit 42, and a game control board 40. A switch detection circuit 44 that detects a detection signal input from switches connected directly or via a power supply board 101, a motor drive circuit 45 that controls drive of reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, and a flow path switching solenoid. The solenoid drive circuit 46 that controls the drive of 30, the LED drive circuit 47 that controls the drive of various indicators and LEDs connected to the game control board 40, and the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 are monitored and the voltage is increased. A power failure detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal to that effect to the main control unit 41 when a drop is detected, and the main CPU 41a when the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the main CPU 41a is not input. A reset circuit 49 that gives a reset signal and various other devices and circuits are mounted.

The main CPU 41a is provided with an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibit function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, executes a program stored in the ROM 41b to perform processing related to the progress of the game, and is a game control board 40. Directly or indirectly controls each part of the control circuit mounted on the device. The ROM 41b stores fixed data such as a program executed by the main CPU 41a and various tables. The RAM 41c is used as a work area or the like when the main CPU 41a executes a program. The I / O port 41d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the main control unit 41.

The main CPU 41a transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O port 41d. Here, from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90, for example, using a unidirectional circuit such as a diode or a transistor, only one direction (direction from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90) is available. It is configured so that the signal cannot pass through. Therefore, the command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is transmitted in only one direction, and the command is not transmitted from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40.

The effect switch 56, the store side setting switch 60, and the player side setting switch 70 are connected to the effect control board 90, and the detection signals of these switches are input.

The effect control board 90 includes a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the front door 1b of the slot machine 1, an effect LED 52, speakers 53, 54, a reel LED 55, movable means 901 to 903, and a light emitting notification means. The effect devices such as 951 to 953 are connected, and these effect devices are driven based on the control by the sub control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90.

For example, when the channel of the store-side setting switch 60 is switched to "0", the sub-control unit 91 sets the speaker 53 to output sound at the minimum volume in accordance with the first volume step of "0". In addition to controlling 54, the liquid crystal display 51, the effect LED 52, and the like are controlled so as to output light with the minimum amount of light in accordance with the first light amount step of "0".

The effect control board 90 includes a sub control unit 91 that controls the effect, a display control circuit 92 that controls the display of the liquid crystal display 51 connected to the effect control board 90, and drive control of the effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55. The LED drive circuit 93 for performing the above, the audio output circuit 94 for controlling the audio output from the speakers 53 and 54, and the sub CPU 91a are given a reset signal when the power is turned on or when the initialization command from the sub CPU 91a is not input for a certain period of time. When the reset circuit 95, the switch circuit 96 that detects the detection signal input from the effect switch 56 connected to the effect control board 90, and the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 are monitored and a voltage drop is detected. In addition, a power failure detection circuit 98 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that effect to the sub CPU 91a, a movable means drive circuit 99 that controls the drive of the movable means 901 to 903 connected to the effect control board 90, and others. Circuits and the like are mounted, and the sub CPU 91a receives commands transmitted from the game control board 40 to perform various controls for performing the effect, and each part of the control circuit mounted on the effect control board 90. Directly or indirectly control.

The sub control unit 91 includes a microcomputer including a sub CPU 91a, a ROM 91b, a RAM 91c, and an I / O port 91d. The sub CPU 91a receives a command transmitted from the game control board 40 to perform various controls for performing the effect, and directly or indirectly controls each part of the control circuit mounted on the effect control board 90. ..

Like the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 has an interrupt function, generates an interrupt when receiving a command from the main control unit 41, and acquires a command transmitted from the main control unit 41. , Executes command reception interrupt processing to be stored in the buffer. The sub control unit 91 executes a timer interrupt process (sub) by generating an interrupt every time the number of input of the system clock reaches a certain number, that is, at regular intervals.

Unlike the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 interrupts the command when an interrupt occurs based on the reception of the command, even if the timer interrupt process (sub) is being executed. The reception interrupt process is executed, and even if the interrupt that triggers the timer interrupt process (sub) occurs at the same time, the command reception interrupt process is executed with the highest priority.

[Payout rate setting]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the medal payout rate (ratio of the total number of medals used for setting the number of bets to the total number of medals paid out by winning) changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate changes by using the winning probability according to the set value in the internal lottery or the like. The set value is composed of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. From the point of view of the payout rate, when 6 is set as the set value, the player has the highest advantage regarding the game, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the higher the advantage regarding the game. It becomes low.

In order to change the set value of the payout rate, the front door 1b is opened and the power switch 39 of the power supply box 100 provided in the housing 1a is operated to turn on the power of the slot machine 1. In this case, it is necessary to turn off the setting key switch 37 once, operate the setting key switch 37 to turn on the setting key switch 37, and then turn on the power of the slot machine 1. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on, the game shifts to the setting change state in which the game cannot proceed, and is read from the RAM 41c by the setting value display 24. The set value is displayed as the display value.

In the setting change state, when the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, the display value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from setting 6, the setting returns to setting 1). ). After that, when the start switch 7 is operated, the displayed value is fixed as the set value. When the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the confirmed display value (setting value) is stored in the RAM 41c, and the game shifts to a state in which the game can proceed. By temporarily turning off the power switch 39, turning on the setting key switch 37 and turning on the power switch 39, the setting change state is entered. Therefore, the operation is also collectively referred to as a setting change operation. ..

In order to confirm the set value, the setting key switch 37 may be turned on after the game is finished and the bet number is not set. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on in such a situation, the setting value display 24 displays the setting value read from the RAM 41c, so that the setting value can be confirmed. In the setting confirmation state, the progress of the game is impossible, and by turning off the setting key switch 37, the setting confirmation state ends and the game returns to a state in which the progress is possible.

[Checking the operation of movable means]
Next, the operation check of the movable means 901 to 903 will be described. FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the movable means 901 to 903. The movable means 901 to 903 are members that can be moved at the time of production or the like. The movable means 901 moves between the initial position 911 and the movable position 921. The initial position 911 is a position that does not overlap the display area of the liquid crystal display 51. Further, the movable position 921 is a position superimposed on the display area of the liquid crystal display 51. The movable means 902 moves between the initial position 912 and the movable position 922. The initial position 912 is a position that does not overlap the display area of the liquid crystal display 51. Further, the movable position 922 is a position superimposed on the display area of the liquid crystal display 51. The movable means 903 moves between the initial position 913 and the movable position 923. The initial position 913 and the movable position 923 are positions that do not overlap the display area of the liquid crystal display 51.

In the present embodiment, the sub control unit 91 operates as a confirmation operation control means, and confirms the operation of the movable means 901 to 903 under a predetermined condition. The predetermined conditions are, for example, when the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on, when an operation error of the movable means 901 to 903 is detected, or when it is desired to confirm the operation or the initial position of the movable means 901 to 903. is there.

Specifically, the sub-control unit 91 moves the movable means 901 to 903 to the movable positions 921 to 923 (FIGS. 5A to 5C). In the illustrated example, the movable means 901 to 903 exist at the initial positions 911 to 913 before the operation check (FIG. 5 (A)), but the movable means 901 to 903 are present at the initial positions 911 to 913 before the operation check. The movable means 901 to 903 are moved to the movable positions 921 to 923 even when they are not present in 913 (FIG. 5 (C)). After that, the sub control unit 91 moves the movable means 901 to 903 from the movable positions 921 to 923 to the initial positions 911 to 913 (FIGS. 5C to 5E).

By confirming the operation of the movable means 901 to 903 in this way, the movable means 901 to 903 can be moved to the initial positions 911 to 913 after the operation confirmation. Further, for example, by detecting the operation of the movable means 901 to 903 in the operation check with, for example, a sensor (not shown), it is possible to confirm whether or not the movable means 901 to 903 operate normally.

In the operation check of the movable means 901 to 903, since the movable means 901 to 903 actually move, it takes time to complete the operation check. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the initial setting of the effect control board 90 is performed in parallel with the operation confirmation of the movable means 901 to 903. The initial setting of the effect control board 90 is a process of making settings necessary for the effect control board 90 to operate. For example, the sub control unit 91 operates as an initial setting means, and the sub CPU 91a performs the initial setting of the effect control board 90 by reading and executing the program stored in the ROM 91b. By performing the initial setting of the effect control board 90, each process by the effect control board 90 can be executed. For example, displaying an effect image or the like on the liquid crystal display 51, outputting sound from the speakers 53 and 54, accepting an operation of the player side setting switch 70, and performing processing based on the accepted operation. Can be done.

In the example shown in FIG. 5, the initial setting of the effect control board 90 is set while the movable means 901 to 903 move from the initial positions 911 to 913 to the movable positions 921 to 923 (FIGS. 5A to 5B). Is going. Further, by completing the initial setting of the effect control board 90, for example, the effect image can be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 (FIGS. 5C to 5E).

As described above, even if the movable means 901 to 903 are moving during the confirmation operation execution period, the operation of the player side setting switch 70 is accepted and accepted after the initial setting period setting of the effect control board 90 is completed. The sub-control unit 91 can perform processing based on the operation. However, it is troublesome if the processing associated with the operation of the player-side setting switch 70 is performed while the movable means 901 to 903 are operating during the confirmation operation execution period. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the operation of the player-side setting switch 70 is not accepted during the confirmation operation execution period, and the troublesomeness of the confirmation operation execution period is reduced. Further, in the present embodiment, the player side setting switch 70 can be turned on and off. Therefore, during the confirmation operation execution period, the player side setting switch 70 is turned off to make it difficult for the player to operate the player side setting switch 70, thereby reducing the annoyance of the confirmation operation execution period.

FIG. 6 shows a period for executing the confirmation operation of the movable means 901 to 903, a period for prohibiting input reception of the player side setting switch 70, and a period for turning off the player side setting switch 70 after the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on. , It is a figure which showed the period which allowed the input reception of a player side setting switch 70, and the period which a player side setting switch 70 is turned on.

In the illustrated example, the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 901 to 903 is from the power-on of the slot machine 1 to the time t1. Further, the period for prohibiting input acceptance of the player-side setting switch 70 and the period for turning off the player-side setting switch 70 are from after the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on to time t2. Further, the period for permitting input acceptance of the player-side setting switch 70 and the period for turning on the player-side setting switch 70 are periods after time t2.

As shown in the figure, the period from the power-on of the slot machine 1 to the time t2 is longer than the period from the power-on of the slot machine 1 to the time t1. In this way, by controlling the period during which input acceptance of the player side setting switch 70 is prohibited and the period during which input acceptance is permitted, the operation of the player side setting switch 70 is not accepted during the confirmation operation execution period. Can be done. As a result, the processing associated with the operation of the player-side setting switch 70 is not performed during the confirmation operation execution period, and the troublesomeness during the confirmation operation execution period can be reduced. Further, by controlling the period for turning off the player side setting switch 70 and the period for turning it on, it is possible to make it difficult for the player side setting switch 70 to be operated during the confirmation operation execution period. As a result, the processing associated with the operation of the player-side setting switch 70 is less likely to be performed during the confirmation operation execution period, and the annoyance during the confirmation operation execution period can be reduced.

The relationship between the time t1 and the time t2 is as long as the period from the power-on of the slot machine 1 to the time t2 is longer than the period from the power-on of the slot machine 1 to the time t1. It may be. That is, it may be a period during which input acceptance of the player side setting switch 70 is prohibited until the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 901 to 903 is completed. Further, it may be a period during which the player side setting switch 70 is turned off until the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 901 to 903 is completed.

FIG. 7 shows the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 901 to 903 and the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 901 to 903 when, for example, there is a problem in the operation of the movable means 901 to 903 and the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 901 to 903 is longer than in the normal state. A period during which input acceptance of the player side setting switch 70 is prohibited, a period during which the player side setting switch 70 is turned off, a period during which input acceptance of the player side setting switch 70 is permitted, and a period during which the player side setting switch 70 is turned on. It is a figure which showed.

The normal confirmation operation execution period of the movable meanss 901 to 903 is from the power-on of the slot machine 1 to the time t1. However, in the illustrated example, the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 901 to 903 is longer than the normal time, and is from the power-on of the slot machine 1 to the time t3.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 901 to 903 becomes long, the period for prohibiting the input reception of the player side setting switch 70 is set from the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 901 to 903. Also lengthen. In the illustrated example, the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 901 to 903 is from the power-on of the slot machine 1 to the time t3, and the period of prohibiting the input reception of the player side setting switch 70 is the period of the slot machine 1. It is from after the power is turned on to time t4. Further, the period for permitting the input acceptance of the player side setting switch 70 is the period after the time t4.

As a result, even when the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 901 to 903 is longer than the normal time, the processing associated with the operation of the player side setting switch 70 is not performed during the confirmation operation execution period. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the annoyance during the confirmation operation execution period.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 901 to 903 becomes long, the period for turning off the player side setting switch 70 is made longer than the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 901 to 903. .. In the illustrated example, the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 901 to 903 is from the power-on of the slot machine 1 to the time t3, and the period of turning off the player side setting switch 70 is after the power-on of the slot machine 1. From to time t4. Further, the period for turning on the player-side setting switch 70 is the period after the time t4.

As a result, even when the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 901 to 903 is longer than the normal time, it is possible to make it difficult for the player side setting switch 70 to be operated during the confirmation operation execution period. Therefore, the processing associated with the operation of the player-side setting switch 70 is less likely to be performed during the confirmation operation execution period, and the annoyance during the confirmation operation execution period can be reduced.

As shown in the figure, the period from the power-on of the slot machine 1 to the time t4 is longer than the period from the power-on of the slot machine 1 to the time t3. In this way, by controlling the period during which the input acceptance of the player-side setting switch 70 is prohibited and the period during which the input acceptance of the player side setting switch 70 is permitted according to the length of the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 901 to 903, the confirmation operation execution period Can prevent the operation of the player-side setting switch 70 from being accepted. As a result, the processing associated with the operation of the player-side setting switch 70 is not performed during the confirmation operation execution period, and the troublesomeness during the confirmation operation execution period can be reduced. Further, by controlling the period for turning off the player side setting switch 70 and the period for turning it on according to the length of the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 901 to 903, the player side is in the confirmation operation execution period. It is possible to make it difficult to operate the setting switch 70. As a result, the processing associated with the operation of the player-side setting switch 70 is less likely to be performed during the confirmation operation execution period, and the annoyance during the confirmation operation execution period can be reduced.

The relationship between the time t3 and the time t4 is as long as the period from the power-on of the slot machine 1 to the time t4 is longer than the period from the power-on of the slot machine 1 to the time t2. It may be. That is, it may be a period during which input acceptance of the player side setting switch 70 is prohibited until the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 901 to 903 is completed. Further, it may be a period during which the player side setting switch 70 is turned off until the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 901 to 903 is completed.

In the above-mentioned example, the movable means 901 to 903 were operated at the same time during the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 901 to 903, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the movable means 901 to 903 may be individually moved during the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 901 to 903. As a specific example, the movable means 901 is first operated to the movable position 921, and then the movable means 901 is operated from the movable position 921 to the initial position 911. Subsequently, the movable means 902 is operated to the movable position 922, and then the movable means 902 is operated from the movable position 922 to the initial position 912. Subsequently, the movable means 903 is operated to the movable position 923, and then the movable means 903 is operated from the movable position 923 to the initial position 913. The operation confirmation order of the movable means 901 to 903 may be any order. Further, the timing of checking the operation of the plurality of movable means 901 to 903 may overlap. For example, the operation check of the movable means 902 or the movable means 903 may be started while the operation check of the movable means 901 is being performed.

When checking the operation of the movable means 901 to 903 individually, after the operation check of the predetermined movable means 901 to 903 is completed, the period for permitting the input acceptance of the player side setting switch 70 and the player side setting. It may be a period for turning on the switch 70. For example, if only the movable means 901 is troublesome to operate at the same time as the processing associated with the operation of the player side setting switch 70 among the movable means 901 to 903, the player after the operation check of the movable means 901 is completed. It may be a period during which input acceptance of the side setting switch 70 is permitted and a period during which the player side setting switch 70 is turned on.

FIG. 8 shows the confirmation of the movable means 901 to 903 in the case where the period for permitting the input reception of the player side setting switch 70 and the period for turning on the player side setting switch 70 after the operation check of the movable means 901 is completed. The operation execution period, the period for prohibiting the input acceptance of the player side setting switch 70, the period for turning off the player side setting switch 70, the period for permitting the input acceptance of the player side setting switch 70, and the player side setting switch. It is a figure which showed the period in which 70 is turned on.

In the illustrated example, the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 901 is the period from the power-on of the slot machine 1 to the time t1. Further, the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 902 is a period from time t1 to time t5. Further, the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 903 is a period from time t5 to time t6.

Further, the period for prohibiting input acceptance of the player-side setting switch 70 and the period for turning off the player-side setting switch 70 are from after the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on to time t2. Further, the period for permitting input acceptance of the player-side setting switch 70 and the period for turning on the player-side setting switch 70 are periods after time t2.

As shown in the figure, the period from the power-on of the slot machine 1 to the time t2 is longer than the period from the power-on of the slot machine 1 to the time t1. In this way, by controlling the period during which input acceptance of the player side setting switch 70 is prohibited and the period during which input acceptance is permitted, the operation of the player side setting switch 70 is not accepted during the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 901. Can be done. As a result, the processing associated with the operation of the player-side setting switch 70 is not performed during the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 901, and the troublesomeness during the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 901 can be reduced. Further, by controlling the period for turning off the player side setting switch 70 and the period for turning it on, it is possible to make it difficult for the player side setting switch 70 to be operated during the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 901. it can. As a result, it becomes difficult to perform processing associated with the operation of the player-side setting switch 70 during the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 901, and it is possible to reduce the annoyance during the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 901.

The relationship between the time t1 and the time t2 is as long as the period from the power-on of the slot machine 1 to the time t2 is longer than the period from the power-on of the slot machine 1 to the time t1. It may be. That is, it may be a period during which input acceptance of the player side setting switch 70 is prohibited until the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 901 ends. Further, the player-side setting switch 70 may be turned off until the confirmation operation execution period of the movable means 901 ends.

[Store payout rate setting process]
The store-side payout rate setting process executed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. The store-side payout rate setting process is a process executed when the store clerk changes the set value of the payout rate.

The main control unit 41 determines whether or not the setting key switch 37 is turned on (S110). That is, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state when the power supply of the slot machine 1 is switched from the OFF state to the ON state. Alternatively, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the setting key switch 37 has been switched to the ON state while the power of the slot machine 1 is ON. When the main control unit 41 determines that the setting key switch 37 is in the OFF state (N in S110), the main control unit 41 ends the store-side payout rate setting process.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 41 determines that the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state (Y in S110), the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the door open detection switch 25 is in the ON state (S111). That is, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the front door 1b closes the open front side of the housing 1a. When the door open detection switch 25 is in the ON state, that is, when it is determined that the front door 1b is closed (Y in S111), the main control unit 41 ends the store-side payout rate setting process.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 41 determines that the door open detection switch 25 is in the OFF state, that is, the front door 1b is open (N in S111), the main control unit 41 shifts to the setting change state for the sub control unit 91. A setting start command that can be specified to be performed is transmitted (S112). After that, the main control unit 41 shifts to the setting change state (S113).

In the setting change state, the main control unit 41 reads the current setting value from the RAM 41c, converts the read setting value into a display value (S114), and displays the converted display value on the setting value display 24 (S115). .. After that, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the reset / setting switch 38 has been operated by the clerk (S116). When the main control unit 41 determines that the reset / setting switch 38 has been operated within a predetermined period (Y in S116), the main control unit 41 updates the display value by 1 (S117), and displays the updated display value on the set value display 24. Display (S115).

On the other hand, when the main control unit 41 determines that the reset / setting switch 38 has not been operated within a predetermined period (N in S116), the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the start switch 7 has been operated (S118). When the main control unit 41 determines that the start switch 7 has not been operated within a predetermined period (N in S118), the main control unit 41 returns to the process of S116.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 41 determines that the start switch 7 has been operated within a predetermined period (Y in S118), the main control unit 41 converts the display value displayed on the set value display 24 into the set value and stores it in the RAM 41c. (S119).

Next, the main control unit 41 transmits a setting end command capable of specifying that the setting change state is ended to the sub control unit 91 (S120). After that, the main control unit 41 ends the fixed change state (S121), and ends the store-side payout rate setting process.

In this way, since only the clerk can open the front door 1b, the clerk operates the setting key switch 37 which cannot be operated by anyone other than the clerk, so that the payout rate can be set, which greatly affects the advantage of the game. can do. That is, the payout rate can be set on condition that the power of the slot machine 1 is ON, the front door 1b is opened, and the setting key switch 37 is operated.

Here, even if the front door 1b is closed, for example, the setting key switch 37 can be operated by passing a thin instrument such as a wire through the gap between the housing 1a and the front door 1b, or the housing 1a and the front door 1b. There is a risk that the same situation as when the setting key switch 37 is operated by using a special machine by prying the gap between the doors with a tool may be created.

However, in the present embodiment, even if the setting key switch 37 is operated by such fraudulent acts, the setting of the payout rate is prohibited when the front door 1b is closed, so that the payout rate is set. It is possible to prevent it from being done illegally.

[Store production setting process]
The store-side effect setting process executed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. The store-side effect setting process is a process executed when the store clerk changes the setting that is the reference of the effect mode during the game. By executing the store-side effect setting process, the store clerk sets a size that serves as a reference for the volume in the production (first volume stage) and a size that serves as a reference for the amount of light in the production (first light amount stage). can do. Further, by executing the store-side effect setting process, the store clerk can set a normal mode in which the power is not saved or a power saving mode in which the power is saved.

The main control unit 41 determines whether or not the channel of the store-side setting switch 60 has been switched (S130). When the main control unit 41 determines that the channel of the store-side setting switch 60 has been switched (Y in S130), the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the door open detection switch 25 is in the ON state (S131). When the door open detection switch 25 is in the ON state, that is, when it is determined that the front door 1b is closed (Y in S131), the main control unit 41 ends the store-side effect setting process.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 41 determines that the door open detection switch 25 is in the OFF state, that is, the front door 1b is open (N in S131), the main control unit 41 determines the size as a reference for the volume and the amount of light in the production. , Set to the first volume step and the first light intensity step corresponding to the channel setting after switching (S132). The first volume step and the first light amount step set at this time are not immediately reflected in the volume and light amount of the effect, and then when the player operates the player side setting switch 70, the setting screen is displayed. It will be reflected when it is displayed. After that, the main control unit 41 ends the store-side effect setting process.

In this way, since only the clerk can open the front door 1b, the clerk operates the store-side setting switch 60, which cannot be operated by anyone other than the clerk, and serves as a reference for the volume and the amount of light in the production during the game. The size can be set. That is, the reference setting of the volume and the amount of light can be performed on condition that the power of the slot machine 1 is ON, the front door 1b is opened, and the store side setting switch 60 is operated.

Here, even if the front door 1b is closed, for example, the store side setting switch 60 can be operated by passing a thin instrument such as a wire through the gap between the housing 1a and the front door 1b, or the housing 1a and the front door can be operated. There is a risk that the same situation as when the store-side setting switch 60 is operated by using a special machine by prying the gap of 1b with a tool may be created.

However, in the present embodiment, even if the store-side setting switch 60 is operated by such fraudulent acts, the reference setting of the volume and the amount of light is prohibited when the front door 1b is closed. It is possible to prevent the standard setting of the amount of light from being improperly performed, and it is also possible to prevent the standard setting of the volume and the amount of light from being set unintentionally by the clerk.

When the main control unit 41 determines that the channel of the store-side setting switch 60 has not been switched (N in S130), the main control unit 41 determines whether or not all the stop switches have been pressed and held at the same time (S133). When it is determined that all the stop switches have not been pressed and held at the same time (N in S133), the main control unit 41 ends the store-side effect setting process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that all the stop switches are pressed and held at the same time (Y in S133), the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the door open detection switch 25 is in the ON state (S134). When the door open detection switch 25 is in the ON state, that is, when it is determined that the front door 1b is closed (Y in S134), the main control unit 41 ends the store-side effect setting process.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 41 determines that the door open detection switch 25 is in the OFF state, that is, the front door 1b is open (N in S134), the main control unit 41 shifts to the mode selection state for the sub control unit 91. A mode selection start command that can be specified to be performed is transmitted (S135).

In the mode selection state, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the normal mode or the power saving mode is selected by the store clerk (S136). When it is determined that any mode has been selected within a predetermined period (Y in S136), the main control unit 41 sets the selected mode (S137). After that, the main control unit 41 transmits a mode specifying command capable of specifying the selected mode to the sub control unit 91 (S138). As a result, the sub control unit 91 controls various effect means according to the selected mode. For example, when the power saving mode is set, the number of LEDs used for the effect is reduced and the amount of LED light is reduced as compared with the normal mode.

On the other hand, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the end operation has been performed when it is determined that none of the modes has been selected within a predetermined period (N in S136) or after the mode specifying command is transmitted (S139). ). This end operation is performed by pressing and holding the start switch 7. When the main control unit 41 determines that the end operation has not been performed within the predetermined period (N in S139), the main control unit 41 returns to the process of S136.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 41 determines that the start switch 7 has been pressed and held within a predetermined period (Y in S139), the main control unit 41 can specify that the sub control unit 91 ends the mode selection state. A command is transmitted (S140), and the store-side effect setting process is completed.

In this way, the power saving mode can be set by the clerk pressing and holding all the stop switches at the same time. That is, the power saving mode can be set on the condition that the power of the slot machine 1 is ON, the front door 1b is opened, and all the stop switches are pressed and held at the same time.

Here, since the stop switch is arranged outside the front door 1b, it can be operated by, for example, a player other than the clerk. Therefore, there is a risk that the player unexpectedly presses and holds all the stop switches at the same time during the game, and the power saving mode is set.

However, in the present embodiment, even if all the stop switches are pressed and held at the same time, the setting of the power saving mode is prohibited when the front door 1b is closed, so that the power saving mode is set when the clerk does not intend. Can be prevented from being performed.

[Volume and light intensity setting screen]
The volume and light amount setting screens will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 11, in the present embodiment, when the player operates the player side setting switch 70, a setting screen for adjusting the volume and the amount of light is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 51. ..

On the setting screen, in the volume setting area 52a, the numbers "2" to "14" corresponding to the volume stage (second volume stage) that can be set by the player (the larger the number, the louder the volume) are displayed. To. This is also called a volume display. Further, among the numbers "2" to "14", the number corresponding to the currently set volume is highlighted (blinking display, display for changing the color of the selected item, etc.). The player can move the highlighting and change the second volume stage by performing a predetermined change operation. For example, the player can move the highlighting to the right to raise the second volume level by operating the stop switch 8R, while moving the highlighting to the left by operating the stop switch 8L. The second volume step can be lowered.

On the setting screen, in the light amount setting area 52b, the numbers of "50%", "75%", and "100%" corresponding to the light amount stage (second light amount stage) that can be set by the player (the larger number). The amount of light is large) is displayed. This is also called a light intensity display. Furthermore, among the numbers of "50%", "75%", and "100%", the number corresponding to the currently set light intensity is highlighted (blinking display, display for changing the color of the selected item, etc.). To. The player can move the highlighting and change the second light intensity stage by performing a predetermined change operation. For example, the player can move the highlighting to the right by operating the stop switch 8R to raise the second light intensity step, while the player can move the highlighting to the left by operating the stop switch 8L. The second light intensity step can be lowered.

The switching between the second volume stage and the second volume stage can be performed by operating the stop switch 8C.

Further, on the setting screen, in the character effect area 52c, a screen of a battle effect between a ally character and an enemy character, which is a part of the effect screen actually used during the game, is displayed. In the present embodiment, the player can set the volume and the amount of light by using this battle effect as a sample. Specifically, if the player raises the second volume step, the volume of the voice of the ally character (in the example of FIG. 11, the voice of "Did you come !!") is raised, and the player can lower the second volume step. For example, the volume of the voice of the ally character is lowered. Further, if the player raises the second light intensity stage, the light intensity of the battle effect screen increases and becomes brighter, and if the player lowers the second light intensity step, the light intensity of the battle effect screen decreases and becomes darker.

In this way, since the volume and the amount of light during the production can be set by taking the actual production during the game as an example, it is easy for the player to make the settings.

[Relationship between the state of the store setting switch and the volume and amount of light]
The relationship between the state of the store-side setting switch 60 (that is, the set channel) and the volume and the amount of light will be described with reference to FIG.

The channel of the store side setting switch 60 is divided into 16 stages of "0" to "F". That is, the volume and light amount stages (corresponding to the first volume stage and the first light amount stage) set by the clerk are divided into 16 stages. Further, the channel of the store-side setting switch 60 is associated with a number that is first highlighted (also referred to as initial display) when the setting screen is displayed.

For example, when the channel of the store side setting switch 60 is switched to "0", the initial display of the volume becomes "2" and the initial display of the light amount becomes "30%". When the channel of the store side setting switch 60 is switched to "9", the initial display of the volume becomes "14" and the initial display of the light amount becomes "100%". The player can recognize the current volume and amount of light by checking the initial display screen (highlighted numbers).

When the channel of the store-side setting switch 60 is set within the range of "A" to "F", the setting of the second volume stage and the second light amount stage is prohibited, and the setting screen is not displayed. Therefore, when the channel of the store-side setting switch 60 is set within the range of "A" to "F", the initial display is not associated.

The actual volume range is associated with the channel of the store-side setting switch 60. The numbers in parentheses in the column of the actual volume range in FIG. 12 are volume displays corresponding to the second volume step set by the player. That is, it corresponds to the number in the volume setting area 52a of FIG. The larger the value of the actual volume range, the louder the volume.

For example, when the channel of the store setting switch 60 is set in the range of "0" to "4", the actual volume is set in the range of "2" to "14", and the volume at that time is further set. The display is "2" to "14". When the channel of the store side setting switch 60 is set within the range of "5" to "9", the actual volume is set within the range of "10" to "22", and the volume display at that time is It becomes "2" to "14". Therefore, when the channel of the store side setting switch 60 is set within the range of "0" to "4", the second volume stage is set to "2", "3", "4" by the operation of the player.・ ・ As the volume increases to “14”, the actual volume also increases to “2”, “3”, “4” ... “14”. Further, when the channel of the store side setting switch 60 is set within the range of "5" to "9", the second volume stage is set to "2", "3", "4" by the operation of the player. When it goes up to "14", the actual volume also goes up to "10", "11", "12" ... "22" accordingly.

When the channel of the store side setting switch 60 is set within the range of "A" to "F", the actual volume becomes a fixed value. For example, when the channel of the store side setting switch 60 is set to "A", the actual volume is fixed to "2", and when it is set to "B", the actual volume is fixed to "4". When set to "C", the actual volume is fixed at "7", when set to "D", the actual volume is fixed at "10", and when set to "E", it is actually The volume of is fixed at "15", and when set to "F", the actual volume is fixed at "22".

Further, the actual light amount range is associated with the channel of the store-side setting switch 60. The actual light amount range coincides with the light amount display range corresponding to the second light amount step set by the player. That is, it corresponds to the number in the light amount setting area 52b of FIG. The larger the value of the actual light amount range, the larger the light amount.

For example, when the channel of the store side setting switch 60 is set within the range of "0" to "3", the actual amount of light is set to any of "30%", "65%", and "100%". The light intensity display at that time is "30%", "65%", and "100%". When the channel of the store side setting switch 60 is set within the range of "4" to "9", the actual amount of light is set to any of "50%", "75%", and "100%". The light amount display at that time is "50%", "75%", and "100%". Therefore, when the channel of the store side setting switch 60 is set within the range of "0" to "3", the second light intensity step is set to "30%", "65%", and "" by the operation of the player. When set to any of "100%", the actual amount of light is also set to any of "30%", "65%", and "100%" accordingly. Further, when the channel of the store side setting switch 60 is set within the range of "4" to "9", the second light intensity step is set to "50%", "75%", and by the operation of the player. When set to any of "100%", the actual amount of light is also set to any of "50%", "75%", and "100%" accordingly.

When the channel of the store side setting switch 60 is set within the range of "A" to "F", the actual amount of light becomes a fixed value. For example, when the channel of the store setting switch 60 is set to "A" or "B", the actual volume is fixed at "30%", and when it is set to "C" or "D", the actual volume is actually set. The volume is fixed at "75%" and when set to "E" or "F", the actual volume is fixed at "100%".

[Player side setting switch on / off]
With reference to FIG. 13, the control of turning on and off the player-side setting switch 70 executed by the sub-control unit 91 will be described. As described above, it is troublesome if the processing associated with the operation of the player-side setting switch 70 is performed while the movable means 901 to 903 are operating during the confirmation operation execution period. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the player side setting switch 70 is turned off during the confirmation operation execution period so that the player side setting switch 70 is not easily operated by the player. As a result, the processing associated with the operation of the player-side setting switch 70 is less likely to be performed during the confirmation operation execution period, and the annoyance during the confirmation operation execution period can be reduced.

Also, during the game, the setting screen is not displayed and the volume and light amount are not set. That is, during the game, input acceptance of the player side setting switch 70 is prohibited.
Therefore, in order to notify that the operation of the player-side setting switch 70 is invalid, the sub-control unit 91 turns off the player-side setting switch 70 during the game.

The sub control unit 91 determines whether or not the game is in progress based on the command transmitted from the main control unit 41. For example, in the present embodiment, when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game, an "internal winning command" is transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91. Further, at the end of the game, a "game state command" is transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91. Therefore, the sub-control unit 91 can determine that the period from receiving the "internal winning command" to receiving the "game state command" is in the game. Further, the sub-control unit 91 can determine that the period from the reception of the "game state command" to the reception of the "internal winning command" is not in the game.

The sub control unit 91 determines whether or not the game is in progress (S201). When it is determined that the game is not in progress (N in S201), the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the movable means confirmation operation is being executed (S202). When it is determined that the movable means confirmation operation is not in the execution period (N in S202), the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the player-side setting switch 70 is off (S203). When it is determined that the player side setting switch 70 is off (Y in S203), the sub control unit 91 turns on the player side setting switch 70 (S204), and ends the player side setting switch lighting process. .. If it is determined in S203 that the player-side setting switch 70 is not off (N in S203), the player-side setting switch lighting process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S201 that the game is in progress (Y in S201) or when it is determined in S202 that the movable means confirmation operation is being executed (Y in S202), the sub-control unit 91 is a player. It is determined whether or not the side setting switch 70 is lit (S205). When it is determined that the player side setting switch 70 is lit (Y in S205), the sub control unit 91 turns off the player side setting switch 70 (S206), and ends the player side setting switch lighting process. .. When it is determined in S205 that the player side setting switch 70 is not lit (N in S205), the player side setting switch lighting process ends.

By the player-side setting switch lighting process described above, the sub-control unit 91 can turn off the player-side setting switch 70 during the confirmation operation execution period. This makes it difficult for the player to operate the player-side setting switch 70 during the confirmation operation execution period. Therefore, the processing associated with the operation of the player-side setting switch 70 is less likely to be performed during the confirmation operation execution period, and the annoyance during the confirmation operation execution period can be reduced.

Further, by the player side setting switch lighting process described above, the sub control unit 91 can turn off the player side setting switch 70 during the game. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the operation of the player-side setting switch 70 is invalid during the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an invalid operation by the player during the game.

In the player-side effect setting process described above, the sub-control unit 91 turns off the player-side setting switch 70 during the confirmation operation execution period, but the player side until the initial setting of the effect control board 90 is completed. The setting switch 70 may be turned off. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 5, the initial setting of the effect control board 90 is completed within the confirmation operation execution period, but there is an example in which the initial setting of the effect control board 90 is not completed within the confirmation operation execution period. If the player side setting switch 70 is turned on when the initial setting of the effect control board 90 is not completed, the player side setting switch 70 is set to the player even though the initial setting of the effect control board 90 is not completed. It becomes easy to operate. For example, if the player side setting switch 70 is operated when the initial setting of the effect control board 90 is not completed, the effect display displayed by the liquid crystal display 51 is not normally displayed and the setting screen is displayed. It may be done. Therefore, the sub-control unit 91 can make it difficult for the player to operate by turning off the player-side setting switch 70 until the initial setting of the effect control board 90 is completed. For example, the liquid crystal display 51 can be used. It is possible to reduce the display of the setting screen in a state where the effect display to be displayed is not normally performed.

Further, the sub-control unit 91 may turn off the player-side setting switch 70 until both the confirmation operation execution period and the initial setting of the effect control board 90 are completed. For example, depending on the operating conditions of the movable means 901 to 903, the initial setting of the effect control board 90 may be completed earlier than the confirmation operation execution period, or the confirmation operation execution period may be completed before the initial setting of the effect control board 90. There are both cases where is completed first. As a specific example, when the movable means 901 to 903 operate smoothly, the confirmation operation execution period is completed earlier than the initial setting of the effect control board 90, but the movable means 901 to 903 are caught during the operation. If there is, the confirmation operation execution period becomes longer, and the initial setting of the effect control board 90 may be completed earlier than the confirmation operation execution period.

Therefore, the sub-control unit 91 turns off the player-side setting switch 70 until both the confirmation operation execution period and the initial setting of the effect control board 90 are completed, so that the confirmation operation execution period and the initial setting of the effect control board 90 are started. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to operate the player-side setting switch 70 when the setting is being performed. As a result, for example, the processing associated with the operation of the player-side setting switch 70 is less likely to be performed during the confirmation operation execution period, and the annoyance during the confirmation operation execution period can be reduced. Further, for example, it is possible to reduce the display of the setting screen in a state where the effect display displayed by the liquid crystal display 51 is not normally performed.

[Player-side production setting process]
The player-side effect setting process executed by the sub-control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIG. The player-side effect setting process is a process executed when the player changes the setting of the effect mode during the game. By executing the effect setting process on the player side, the player can set the volume level in the effect (second volume stage) and the amount of light in the effect (second light amount stage). ..

As described above, it is troublesome if the processing associated with the operation of the player-side setting switch 70 is performed while the movable means 901 to 903 are operating during the confirmation operation execution period. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the input reception of the player side setting switch 70 is prohibited and the operation is invalidated during the confirmation operation execution period. As a result, the processing associated with the operation of the player-side setting switch 70 is not performed during the confirmation operation execution period, and the troublesomeness during the confirmation operation execution period can be reduced.

Also, during the game, the setting screen is not displayed and the volume and light amount are not set. That is, during the game, the input reception of the player side setting switch 70 is prohibited, and the operation is invalidated.

The sub control unit 91 determines whether or not the player-side setting switch 70 has been operated (S150). When the sub control unit 91 determines that the player side setting switch 70 has not been operated (N in S150), the sub control unit 91 ends the player side effect setting process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the player-side setting switch 70 has been operated (Y in S150), the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the game is in progress (S1501). When it is determined that the game is in progress (Y in S1501), the player-side effect setting process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game is not in progress (N in S1501), the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the movable means confirmation operation is being executed (S1502). When it is determined that the movable means confirmation operation execution period is in progress (Y in S1502), the player-side effect setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the movable means confirmation operation is not in the execution period (N in S1502), the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the door open detection switch 25 is in the ON state (S151). When the sub-control unit 91 determines that the door open detection switch 25 is in the OFF state, that is, the front door 1b is open (N in S151), the sub-control unit 91 ends the player-side effect setting process.

On the other hand, when the sub control unit 91 determines that the door open detection switch 25 is in the ON state, that is, the front door 1b is closed (Y in S151), the channel setting of the store side setting switch 60 is "A". -It is determined whether or not it is within the range of "F" (S152). When the sub-control unit 91 determines that the channel setting of the store-side setting switch 60 is within the range of "A" to "F" (Y in S152), the player sets the second volume step and the second light amount step. In order to limit (prohibit) the setting, the player side effect setting process is terminated. In this case, the volume and the amount of light are set based on the channel setting of the player side setting switch 70 (that is, the first volume step and the first light amount step).

On the other hand, when the sub-control unit 91 determines that the channel setting of the store-side setting switch 60 is not within the range of "A" to "F" (N in S152), the setting screen shown in FIG. 11 is displayed on the liquid crystal display. In addition to displaying on 51, initial display is performed according to the channel setting of the store-side setting switch 60 (S153).

For example, FIG. 11 shows an example of a setting screen when the channel setting of the store-side setting switch 60 is within the range of “4” to “9”. In this case, the volume of "2" to "14" is displayed in the volume setting area 52a, and the light amount of "50%", "75%", and "100%" is displayed in the light amount setting area 52b. Is done. Further, in the volume setting area 52a, the initial display in which "10" is highlighted is performed, and in the light amount setting area 52b, the initial display in which "75%" is highlighted is performed.

In the present embodiment, the setting screen is displayed by operating the player-side setting switch 70 when the front door 1b is closed, but it continues even after the front door 1b is opened. The setting screen is displayed. Therefore, after the front door 1b is closed again, the setting screen before opening is continuously displayed. That is, once the setting screen is displayed, the setting screen continues to be displayed even if the front door 1b is opened.

After displaying the setting screen, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the volume or the amount of light has been changed based on the change operation using the stop switch of the player (S154). When the sub-control unit 91 determines that the volume or the amount of light has not been changed within a predetermined period (N in S154), the sub-control unit 91 shifts to the process of S159.

On the other hand, when the sub control unit 91 determines that the volume or the amount of light has been changed (Y in S154), the sub control unit 91 determines whether or not the channel setting of the store side setting switch 60 is within the range of "A" to "F". (S155). When the sub-control unit 91 determines that the channel setting of the store-side setting switch 60 is within the range of "A" to "F" (Y in S155), the player sets the second volume step and the second light amount step. In order to limit (prohibit) the setting, the process proceeds to S159.

On the other hand, when the sub-control unit 91 determines that the channel setting of the store-side setting switch 60 is not within the range of "A" to "F" (N in S155), it determines whether or not the changed target is the volume. Judgment (S156). When the sub-control unit 91 determines that the changed target is not the volume but the amount of light (N in S156), the sub-control unit 91 sets the magnitude of the amount of light in the production as a reference setting based on the channel setting of the store side setting switch 60 and the player. The light amount is set according to the light amount setting selected by (S158). In the light amount setting area 52b of FIG. 11, the highlighting moves based on the selected light amount, and in the character effect area 52c, the light amount of the battle effect screen changes based on the selected light amount. After that, the sub control unit 91 shifts to the process of S159.

On the other hand, when the sub-control unit 91 determines that the changed target is the volume (Y in S156), the sub-control unit 91 executes the volume change operation process (S157), and then shifts to the process of S159.

The sub control unit 91 determines whether or not the end operation has been performed in the process of S159 (S159). This end operation is performed by pressing and holding the player-side setting switch 70.

When it is determined that the end operation has not been performed within the predetermined period (N in S159), the sub control unit 91 returns to the process of S154. On the other hand, when it is determined that the end operation has been performed (Y in S159), the sub-control unit 91 ends the display of the setting screen (S160), and ends the player-side effect setting process. When the player-side effect setting process is completed, the volume set based on the first volume stage and the second volume stage and the light amount set based on the first light amount stage and the second light amount stage are reflected in the effect. To.

By the player-side effect setting process described above, the sub-control unit 91 can prohibit the input acceptance of the player-side setting switch 70 during the confirmation operation execution period. As a result, during the confirmation operation execution period, the processing associated with the operation of the player-side setting switch 70 is not performed, and the troublesomeness during the confirmation operation execution period can be reduced.

Further, by the player-side effect setting process described above, the sub-control unit 91 can prohibit the input acceptance of the player-side setting switch 70 during the game. As a result, during the game, the processing associated with the operation of the player-side setting switch 70 is not performed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In the player-side effect setting process described above, the sub-control unit 91 prohibits the input acceptance of the player-side setting switch 70 during the confirmation operation execution period, but until the initial setting of the effect control board 90 is completed. Input acceptance of the player side setting switch 70 may be prohibited. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 5, the initial setting of the effect control board 90 is completed within the confirmation operation execution period, but there is an example in which the initial setting of the effect control board 90 is not completed within the confirmation operation execution period. If input acceptance of the player side setting switch 70 is permitted when the initial setting of the effect control board 90 is not completed, for example, the effect display displayed by the liquid crystal display 51 is not normally displayed and the setting screen is displayed. May be done. Therefore, the sub-control unit 91 prohibits the input acceptance of the player side setting switch 70 until the initial setting of the effect control board 90 is completed, and the player side setting switch 70 waits until the initial setting of the effect control board 90 is completed. The setting screen may not be displayed even if the player's operation is accepted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting screen from being displayed in a state where the effect display displayed by the liquid crystal display 51 is not normally performed.

Further, the sub control unit 91 may prohibit the input acceptance of the player side setting switch 70 until both the confirmation operation execution period and the initial setting of the effect control board 90 are completed. For example, depending on the operating conditions of the movable means 901 to 903, the initial setting of the effect control board 90 may be completed earlier than the confirmation operation execution period, or the confirmation operation execution period may be completed before the initial setting of the effect control board 90. There are both cases where is completed first. As a specific example, when the movable means 901 to 903 operate smoothly, the confirmation operation execution period is completed earlier than the initial setting of the effect control board 90, but the movable means 901 to 903 are caught during the operation. If there is, the confirmation operation execution period becomes longer, and the initial setting of the effect control board 90 may be completed earlier than the confirmation operation execution period.

Therefore, the sub-control unit 91 prohibits the input acceptance of the player side setting switch 70 until both the confirmation operation execution period and the initial setting of the effect control board 90 are completed, and the confirmation operation execution period and the effect control board 90 The setting screen may not be displayed even if the player side setting switch 70 accepts the player's operation until both the initial setting and the initial setting are completed. As a result, for example, during the confirmation operation execution period, the processing associated with the operation of the player-side setting switch 70 is not performed, and the troublesomeness during the confirmation operation execution period can be reduced. Further, for example, it is possible to prevent the setting screen from being displayed in a state where the effect display displayed by the liquid crystal display 51 is not normally performed.

[Volume change operation processing]
The volume change operation process executed by the sub-control unit 91 in S157 of FIG. 14 will be described with reference to FIG.

The sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the timer is counting during the confirmation sound output (S170). In the present embodiment, when the volume is changed by the player's change operation, the highlighting moves based on the selected volume in the volume setting area 52a of FIG. Further, a confirmation sound is output by utilizing the battle effect performed in the volume setting area 52a.
For example, as shown in the example of FIG. 11, the voice of "Did you come !!" is output as a confirmation sound. By outputting the confirmation sound, the player can confirm the changed volume. The confirmation sound output timer counts according to the confirmation sound output time, and when the count value reaches a predetermined value, the timer is up and the counting is stopped.

When the sub-control unit 91 determines that the timer is not counting during the confirmation sound output (N in S170), it determines whether or not the player has changed to the maximum volume that can be changed in the second volume stage (N). S171). When the sub control unit 91 determines that the volume has been changed to the maximum volume (Y in S171), the sub control unit 91 determines whether or not the volume has already been changed to the maximum volume (S172).

When the sub-control unit 91 determines that the volume has not been changed to the maximum volume yet (N in S172), the player selects the loudness of the volume in the production with the reference setting based on the channel setting of the store-side setting switch 60. The volume is set according to the volume setting (S177). After that, the sub-control unit 91 outputs the confirmation sound of the volume set in the process of S177 from the speakers 53 and 54 (S178), and shifts to the process of S179.

On the other hand, when the sub control unit 91 determines that the volume has already been changed to the maximum volume (Y in S172), the reference setting based on the channel setting of the store side setting switch 60 and the currently selected maximum volume setting are set. The confirmation sound of the volume corresponding to the above, that is, the confirmation sound of the maximum volume corresponding to the channel setting of the store side setting switch 60 is output from the speakers 53 and 54 (S178), and the process proceeds to S179.

When the sub-control unit 91 determines in the process of S171 that the volume has not been changed to the maximum volume (N in S171), whether or not the player has changed the volume to the minimum volume that can be changed in the second volume stage. Is determined (S171). When the sub control unit 91 determines that the volume has been changed to the minimum volume (Y in S174), the sub control unit 91 determines whether or not the volume has already been changed to the minimum volume (S175).

When the sub control unit 91 determines that the volume has already been changed to the minimum volume (Y in S175), the sub control unit 91 responds to the reference setting based on the channel setting of the store side setting switch 60 and the currently selected minimum volume setting. The confirmation sound of the volume, that is, the confirmation sound of the minimum volume corresponding to the channel setting of the store side setting switch 60 is output from the speakers 53 and 54 (S176), and the process proceeds to S179.

On the other hand, when the sub control unit 91 determines that the volume has not been changed to the minimum volume (N in S174) or has not yet been changed to the minimum volume (N in S175), the process of S177 is performed. Move to.

In the process of S179, the sub-control unit 91 starts counting the confirmation sound output timer (S179), and ends the volume change operation process.

On the other hand, when the sub-control unit 91 determines in the process of S170 that the timer during the confirmation sound output is being counted (Y in S170), the sub-control unit 91 subtracts 1 from the count of the timer during the confirmation sound output (S180). After that, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the timer is up when the count value of the timer during the confirmation sound output reaches a predetermined value (S181). When it is determined that the timer is not up (N in S181), the sub-control unit 91 ends the volume change operation process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the timer is up (Y in S181), the sub-control unit 91 ends the output of the confirmation sound (S182), and ends the volume change operation process.

In this way, by operating the player-side setting switch 70, the player can set the volume and the amount of light in the production during the game. That is, on condition that the power of the slot machine 1 is ON, the front door 1b is closed, and the player side setting switch 70 is operated, the setting screen is displayed and the volume and the amount of light can be set. Is.

Here, when the front door 1b is opened, the outside of the front door 1b may approach an adjacent slot machine. In such a case, there is a risk that another person other than the player, for example, a player sitting next to the player, touches and operates the player-side setting switch 70. In addition, while opening the front door 1b to clear the medal jam or changing the payout rate setting value, the clerk unknowingly touches and operates the player side setting switch 70. There is also a risk.

However, in the present embodiment, even if the player side setting switch 70 is operated by a person other than the player playing the slot machine 1, the setting of the volume and the amount of light is prohibited when the front door 1b is open. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally setting the volume and the amount of light.

Further, even if the front door 1b is opened once while the setting screen is displayed when the front door 1b is closed, the setting screen is continuously displayed. Therefore, even if the front door 1b is once opened by the player for clearing work such as medal clogging during the setting, when the front door 1b is closed again, the volume and the amount of light are continuously set from the continuation. be able to. Therefore, the convenience of the player is improved and the player does not feel dissatisfied.

In the present embodiment, the initial display of the volume and the amount of light, that is, the volume and the amount of light highlighted first when the setting screen is displayed is the state of the channel setting of the store side setting switch 60 (first volume step, first). It depends on one light intensity step). For example, as shown in FIG. 12, if the channel setting of the store side setting switch 60 is changed from "1" to "3", the initial display of the volume is also changed from "3" to "6" and the initial display of the amount of light is displayed. Is also changed from "30%" to "60%". If the initial display of the volume and the amount of light is constant regardless of the state of the channel setting of the store-side setting switch 60, the player misidentifies the actual volume and the amount of light. For example, if the initial display of the volume is always "2" regardless of whether the channel setting of the store setting switch 60 is "1" or "3", the player misunderstands the actual volume.

However, since the initial display of the volume and the amount of light changes according to the state of the channel setting of the store side setting switch 60 (first volume stage, first light amount stage), the player can set the channel of the store side setting switch 60. It is easy to grasp the state of, and there is no misunderstanding of the actual volume. As a result, the player can preferably set the volume and the amount of light.

Furthermore, since the initial display of the volume and the amount of light differs depending on whether the first volume stage or the first light amount stage is the highest stage or the lowest stage, the actual volume or the amount of light is less likely to be misunderstood, and the player can see. The volume and the amount of light can be preferably set.

When the initial display of the volume and the amount of light is such that the first volume stage or the first light amount stage is other than the highest stage, the second volume stage ("2" to "13") or the second light amount stage ("30") other than the highest stage is displayed. % ”,“ 65% ”,“ 50% ”,“ 75% ”), and the second volume stage (“14 ”), which is the highest stage when the first volume stage and the first light intensity stage are the highest stages. And the second light intensity stage (“100%”). Therefore, the actual volume and amount of light are less likely to be misidentified, and the player can appropriately adjust the volume and amount of light. Furthermore, the volume and the amount of light will not be higher than the settings on the amusement store side. Therefore, by setting the first volume stage and the first light amount stage to the maximum, the game store side can prevent unintended output of loud sound and lighting with bright light.

When the channel setting of the store side setting switch 60 is changed, the first volume stage and the first light amount stage are set (changed) for the first time when the setting screen is displayed, and the actual volume and light amount are reflected. That is, even if the store clerk changes the channel setting of the store side setting switch 60, it is not reflected in the volume and the amount of light at that time, and then the player operates the player side setting switch 70 to display the setting screen. It is reflected in the volume and the amount of light only when the display of the setting screen is completed. For example, normally, the player cannot set the first volume stage or the first light amount stage, so even if the first volume stage or the first light amount stage is changed, the player can change the volume or light amount before the change. Although it may be desired, even in such a case, the player can recognize the change in the volume and the amount of light by displaying the setting screen. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the volume and the amount of light from being changed at a timing not intended by the player.

When the second volume stage is set, a confirmation sound using the voice of the battle effect is output, so the volume setting can be confirmed while listening to the actual effect sound, and the player can easily set the volume. be able to. Further, when the second light amount stage is set, the light amount of the battle effect screen is changed, so that the light amount setting can be confirmed while looking at the actual effect screen, and the player can easily set the light amount. it can.

Since "A" to "F" that limit the adjustment of the volume and the amount of light by the player are prepared as the channels of the store side setting switch 60, the volume setting and the light amount setting on the player side can be restricted, and the game store can limit the adjustment. It is possible to prevent setting at an unintended volume and amount of light.

In the volume change operation process, the volume change operation can be invalidated during the output of the confirmation sound by first determining whether or not the timer during output of the confirmation sound is counting. Therefore, even if the player continuously changes the operation in a short period of time, it is possible to prevent the player from performing an unintended volume adjustment.

Further, if the player tries to further reduce the volume even though the current volume is the minimum volume, a confirmation sound of the minimum volume is output. Further, when the player tries to raise the volume further even though the current volume is the maximum volume, a confirmation sound of the maximum volume is output. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the operation is performed beyond the range in which the volume can be set, and it is possible to call attention.

[About store settings]
In the present embodiment, the clerk was able to set the payout rate, the volume of the effect, the amount of light of the effect, and the power saving mode as the settings related to the game. However, the clerk sets the main side (the configuration included in the game control board 40 such as the main control unit 41 and the configuration connected to the game control board 40) and the sub side (the effect control board 90 such as the sub control unit 91). The configuration is not limited to the configuration included in the above and the configuration connected to the effect control board 90), and other settings may be possible.

For example, the clerk may be able to set the pressure (pressing) and hardness when operating various operating means such as the start switch 7 and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R as the settings on the main side. The lighting and extinguishing control of various lighting means such as the turn-in request LED 17 and the start effective LED and the lighting condition thereof may be set.

For example, the clerk may be able to set the pressure and hardness when operating various operating means such as the effect switch 56 as the setting on the sub side. RTC (real) to keep time
If it is a slot machine provided with a time clock), the clerk may be able to set the time in the RTC as a setting on the sub side. If the slot machine can control multiple types of production modes (for example, character A is the main character production mode and character B is the main character production mode), the clerk can set the production mode as a sub-side setting. It may be. As a setting on the sub side, the clerk may be able to set the mode and execution frequency of error notification to be executed when a medal is jammed, cheating, or when the stop switch is not operated according to the recommended procedure. Further, the clerk may be able to set the deletion of the game history (for example, the number of games, the number of bonus winnings, the number of payouts, etc.) and the presence / absence of display as a setting on the sub side.

Further, it may be provided with a means for switching between the setting on the main side and the setting on the sub side as described above. For example, FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a setting screen on the store side in the first modification. Switching between the main side setting and the sub side setting will be described with reference to FIG.

When the power of the slot machine 1 is ON, the front door 1b is opened, and a call operation for displaying the setting screen on the store side is performed by the store clerk, the setting screen shown in FIG. 16A is shown. The hall menu screen is displayed. On the hall menu screen, one of a mode for setting the main side and a mode for setting the sub side can be selected.

When the main side setting mode is selected, as shown in FIG. 16B, a screen in which either the payout rate setting or the switch pressing setting, which is an example of the main side setting, can be selected is displayed. Is displayed. When the payout rate setting is selected, as shown in FIG. 16 (c), a screen on which any of 1 to 6 setting values can be selected is displayed.

On the other hand, when the sub-side setting mode is selected, as shown in FIG. 16D, any of the volume setting, the light amount setting, and the power saving mode setting, which are examples of the sub-side setting. A selectable screen is displayed. When the volume setting is selected, as shown in FIG. 16E, a screen in which any of 0 to F can be selected is displayed.

In this way, the clerk can selectively switch between the setting on the main side and the setting on the sub side, so that the setting related to the game can be easily made. Further, since a setting screen (for example, a hall menu screen) for switching between the main side setting and the sub side setting is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 51 based on one operation (for example, a calling operation). , It is possible to make settings related to the game more easily and easily.

[About the settings on the player side]
In the present embodiment, the player can set the volume of the effect and the light amount of the effect as the settings related to the game. However, the player can set the main side (a configuration included in the game control board 40 such as the main control unit 41 and a configuration connected to the game control board 40) and the sub side (a configuration control board such as the sub control unit 91). The configuration is not limited to the configuration included in the 90 and the configuration connected to the effect control board 90), and other settings may be possible.

For example, the player may be able to set the pressure (pressing) and hardness when operating various operating means such as the start switch 7 and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R as the settings on the main side. , The lighting and extinguishing control of various lighting means such as the on-request LED 17 and the start effective LED, and the lighting condition thereof may be set.

For example, the player may be able to set the pressure and hardness when operating various operating means such as the effect switch 56 as the setting on the sub side. The player may be able to set an effect mode as a setting on the sub side, or may be able to set a character, music, or the like that appears in the set effect mode. The player may be able to set the power saving mode as a setting on the sub side. The player may be able to set the deletion of the game history (for example, the number of games, the number of bonus winnings, the number of payouts, etc.) and the presence / absence of display as settings on the sub side. As a setting on the sub side, the player can display a password for managing the game history by communicating with an external server via the Internet on a mobile terminal or the like, and even if the password can be input. Good.

[About the setting operation on the store side]
In the present embodiment, in order for the clerk to set the payout rate, it is a condition that the setting key switch 37 provided on the front surface of the power supply box 100 inside the housing 1a is operated.
Further, in order to set the reference volume and the amount of light, it was a condition to operate the store-side setting switch 60 provided inside the front door 1b. Therefore, only the clerk who can open the front door 1b can operate the setting key switch 37 to set the payout rate, and similarly, only the clerk who can open the front door 1b is on the store side. By operating the setting switch 60, it was possible to set the reference for the volume and the amount of light.

However, the operating means operated by the clerk at the time of setting may be provided at any position inside the housing 1a or inside the front door 1b, or is provided outside the housing 1a or outside the front door 1b. You may be. For example, a locked operating means that can be released only by a clerk may be provided on the outside of the front door 1b.

In the present embodiment, even if the operating means is provided outside the housing 1a or outside the front door 1b and a person other than the clerk can operate the operating means, unless the front door 1b is opened. It is not possible to set the payout rate or the standard for the amount and amount of light. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting related to the game from being made illegally. From the viewpoint that only the clerk can open the front door 1b, it is preferable that the operating means that can be operated only by the clerk is provided inside the housing 1a or inside the front door 1b.

Further, the operating means that can be operated only by the clerk at the time of setting may be an operating means operated by the player during a game or the like, as in the setting of the power saving mode. For example, the game may be set by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in a special order known only to the clerk.

The operation means for setting the power saving mode may also be provided at any of the inside of the housing 1a and the inside of the front door 1b.

Even if the operating means for setting the payout rate, the operating means for setting the reference volume and the amount of light, and the operating means for setting the power saving mode are different means as in the present embodiment. Alternatively, all or part of these may be common means.

[About the setting operation on the player side]
In the present embodiment, in order for the player to set the volume and the amount of light, it is a condition that the player side setting switch 70 provided on the outside of the front door 1b is operated.

However, the operating means that the player can operate at the time of setting is not limited to the outside of the front door 1b, but may be provided outside the housing 1a that is difficult to operate, such as the side surface or the upper surface of the housing 1a. .. By doing so, even when the front door 1b is opened, there is no possibility that the player or the clerk sitting next to the door touches the operating means to operate the door.

The operating means that can be operated by the player may be provided inside the housing 1a or inside the front door 1b. In this case, it is sufficient that the operating means can be operated by exposing the operating means to the outside, such as a hole being formed in the front door 1b.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player may be one that uses the operating means that the player operates during the game or the like. For example, the volume and the amount of light may be set by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in a special order.

The operation means that can be operated by the player includes the operation stick held by the player, and the trigger button is placed at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, the position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation stick). It may be a provided stick controller. The player can select an item by moving the icon displayed on the screen by tilting the operation stick, and can determine the selected item by pressing the trigger button. May be good. Alternatively, the operating means that the player can operate may be a jog dial, a cross key, or the like.

[Means to prohibit setting on the store side]
In the present embodiment, even if the operating means is operated, the setting related to the game is prohibited when the front door 1b is closed. For example, even if the setting key switch 37 is operated, the setting of the payout rate is prohibited when the front door 1b is closed. Even if the store-side setting switch 60 is operated, the reference setting of the volume and the amount of light is prohibited when the front door 1b is closed. Even if all the stop switches were pressed for a long time, the setting related to the game was prohibited when the front door 1b was closed.

However, the present invention is not limited to such a method, and other methods may be used to prohibit the setting related to the game. For example, when the front door 1b is closed, the operating means itself may not be able to be operated. For example, when the front door 1b is closed, even if the operation means can be operated, the input signal due to the operation may not be effectively received by the main control unit 41 or the sub control unit 91. For example, when the front door 1b is closed, even if the input signal based on the operation of the operating means is effectively received by the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91, the processing based on the input signal is not executed. There may be.

Further, if the setting screen is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 51 as shown in FIG. 16 and the setting related to the game is possible, the setting screen is displayed when the front door 1b is closed. It may not be. Alternatively, when the front door 1b is closed, even if the setting screen is displayed, the game-related settings may not be possible.

[Means to prohibit settings on the player side]
In the present embodiment, even if the operating means is operated, the setting related to the game is prohibited when the front door 1b is open. For example, even if the player-side setting switch 70 is operated, the setting of the volume and the amount of light is prohibited when the front door 1b is open.

However, the present invention is not limited to such a method, and other methods may be used to prohibit the setting related to the game. For example, when the front door 1b is open, the operating means itself may not be able to be operated. For example, when the front door 1b is open, even if the operation means can be operated, the input signal due to the operation may not be effectively received by the main control unit 41 or the sub control unit 91. For example, when the front door 1b is open, even if the input signal based on the operation of the operating means is effectively received by the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91, the processing based on the input signal is not executed. There may be.

Further, if the setting screen is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 51 as shown in FIG. 16 and the setting related to the game is possible, the setting screen is displayed when the front door 1b is open. It may not be. Alternatively, when the front door 1b is open, even if the setting screen is displayed, the game-related settings may not be possible.

[About volume and light intensity settings]
In the present embodiment, the store clerk can operate the store side setting switch 60 to set the reference volume and the light amount (setting of the first volume stage and the first light amount stage). Further, the player was able to set the volume and the amount of light (setting of the second volume step and the second light amount stage) by operating the player side setting switch 70. Furthermore, regarding the volume setting, if the player tries to set the volume further beyond the volume limit value even though the volume is currently the maximum or minimum, the limit value volume (maximum volume, The confirmation sound (minimum volume) was output. However, the setting of the volume and the amount of light is not limited to the example of the present embodiment, and other examples may be used.

For example, one of the setting of the first volume stage by the clerk and the setting of the second volume stage by the player may not be possible. Either of the setting of the first light amount stage by the clerk and the setting of the second light amount stage by the player may not be possible.

Not limited to the one that outputs a confirmation sound when the volume is set, a lighting means such as the effect effect LED 52 may be confirmed and lit. The confirmation sound and the confirmation lighting may be performed at the same time. The confirmation lighting may be performed instead of the confirmation sound only when the player further tries to set the volume beyond the limit value even though the current volume is the maximum or minimum. The confirmation lighting may be performed in addition to the confirmation sound only when the player tries to set the volume further beyond the limit value even though the current volume is the maximum or minimum. The timbre of the confirmation sound may change only if the player attempts to set the volume further beyond the volume limit, even though the volume is currently at maximum or minimum. The confirmation light may change to blinking only if the player attempts to set the volume further beyond the volume limit, even though the volume is currently at maximum or minimum. Even though the current volume is the maximum or minimum, the confirmation sound may not be output when the player tries to set the volume further beyond the limit value.

When the operation interval from one operation to the other is shorter than the time to output the confirmation sound corresponding to one operation, the volume is changed to the volume of the other operation and the other operation is performed. It is possible not to output the confirmation sound of the volume corresponding to the volume set by. Further, when the confirmation sound is not output a plurality of times, the confirmation sound corresponding to one operation may be output, and then the confirmation sound of the volume corresponding to the volume set by the latest operation may be output.

Not only for the volume setting but also for the light amount setting, the player further exceeds the light amount limit value even though the light amount is currently the maximum or the minimum as in the present embodiment and the first modification. When trying to set, special control (for example, control such as maximizing or minimizing the amount of light for confirmation lighting) may be performed.

The display indicating the second volume stage and the second light intensity stage is not limited to the example shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 17, the second volume stage may be displayed as a bar with a number of squares corresponding to the second volume stage. In this case, when the operation means such as the volume adjustment button is operated for the first time during the demonstration, the bar is first displayed as the initial display, and then the operation of the volume adjustment button (in FIG. 17, the volume, that is, the second volume stage is displayed. The number of quadrangles may be increased or decreased (decreased by 1 in FIG. 17) according to the lowering operation).

For example, as shown in FIG. 18, the second volume stage is displayed as a bar with a number of squares corresponding to the second volume stage, and when the operation means such as the volume adjustment button is operated at the beginning of the demonstration, the volume adjustment button is displayed. The bar in which the number of quadrangles is increased or decreased according to the operation of (in FIG. 18, that is, the operation of lowering the volume, that is, the second volume step) may be displayed first. In this case, the virtual bar before increasing or decreasing may be the initial display. As described above, the initial display may indicate the volume stage according to the first volume stage after the first operation is performed and before the second operation is performed, and is not actually displayed. It may be.

For example, the second volume step is not limited to one that changes one step each time the first volume step changes, but also one that changes one step when the first volume step changes by a plurality of steps. Good. That is, the first volume stage and the second volume stage do not have to change one-to-one.

In the present embodiment, since "A" to "F" that limit the adjustment of the volume and the amount of light by the player are prepared, the volume setting and the amount of light on the player side can be restricted, but the volume on the player side. It may be one that limits only the setting, or one that limits only the light amount setting on the player side.

The volume and amount of light to be highlighted changed by the change operation by the stop switch, and the setting contents were reflected in the production when the end operation was performed, but this is not limited to this. For example, the setting contents may be reflected in the effect each time the highlighting volume or the amount of light changes due to the change operation. The first volume stage and the first light intensity stage are not limited to those that are reflected when the setting screen is displayed, but are not reflected at the start of display of the setting screen, and when there is a change operation by the player, the first 1 Volume step and 1st light intensity step may be set. Alternatively, the first volume step and the first light intensity step are set before the display of the setting screen (for example, when the channel of the store side setting switch 60 is set), and the first volume step or the first light amount step or the first when the player changes the operation. 1 The volume may be changed or the light amount may be changed based on the light amount step.

In the volume change operation process of FIG. 15, the volume change operation is invalidated during the output of the confirmation sound by first determining whether or not the timer during the output of the confirmation sound is counting. Not exclusively. For example, the volume change operation performed while the confirmation sound is being output is enabled, and when a new volume is set, the confirmation sound is output after the previous confirmation sound is completed. It may be. As a result, when the player continuously changes the confirmation sound in a short period of time, the confirmation sound is continuously output, so that the player does not have a risk of misunderstanding the recognition of the confirmation sound, and the currently set volume is set. It is possible to easily grasp which volume is used. Further, when a new volume is set while the previous confirmation sound is being output, the confirmation sound based on this new setting may not be output.

[About the display of the setting screen]
In the present embodiment, when the front door 1b is opened while the front door 1b is closed and the setting screen is displayed, the setting screen is continuously displayed, but the present invention is limited to this. Absent. For example, when the front door 1b is opened while the setting screen is displayed when the front door 1b is closed, the display of the setting screen is temporarily stopped, and then the setting screen before opening after the front door 1b is opened again. May be redisplayed. Even in this way, even if the front door 1b is opened once during the setting, the setting can be performed from the continuation before the opening, the convenience of the player is improved, and the player does not feel dissatisfied.

The period during which the setting screen can be displayed may be set. For example, regardless of whether the front door 1b is closed or not, the display of the setting screen may be stopped 10 minutes after the setting screen is displayed. Further, the period during which the setting screen can be displayed may be set only when the front door 1b is open. For example, the setting screen may continue to be displayed even after 10 minutes have passed while the front door 1b is closed, but the setting screen may not be displayed after 10 minutes have passed while the front door 1b is open.

After the period in which the setting screen can be displayed has passed and the setting screen is not displayed, the screen may be switched to a predetermined screen other than the setting screen such as the demo screen.

The display of the setting screen may be terminated based on the player's termination operation, or may be terminated with the passage of time. Further, the display of the setting screen may be terminated by any of the player's termination operation and the passage of time.

[Demo production]
The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment issues a standby command indicating the transition to the standby state after one game is completed, and the time at which the end of the game is estimated without setting the bet number (60 in the present embodiment) When the payout of medals by credit (including the medal used to set the number of bets) is completed and the payout end command is sent and then the state shifts to the standby state. Send. On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 starts the demo effect (demonstration effect) as shown in FIG. 19 when the start condition of the demo effect including receiving the standby command is satisfied.

As shown in FIG. 20, in the control related to the demo effect when the start condition of the demo effect is satisfied, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the power saving mode is set in the RAM 91c when the standby command is received. (Sa01), if the power saving mode is not set, the demo production is started in the normal mode (Sa02), and if the power saving mode is set, the demo is performed in the power saving mode. The production is started (Sa06).

When the demonstration effect in the normal mode is started in the step of Sa02, the effect pattern corresponding to the demo effect in the normal mode is selected, and as shown in FIG. 19B, the effect image related to the model is displayed on the liquid crystal display. The display is displayed on the device 51, and the lighting mode of the effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55 is controlled to be changed according to the passage of time. The effect pattern corresponding to the demo effect in the normal mode is configured to require a specific time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) from the start to the end. Further, when executing the demonstration effect in the normal mode, the demo effect in the normal mode can be continuously executed by repeatedly executing the effect of the effect pattern that requires a specific time.

After starting the demonstration production in the normal mode in the step of Sa02, is the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 or the operation of setting the number of bets by inserting medals from the medal insertion unit 4 (Sa03), or the demonstration in the step of Sa02. From the start of the effect until a specific time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses, control is performed according to the passage of time according to the control pattern defined by the effect pattern (Sa04). Then, when the specific time elapses without the bet number setting operation being performed, the process returns to the Sa02 step and the normal mode demo production is started from the beginning, and the normal mode demo production is performed as the bet number setting operation. Repeat until is done.

When the bet number setting operation is performed in the step of Sa03, the demo effect is terminated (Sa05), and control is performed with an effect pattern according to the progress of the game.

On the other hand, when the demo production in the power saving mode is started in the step of Sa06, the production pattern corresponding to the demo production in the power saving mode is selected, and as shown in FIG. 19C, "in the power saving mode". Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, the brightness of the liquid crystal display 51 is set to the minimum value, and the effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55 are controlled to be turned off. The effect pattern corresponding to the demo effect in the power saving mode is configured to be maintained in the state at the start regardless of the elapsed time from the start of the control by the pattern.

After starting the demonstration effect of the power saving mode in the step of Sa06, the player waits until the bet number setting operation is performed regardless of the passage of time (Sa07). Then, when the bet number setting operation is performed, the demo production is ended (Sa05) as in the case where the demo production in the normal mode is started, and the control is performed in the production pattern according to the progress of the game. I do.

As described above, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment can execute the demonstration effect in either the normal mode or the power saving mode according to the setting of the power saving mode, and may be performed by a clerk at the amusement park or the like. The demo effect will be executed according to the set settings. The power saving mode can be set and confirmed by the clerk of the amusement park or the like when the main control unit 41 is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state of the setting value of the winning probability (ball output rate) described above. ..

Specifically, when the sub control unit 91 receives a setting command from the main control unit 41 and identifies that the setting change state has been started, or receives a setting confirmation command and starts the setting confirmation state. When this is specified, as shown in FIG. 21, the state shifts to the power saving mode change state and the power saving mode change screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. On the power saving mode change screen, a message indicating that the normal mode or the power saving mode can be selected and that the mode can be selected and determined by operating the selected mode, the stop switches 8L, 8R and the start switch 7 is displayed. It is supposed to be done. When either the normal mode or the power saving mode is selected and determined while the power saving mode change screen is displayed, the determined mode is set in the RAM 91c as the mode of the demo effect. After that, when the setting command and the setting confirmation command are received from the main control unit 41 and it is specified that the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is terminated, the power saving mode change state is terminated and the power saving mode is set. Exit the display of the change screen. Immediately after that, as shown in FIG. 22, when the demo effect of the mode set in the RAM 91c, that is, when the normal mode is set as the mode of the demo effect, the demo effect of the normal mode is started and saved. When the power mode is set, the demonstration effect of the power saving mode is started.

The sub-control unit 91 starts the demo effect when the start condition of the demo effect is satisfied as described above. As shown in FIG. 23, the start condition of the demo effect is determined for each effect mode before the transition to the demo effect, that is, the effect mode being executed.

As shown in FIG. 23, when the effect mode being executed is a normal background, a special background, or a special background with BGM, operations related to the game and operations related to the effect menu from the end of the game or the end of the effect menu. It is a condition for starting the demonstration production that 60 seconds have passed or the settlement operation is performed without performing.

As shown in FIG. 24A, the main control unit 41 transmits a standby command when an operation related to the game is not performed within 60 seconds after the end of the game. On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 waits for 60 seconds without performing an operation related to the effect menu after the stop operation is performed in the game in which the effect is performed by the normal background or the special background and the game is completed. When a command is received or a standby command sent after the credit is settled by the settlement operation is received, the demo effect is started when the standby command is received. Further, as shown in FIG. 24B, when the effect mode being executed is a special background with BGM, the sub-control unit 91 performs an operation related to the game for 30 seconds after the game is completed. And when the operation related to the effect menu is not performed, the BGM is stopped, and the standby command is received for another 30 seconds, that is, 60 seconds after the end of the game without performing the operation related to the effect menu. To start the demo production when the standby command is received.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (a), after the end of the effect menu, a standby command due to no operation related to the game being performed during the effect of the normal background, the special background, or the special background with BGM is issued. If it is received and the value of the above-mentioned effect operation elapsed time timer is before 60 seconds have elapsed when the standby command is received, the demo effect is produced when the value of the effect operation elapsed time timer has elapsed 60 seconds. To start.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23, when the effect mode being executed is a warning notification, 60 seconds have passed since the end of the game without performing the operation related to the game and the operation related to the effect menu. Alternatively, it is a condition for starting the demonstration production that the settlement operation is performed. As shown in FIG. 24 (c), the main control unit 41 receives a standby command transmitted when an operation related to the game is not performed within 60 seconds after the end of the game or after the credit is settled by the settlement operation. If so, send a wait command. On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 starts the warning notification when the stop operation is performed in the non-recommended stop order, then continues the warning notification, and starts the demonstration effect when the standby command is received. Let me.

Further, although not particularly shown, even when the effect mode being executed is a prize notification effect indicating the occurrence of a prize, the operation related to the game and the operation related to the effect menu are not performed from the end of the game. It is a condition for starting the demonstration production that the seconds have passed or the settlement operation is performed.
The main control unit 41 transmits a standby command when an operation related to the game is not performed within 60 seconds after the end of the game or when a standby command transmitted after the settlement of credits by the settlement operation is received. On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 starts the winning notification effect when any of the winning combinations wins, then continues the winning notification effect, and starts the demo effect when the standby command is received.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23, when the error is notified, 60 seconds have passed since the error was cleared without performing the operation related to the game and the operation related to the effect menu, which is the condition for starting the demo effect. is there. As shown in FIG. 24 (d), the main control unit 41 transmits a standby command when an operation related to the game is not performed for 60 seconds as described above, and then, for example, a medal selector 29 detects a medal jam. An error command is sent when the error is cleared, and an error command is sent again when the error is cleared. On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 starts the demo effect when the standby command is received, ends the demo effect when the error command is first received, and starts the error notification. Then, when the error command is received again, the error notification is terminated and the mode returns to the production mode before the demo production. After that, based on the above-mentioned error release timer, the demo effect is started when 60 seconds have elapsed without performing the operation related to the game and the operation related to the effect menu. If the settlement operation is performed and the standby command is transmitted before the elapse of 60 seconds, the demonstration effect is started by receiving the standby command.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23, when the effect mode being executed is the effect menu, and the menu is being displayed, the history is being displayed, or the character is being selected, the effect menu start operation or the end of the effect menu. The condition for starting the demonstration production is that 60 seconds have passed since the operation of. As shown in FIG. 25B, the sub-control unit 91 starts the effect menu by continuously pressing any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R for 5 seconds or longer as described above. At that time, the production menu is started. After that, when 60 seconds have passed from the effect menu start operation or the last operation in the effect menu based on the value of the effect operation elapsed time timer while the menu is being displayed, the history is being displayed, or the character is being selected. Start the demo production. If a standby command is received from the main control unit 41 during the effect menu, the demo effect is not executed and the effect menu is continued.

In addition, in the configuration in which the password for setting the effect content in the effect menu, the game history, etc. can be converted into a two-dimensional code and output, as shown in FIG. 23, the effect mode being executed is displayed in the effect menu. Yes, if the password is being entered and the two-dimensional code is being displayed, the demo production start condition is that 5 minutes have passed since the last operation in the production menu. As shown in FIG. 25C, the sub-control unit 91 is based on the value of the effect operation elapsed time timer while the effect menu is started, the password is being input, and the two-dimensional code is being displayed. When 5 minutes have passed from the effect menu start operation or the last operation in the effect menu, the demo effect is started. If a standby command is received from the main control unit 41 during the effect menu, the demo effect is not executed and the effect menu is continued.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23, when the effect mode being executed is the changed state of the power saving mode, the end of the changed state of the power saving mode is the demo effect start condition. As shown in FIG. 24 (e), the main control unit 41 transmits a setting command when shifting to the setting changing state and when ending, and issues a setting confirmation command when shifting to and ending the setting confirmation state. Send, and the setting change status or setting confirmation status is terminated, and the setting command or setting confirmation command is sent. On the other hand, when the sub-control unit 91 receives the setting command indicating the start of setting or the setting confirmation command indicating the start of confirmation, the sub-control unit 91 shifts to the changed state of the power saving mode. After that, as shown in FIG. 24E, when the setting command indicating the end of setting or the setting confirmation command indicating the end of confirmation is received, the demo effect according to the changed mode is immediately executed.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control unit 41 that controls a game, and a sub control unit 91 that controls an effect based on a command transmitted from the main control unit 41. 41 transmits a standby command capable of specifying the transition time to the standby state, whereas the sub control unit 91 executes a demo effect based on the reception of the standby command and the sub control unit 91. It is possible to set whether or not to control the power saving mode.

In such a configuration, if the process of receiving the standby command and executing the demo effect and the process of controlling to either the normal mode or the power saving mode are separately performed, the sub-control unit 91 There is a problem that the control to be performed becomes complicated.

On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment can set whether to execute the demo effect in the normal mode or the power saving mode, and is capable of setting the mode such as when a standby command is received. When the start condition is satisfied and the demo effect is executed, the normal mode demo effect is executed if the normal mode is set, and the power saving mode demo effect is executed if the power saving mode is set. By setting the power saving mode, the power required to execute the demo effect can be saved, and as part of the control to execute the demo effect, the control according to the power saving mode is performed. Is performed, so that the control by the sub control unit 91 can be simplified.

In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 repeatedly executes an effect requiring a specific time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) as a demonstration effect of the power saving mode by using the liquid crystal display 51 as a demonstration effect of the normal mode. The brightness of the liquid crystal display 51 is set to the minimum value, the message "power saving mode is in progress" is displayed, and the effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55 are kept in a constant state regardless of the elapsed time. Since it is designed to be controlled and the processing load of the sub-control unit 91 when executing the demo effect in the power saving mode can be reduced as compared with the execution of the demo effect in the normal mode, the demo effect in the power saving mode is further executed. The power required to do this can be saved.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 measures whether the estimated end time (60 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed without setting the number of bets after the end of one game, and sets the power saving mode. Regardless of whether the normal mode is set or the power saving mode is set, a standby command is transmitted when the estimated end time (60 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, and the sub-control unit 91 responds to this. , The demo effect is executed when the standby command is received, and the demo effect can be started on the sub control unit 91 side according to the period measured by the main control unit 41. At this time, it is not necessary for the main control unit 41 to measure different periods depending on whether the normal mode is set or the power saving mode is set on the power saving mode change screen, and the control can be simplified.

In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 continuously presses any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R for 5 seconds or longer in a state where the reel stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is not effective. Therefore, it is possible to display the effect menu that displays the matters related to the effect on the liquid crystal display 51 according to the operation by the player, and the period after the operation related to the effect menu is performed is the elapsed time of the effect operation. Measured by the timer, regardless of whether the normal mode is set or the power saving mode is set on the power saving mode change screen, the effect operation elapsed time timer determines the predetermined period (in this embodiment, the effect content The demo production is executed when 60 seconds or 5 minutes) is measured, and the demo production is started according to the measured period after receiving the player's operation related to the production menu. Can be done. At this time, it is not necessary to measure different periods depending on whether the normal mode is set or the power saving mode is set on the power saving mode change screen, and the control can be simplified.

In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit is in the normal mode and the power saving mode immediately after the end of the change state of the power saving mode, that is, after receiving the setting command indicating the end of the setting or the setting confirmation command indicating the end of the confirmation. Of these, the demo effect is executed according to the newly set mode, and immediately after the change state of the power saving mode ends, the newly set mode of the normal mode and the power saving mode is performed. Since the demo effect is executed, it is possible to confirm whether or not the mode set by the power saving mode change screen is reflected.

In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 specifies the order of the stop operation of each reel based on the stop operation command, the number of sliding frames command, and the stop command, and recommends the recommended operation mode to the player (this embodiment). In the embodiment, when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in an operation mode other than the operation order in which the left stop switch 8L is the first stop), a warning notification is executed to warn the stop operation to be performed in the recommended stop order. If the game does not proceed after executing the warning notification, the warning notification is continued until the demonstration production is started, and the stop switches 8L and 8C are used in the recommended operation mode. , 8R can be surely recognized that the operation is not performed properly.

In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 executes the winning notification effect when any of the winning combinations is won, and when the game does not proceed after executing the winning notification effect, the winning notification is given. The production is continued until the demonstration production is started, and it is possible to surely recognize that a prize has been generated.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 transmits a standby command when shifting to the standby state, whereas the sub control unit 91 starts controlling the demonstration effect by receiving the standby command. However, the command that triggers the sub-control unit 91 to start controlling the demo effect is a command that enables the execution time of the demo effect to be specified by being transmitted at the timing of transition to the standby state. However, it may be a command that enables the execution time of the demo effect to be specified by being transmitted at the timing that is the starting point for measuring the time until the timing to execute the demo effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 transmits a standby command when shifting to the standby state, and the standby command is for the sub control unit 91 to specify the execution time of the demo effect. Although it is a dedicated command for, the sub-control unit 91 can specify not only the execution time of the demo effect but also other control states (for example,) instead of such a dedicated command. , A command indicating the end of credit settlement, etc.) may be configured to specify the execution time of the demo effect. In such a configuration, the sub-control unit may be configured to execute the demo effect when a specific command is received, or execute the demo effect when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after receiving the specific command. It may be configured. Specifically, the main control unit sets the time until the timing of transitioning to the standby state, such as when one game is completed, when the payout of medals by credit settlement is completed, when the setting change state and the setting confirmation state are completed, and so on. A specific command is transmitted when the timing becomes the starting point for measurement, and the sub-control unit measures the period after receiving the specific command by a timer set in the sub-control unit 91. Regardless of whether the normal mode is set or the power saving mode is set on the power saving mode change screen, the demo effect is configured to be executed when a predetermined period is measured based on the timer. Is also good. With such a configuration, the demonstration effect can be started according to the period measured by the sub control unit. At this time, it is not necessary to measure different periods depending on whether the normal mode is set or the power saving mode is set on the power saving mode change screen, and the control can be simplified.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 saves the normal mode and saves power immediately after the end of the changed state of the power saving mode, that is, after receiving the setting command indicating the end of setting or the setting confirmation command indicating the end of confirmation. It is configured to execute a demo effect according to the newly set mode among the power modes. For example, as shown in FIG. 26A, if the newly set mode is the normal mode, from the first time. While the normal mode demo effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 26B, when the newly set mode is the power saving mode, the normal mode demo effect is first executed in one loop for the first time. After that, a demo effect of the power saving mode may be executed. With such a configuration, even if the power saving mode is set in the power saving mode change state, the power saving mode is changed. After the end, the normal mode demo production will be executed once, so even if the power saving mode is set just before the store opens, the normal mode demo production will be executed first in the situation immediately after the store opens. , You can improve the appearance of the slot machine immediately after opening.

In addition, the power saving mode is set when the demo effect is first executed not only after the end of the power saving mode change state but also after a specific situation such as after the power is turned on or after the setting value setting is changed. Even if there is, by executing the demo production in the normal mode once and then executing the demo production in the power saving mode, the demo production in the normal mode will be executed first in the situation immediately after the store opens. Therefore, the appearance of the slot machine immediately after opening can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 transmits a standby command after the credit settlement is completed, and the sub control unit 91 starts the demo effect when receiving the standby command transmitted after the credit settlement is completed. The configuration, that is, the configuration in which the demo effect is started immediately after the credit settlement is completed, the main control unit 41 sends a standby command when a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed after the credit settlement is completed. The demo effect is started when the sub control unit 91 receives the standby command, the main control unit 41 transmits a specific command at the end of credit settlement, and the sub control unit 91 receives the specific command. The demo effect may be started when a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, that is, the demo effect may be started when a predetermined period has elapsed after the completion of credit settlement.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 saves the normal mode and saves immediately after the end of the changed state of the power saving mode, that is, after receiving the setting command indicating the end of setting or the setting confirmation command indicating the end of confirmation. Although the configuration is such that the demo effect is executed according to the newly set mode of the power mode, the sub-control unit 91 does not set the bet number after the end of the changed state of the power saving mode, and the end estimated time ( In this embodiment, the demo effect may be executed when 60 seconds have passed.

Further, in such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 27A, when the effect mode before shifting to the changed state of the power saving mode is a normal background, a special background, or a special background with GM, After the end of the changed state of the power saving mode, the effect mode is set before shifting to the changed state of the power saving mode. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27 (b), the effect mode before shifting to the changed state of the power saving mode. If is the effect menu, the effect menu such as the normal background is displayed after the end of the power saving mode change state, instead of the effect menu which is the effect mode before shifting to the power saving mode change state. The previous effect mode may be used. By doing so, when the effect mode is changed to the energy saving mode during execution, the effect menu is restored after the energy saving mode change state is completed. Therefore, it is not necessary to retain the display contents of the current effect menu in addition to the normal background, special background, etc. in the current effect mode, so that the control can be simplified.

Further, in the present embodiment, the demo effect is terminated by performing an operation of displaying the effect menu during the demo effect, but any of the predetermined operations (for example, stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R) during the demo effect. As shown in FIG. 28, information such as the game history is displayed on a part of the liquid crystal display 51 so that it can be viewed while continuing the demonstration effect, and then the demo is performed after a predetermined period of time. You may return to the production, and with such a configuration, the demo production does not end due to the viewing operation of the game history, etc., especially during the execution of the demo production in the energy saving mode, but the game history, etc. Except for the display, the demo production of the energy saving mode continues, and the demo production of the energy saving mode continues instead of returning to the normal production mode even after the display of the game history etc., so the demonstration production of the power saving mode is further executed. The power required to do this can be saved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 is configured to end the demo production by performing a bet number setting operation during the demo production, and perform control in a production pattern according to the progress of the game. However, when the bet number setting operation is performed, a predetermined game start effect may be executed, and then control may be performed in an effect pattern according to the progress of the game. Then, a message indicating that the start of the game is welcomed may be displayed, or a video of a character indicating the same may be displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably recognize that the game has been shifted to a startable state.

Next, the main effects obtained by the above-described embodiment will be described.
(1) In the present embodiment, the sub control unit 91 (confirmation operation control means) controls the confirmation operation of the movable means 901 to 903. Further, even if the player side setting switch 70 receives the player's operation during the confirmation operation execution period, which is the period for controlling the confirmation operation of the movable means 901 to 903, the sub control unit 91 (specific control execution means) , Do not display the setting screen (do not execute specific control).

As described above, it is annoying if the setting screen is displayed in association with the operation of the player-side setting switch 70 when the movable means 901 to 903 are operating during the confirmation operation execution period. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the input reception of the player side setting switch 70 is prohibited and the operation is invalidated during the confirmation operation execution period. As a result, the setting screen is not displayed in association with the operation of the player-side setting switch 70 during the confirmation operation execution period, and the troublesomeness during the confirmation operation execution period can be reduced.

(2) Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51 (display means) may display the effect in the display area. Further, the movable means 901 and 902 may be operated so as to be superimposed on the display area (for example, the movable positions 921 and 922) of the liquid crystal display 51. Further, the setting screen (specific information) may be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in accordance with the operation of the setting switch 70.

In the present embodiment, when the movable means 901 to 903 are operating during the confirmation operation execution period, the setting screen is not displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in association with the operation of the setting switch 70. Therefore, the visibility of the setting screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 can be prevented from being hindered.

(3) Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51 (display means) may display the effect in the display area. Further, the initial setting of the effect control board 90 may be performed in parallel with the operation confirmation of the movable means 901 to 903. For example, the sub CPU 91a reads and executes the program stored in the ROM 91b to perform the initial setting of the effect control board 90. By performing the initial setting of the effect control board 90, each process by the effect control board 90 can be executed. For example, displaying an effect image or the like on the liquid crystal display 51, outputting sound from the speakers 53 and 54, accepting an operation of the player side setting switch 70, and performing processing based on the accepted operation. Can be done.

In this way, by performing the initial setting of the effect control board 90 in parallel with the operation check of the movable means 901 to 903, it is possible to prevent the initial setting of the effect control board 90 from requiring a long time.

(4) Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, until the initial setting of the effect control board 90 is completed, the sub control unit 91 displays the setting screen even if the player side setting switch 70 accepts the player's operation. It may not be displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting screen from being displayed in a state where the effect display displayed by the liquid crystal display 51 is not normally performed.

(5) Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player side setting switch 70 may be disabled while the front door 1b is open. As a result, it is possible to prevent the settings related to the effect from being tampered with or accidentally tampering with the settings related to the effect while the front door 1b is open.

(6) Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the effect control board 90 (effect control means) is provided with a setting means for setting a normal state and a power saving state, and is set when the demo effect is executed. When the normal state is set by the means, the demonstration effect of the normal mode may be executed, and when the power saving state is set by the setting means, the demo effect of the power saving mode may be executed.

In this way, by executing the demo effect based on the state set by the setting means, the process for executing the demo effect is preferably performed.

(7) Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the demonstration effect in the normal mode is an effect of repeating the effect for a specific time, and the demo effect in the power saving mode is the effect means (liquid crystal display 51, effect LED 52). , The reel LED55) may be in a specific state.

In this way, by providing the normal demo effect and the power saving demo effect, the process for executing the demo effect is preferably performed.

(8) Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when an error (abnormality) occurs during the game, an error signal (security signal) is output after the end of the game, and an error occurs during the game with payout. In that case, the output of the error signal may be started before the external output of the payout signal is completed.

By starting the output of the error signal at such a timing, it is possible to determine the trigger of the error.

[Modification 1]
Although examples of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to these examples. The present invention is not limited to the above examples, and various modifications and applications are possible. Hereinafter, a modification 1 and the like applicable to the present invention will be described. Further, at least two of the technical items described in the above-described embodiment and the technical items described in the following modification 1 may be combined and implemented, and the technology described in the above-described embodiment may be implemented. The matter may be replaced with the technical matter described in the following modification 1 and implemented, and the technical matter described in the following modification 1 may be further combined and implemented with respect to the replaced item. You may.

In the above example, when the movable means 901 to 903 are operating during the confirmation operation execution period, the operation of the player side setting switch 70 is not accepted and the player side setting switch 70 is turned off. Not limited to. For example, when the movable means 901 to 903 are operating during the confirmation operation execution period, the player side setting switch 70 may be turned on while not accepting the operation of the player side setting switch 70. Further, for example, when the movable means 901 to 903 are operating during the confirmation operation execution period, the player side setting switch 70 may be turned off while accepting the operation of the player side setting switch 70.

Further, in the above-described example, the player-side setting switch 70 is used to set the effect mode during the game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect switch 56 may be used to set the effect mode during the game. Since the effect switch 56 has a plurality of functions such as being used for an effect during a game, the liquid crystal display 51 may display an explanation of the function of the effect switch 56.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example in which the liquid crystal display 51 displays an explanation of the function of the effect switch 56 when the effect switch is used to set the effect mode during the game. In the illustrated example, the demonstration effect (normal mode) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the explanation of the function of the effect switch 56 is displayed at the lower right of the display area of the liquid crystal display 51.

Further, in the above-described example, the setting screen is displayed as an example of the specific control, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the specific control may be a control for changing the display of the liquid crystal display 51 such as a history display, a dividend table display, and a reel arrangement display. Further, the specific control may be not only a control for changing the display of the liquid crystal display 51 but also an audio output. For example, the specific control may be an audio output in a hidden effect.

Further, in the above-described example, the movable means 901 to 903 are arranged around the liquid crystal display 51, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable means 901 to 903 are arranged at a position away from the liquid crystal display 51. It may be. For example, the movable means 901 to 903 may be arranged anywhere in the housing 1a of the slot machine 1, such as the left side of the reel 2L or the right side of the reel 2R. Further, the movable means 901 to 903 may operate so as to be superimposed on the liquid crystal display 51, or may operate in a place unrelated to the liquid crystal display 51.

Further, in the above-described example, the sub control unit 91 controls the confirmation operation of the movable means 901 to 903, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main control unit 41 confirms the movable means 901 to 903. The operation may be controlled. In this case, the main control unit 41 transmits a command instructing the sub control unit 91 to control the movable means 901 to 903, and controls the confirmation operation of the movable means 901 to 903.

Further, in the above-mentioned example, the operation input of the specific control is performed by using the player side setting switch 70, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the operation input of the specific control may be performed by holding the effect switch 56, the MAX bet switch 6, an infrared sensor or the like, or using a touch panel or the like. When performing an operation input for specific control using a switch or the like connected to the main control unit 41, the main control unit 41 transmits a command corresponding to the operation input to the sub control unit 91.

Further, in the above-described example, the effect control board 90 includes one sub control unit 91, and one sub control unit 91 initially sets the effect control board 90, confirms the operation of the movable means 901 to 903, and sets the screen. Is being executed, but it is not limited to this. For example, even if the effect control board 90 includes a plurality of sub control units 91 and different sub control units 91 perform initial setting of the effect control board 90, operation check of the movable means 901 to 903, display processing of the setting screen, and the like. Good. Further, even when the effect control board 90 includes a plurality of sub control units 91, one sub control unit 91 initially sets the effect control board 90, confirms the operation of the movable means 901 to 903, and sets the screen. A plurality of processes may be executed, such as the display process of.

[About pachinko machines]
Although the slot machine 1 has been described above in the present embodiment and the first modification, the slot machine 1 may be replaced with the pachinko gaming machine 200 described below. The pachinko gaming machine 200 includes a part of the same configuration as the slot machine 1, and the description of the same configuration / processing will be omitted, and different configurations / processing will be described.

A production display device composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 200. When the game ball wins a predetermined winning opening, the special variable display device changes at least one of the special first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the effect display device displays the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A variable display (also referred to as a variable display, an updated display, or a patrol display) of an effect symbol (decorative symbol) synchronized with at least one of the variable displays is performed. The variable display of the effect symbol is executed in various variable modes such as scroll display. The effect display device is provided with an effect symbol display area for displaying the effect symbol on the display screen, and the effect symbol display area has, for example, three (plurality) of "left", "middle", and "right". There is a symbol display area as a display area for variable display of the effect symbol.

In the pachinko gaming machine 200, the game ball has won a prize in a predetermined winning opening, but a predetermined start condition (when the jackpot game is not in progress and the variable display due to the hold memory of the earlier start winning prize has ended) is satisfied. When not, it is stored as reserved storage information within a predetermined upper limit number range (for example, 4). The hold storage information is, for example, information for specifying whether or not to control a specific gaming state (for example, a jackpot state).

The pachinko gaming machine 200 becomes a "big hit" when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific symbol combination (big hit symbol combination) in the variable display caused by the hold memory, and is controlled to the specific gaming state.

In such a pachinko gaming machine 200, as shown in FIG. 30, the front frame (also referred to as a cell) 100b and the glass door 100c can be opened and closed with respect to the frame-shaped outer frame 100a with the left side edge as the swing center. It is provided in.

A pair of upper and lower engaging projections 104 and 106 are provided near the edge of the front frame 100b on the side opposite to the swing center. The engaging projections 104 and 106 are pressed downward by a spring (not shown). On the other hand, the engaging receiving pieces 105 and 107 are provided at positions of the outer frame 100a facing the engaging projections 104 and 106. By pressing the front frame 100b in the open state against the outer frame 100a, the engaging projections 104 and 106 get over the engaging receiving pieces 105 and 107, and in the overcoming state, the engaging projections 104 and 106 are moved downward by the urging force of the spring. Move and lock. In this way, the front frame 100b can be closed with respect to the outer frame 100a.

By inserting the key into a keyhole (not shown) and releasing it (for example, rotating it clockwise), the clerk pushes up a pair of upper and lower engaging protrusions 104 and 106 against the urging force of the spring. As a result, the engaging projections 104 and 106 can be disengaged from the engaging receiving pieces 105 and 107 and unlocked. In this way, the front frame 100b can be opened with respect to the outer frame 100a.

Further, the front frame 100b is also provided with an engaging projection 103 for the glass door 100c, and the glass door 100c portion facing the engaging projection 103 is provided with an engaging hole 102. The engaging protrusion 103 is pressed downward by a spring (not shown), and by pressing the open glass door 100c against the front frame 100b, the engaging protrusion 103 is pushed up by the lower edge portion of the engaging hole 102. By getting over, the engaging projection 103 is pushed down by the urging force of the spring, and the engaging projection 103 and the engaging hole 102 are engaged and locked. In this way, the glass door 100c can be closed with respect to the front frame 100b.

By inserting the key into a keyhole (not shown) and releasing it (for example, rotating it counterclockwise), the clerk pulls up the engaging protrusion 103 against the urging force of the spring and engages with the engaging protrusion 103. The engagement with the hole 102 is released and the lock can be released. In this way, the glass door 100c can be opened with respect to the front frame 100b.

Such a pachinko gaming machine 200 may also have the following configuration as in the slot machine 1.

For example, a store-side setting switch 160 for setting a reference for an effect mode during a game may be provided inside the outer frame 100a. Normally, since the front frame 100b is closed to the outer frame 100a, a person other than the clerk who does not have the key to open the front frame 100b cannot operate the store side setting switch 160. By operating the store-side setting switch 160, the clerk can set the volume reference (first volume step) and the light amount reference (first light amount step).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 200, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 200 is turned on, the front frame 100b is opened, and the store-side setting switch 160 is operated, as in the store-side effect setting process shown in FIG. On condition of the above, the reference setting of the volume and the amount of light (setting of the first volume step and the first light amount step) may be possible. As a result, even in the pachinko gaming machine 200, even if the store side setting switch is operated by fraudulent activity, the reference setting of the volume and the amount of light is prohibited when the front frame 100b is closed. It is possible to prevent the setting from being made improperly, and it is also possible to prevent the store clerk from unintentionally setting the reference volume and the amount of light.

For example, a player-side setting switch 170 for setting the effect mode during the game may be provided on the outside of the front frame 100b. Since the player-side setting switch 170 is located on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 200 when the front frame 100b is closed, the player-side setting switch 170 is operated by a player playing the pachinko gaming machine 200 from the outside. Operation is possible. By operating the player-side setting switch 170, the player can set the volume (second volume step) and the light amount (second light amount step).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 200, similarly to the player-side effect setting process shown in FIG. 14, the pachinko gaming machine 200 is in the power-on state, the front frame 100b is closed, and the player-side setting switch 170 is set. On condition that the operation is performed, the setting screen as shown in FIG. 11 may be displayed and the volume and the light amount may be set (the second volume step and the second light amount step may be set). As a result, even in the pachinko gaming machine 200, even if the player side setting switch 170 is operated by a person other than the player, the setting of the volume and the amount of light is prohibited when the front frame 100b is open. It is possible to prevent the volume and the amount of light from being set unintentionally by a person.

In the store-side effect setting process and the player-side effect setting process in the pachinko gaming machine 200, it is determined whether or not the front frame 100b is open, and the setting related to the game is prohibited according to the determination result. there were. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be determined whether or not the glass door 100c is open in addition to the front frame 100b, and the setting related to the game may be prohibited according to the determination result.

[Other]
The main control unit 41 may include an abnormality detecting means for detecting a predetermined abnormality, an abnormality notification means for notifying in response to the detection of the abnormality, and a notification setting means for setting a notification level by the abnormality notification means. Then, when the notification level is set to a predetermined level, the abnormality notification means does not notify even if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means, while the game control board 40 and the event generated at the related location are associated with the time. In the timekeeping-related process of performing the process of storing the abnormality, when the abnormality is detected by the abnormality detecting means, the occurrence of the abnormality may be stored in association with the timekeeping information regardless of the notification level. With such a configuration, it is possible to confirm an abnormality while reducing the annoyance caused by notification.

Similarly, the sub-control unit 91 includes an abnormality detecting means for detecting a predetermined abnormality, an abnormality notification means for notifying in response to the detection of the abnormality, and a notification setting means for setting the notification level by the abnormality notification means. You may prepare. Then, when the notification level is set to a predetermined level, the abnormality notification means does not notify even if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means, while the effect control board 90 and the event generated at the related location are associated with the time. In the timekeeping-related process of performing the process of storing the abnormality, when the abnormality is detected by the abnormality detecting means, the occurrence of the abnormality may be stored in association with the timekeeping information regardless of the notification level. With such a configuration, it is possible to confirm an abnormality while reducing the annoyance caused by notification.

Further, the external output board 1000 outputs an external output signal such as a security signal or a payout signal to an external device (for example, a hall computer). When the external output board 1000 detects an abnormality that does not hinder the progress of the game during the game, the external output board 1000 outputs a security signal after the end of the game, instead of outputting a security signal immediately after detecting the abnormality. Further, the external output board 1000 outputs a payout signal each time one medal is paid out.
Further, when the external output board 1000 detects an abnormality that does not hinder the progress of the game during the game with the payout process, the output of the payout signal is completed instead of outputting the security signal immediately after detecting the abnormality. Start outputting the security signal before doing so. This makes it possible to determine the trigger for the occurrence of an abnormality.

[Second Embodiment]
[Game system]
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing the overall configuration of the game system 1001 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 31, the game system 1001 includes a slot machine 1 and a management server 1200. The slot machine 1 is installed in a playground (hall), and the management server 1200 is connected to the Internet network 900. The management server 1200 is held by the manufacturer of the slot machine 1 (provider of the slot machine 1). Data exchange between the slot machine 1 and the management server 1200 is performed via a mobile terminal 1100 having a two-dimensional code reading function and a connection function to the Internet network 900. 32 and 33 are block diagrams showing the configuration of the mobile terminal 1100 and the configuration of the management server 1200 of the present embodiment, respectively.

[Slot machine configuration]
FIG. 34 is a front view showing the overall structure of the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. The slot machine 1 includes a housing 1a having an open front surface and a front door 1b rotatably pivotally supported at a side end of the housing 1a. A liquid crystal display 51 is provided at the upper center of the front door 1b. The liquid crystal display 51 has a display area, and a predetermined effect can be executed in the display area. Further, the slot machine 1 has a transmissible transmission region 51b corresponding to the perspective window 3. The player can visually recognize the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter, also referred to as left reel, middle reel, and right reel) arranged side by side inside the housing 1a through the see-through window 3 (transmission area 51b). .. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement of each reel. A plurality of types of symbols, each of which can be identified, are arranged in a predetermined order on the reels 2L to 2R. The number of reels is not limited to three, and may be one or two or more. Further, although the variable display unit shows an example of being configured by a physical reel, it may be configured by an image display device such as a liquid crystal display.

Further, the slot machine 1 includes an accessory 2000. The accessory 2000 can displace the initial position and the drive position. As shown in FIG. 34, the initial position is a position that does not overlap the display area of the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as shown in FIG. 82, the drive position is a position where a part of the accessory 2000 overlaps with the display area of the liquid crystal display 51. The character 2000 of the present embodiment has a girl as a motif. The sub-control unit 91 can drive the accessory 2000 by controlling the accessory drive device 99a. The accessory drive device 99a includes, for example, a stepping motor and the like. In FIG. 34, only the accessory 2000 is described, and the description of the accessory driving device 99a and the like is omitted.

A medal insertion unit 4 into which medals can be inserted is provided in the lower right of the liquid crystal display 51, and a medal payout outlet 9, speakers 53, and 54 for paying out medals are provided in the lower part of the front door 1b.

Further, as an example of the operation means, the front door 1b is set with a predetermined number of bets determined according to the game state within the range of credits stored as the game value (number of medals) owned by the player. MAXBET switch 6 operated when the game is played, settlement switch 10 operated when the credit and the set number of bets are settled and returned, start switch 7 operated when the game is started, reels 2L to 2R Stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, which are operated when each rotation is stopped, an effect switch 56 for use in the effect, and the like are provided.

The front door 1b is provided with a game display unit 13 for notifying information about the game as an example of the notification means. The game display unit 13 has a credit display 11 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, and a game auxiliary display 12 that displays the number of medals to be paid out and an error code when an error occurs (hereinafter, the number of medals to be paid out). (Also referred to as a unit), 1BETLED14 for notifying the set number of bets, 2BETLED15, 3BETLED16, an insertion request LED17 for notifying that a medal can be inserted, and a start switch 7 can be used to start the game. After the operation of the start enable LED 18 and the start switch 7 to notify that, the weight (a state of waiting for the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R because a certain period of time has not passed since the start of the previous game) is in progress. The weighting LED 19 for notifying the player and the replaying LED 20 for notifying that the replay game is in progress after the replay winning is provided.

When playing a game on the slot machine 1, first, a predetermined number of bets (for example, 3) are set by inserting medals into the medal insertion unit 4 or operating the MAXBET switch 6. As a result, the winning line LN becomes valid, the operation to the start switch 7 becomes valid, and the game can be started. If a medal is inserted with the number of bets already set, that amount will be added to the credit.

The winning line is a line for determining whether the combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L to 2R is a combination of winning symbols. In the present embodiment, an example in which only one winning line LN is provided will be described, but a plurality of winning lines may be provided. In the present embodiment, the winning line LN is formed so as to rise diagonally upward from the lower left to the upper right. In addition, invalid lines LM1 to LM4 are provided so that it is easy to recognize that the combinations of the symbols constituting the prize are aligned on the prize line LN. The invalid lines LM1 to LM4 are not lines for which a winning judgment is made, and when a specific winning symbol combination is aligned with the winning line LN, a predetermined symbol combination (for example, bell-) is applied to any of the invalid lines LM1 to LM4. By aligning the bell-bell), it is easy to recognize that the winning line LN has a combination of symbols constituting a specific winning.

When the start switch 7 is operated while the game can be started, the reels 2L to 2R are rotated to display the symbol in a variable manner, and when the stop switches 8L to 8R are operated, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped. , Three symbols are derived and displayed as display results in the upper, middle, and lower stages of the perspective window 3. The symbols (display results) that can be derived and displayed are the symbols displayed on the winning line LN when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and up to 4 frames ahead of them. It is a design for a total of 5 frames. When the specified number of bets (for example, 3) is set, each winning line is activated and the game can be started. When the combination of winning symbols stops on the winning line LN and a winning occurs, a predetermined number of medals are given to the player according to the winning, and credits are added or the credit reaches the upper limit (50). If this is the case, medals will be paid out from the medal payment exit 9.

Further, regarding the symbol arrangement of each reel in FIG. 35, the cherry symbol is always arranged within 5 frames on the right reel 2R. In addition, the watermelon symbol is always arranged within 5 frames on the middle reel 2C. In each reel, the range that can be pulled in within a predetermined time is within 5 frames, so it is possible to always derive the cherry symbol to the right reel 2R when the cherry lip is won, which will be described later, and when the watermelon is won, it is always possible to derive the cherry symbol. It is possible to derive a watermelon symbol on the middle reel 2C.

FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an internal structure of the slot machine 1. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a functional configuration example of the slot machine 1. In the example of FIG. 37, a game control board 40 that controls the progress of the game and outputs various commands according to the progress of the game, an effect control board 90 that controls a predetermined effect according to the command, and a drive power source for electrical components. A power supply board 101 for generating the above, an external output board 1000 for outputting a signal according to the progress of the game, and the like are provided.

The game control board 40 advances the game based on detection signals from switches such as various operation means and detection means (exemplified on the left side of the game control board 40 in FIG. 37), and the notification means (game control in FIG. 37). Display devices such as (exemplified on the left side of the substrate 40) are driven and controlled. Further, the game control board 40 drives and controls the reel motors 32L to 32R based on the signals from the reel sensors 33L to 33R.

The game control board 40 is equipped with a circuit configuration (exemplified in the game control board 40 of FIG. 37) such as a main control unit 41. The main control unit 41 performs processing related to the progress of the game, and directly or indirectly controls the configuration mounted or connected to the game control board 40. The main control unit 41 is a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, I / O port, and the like.

The effect control board 90 is connected to an effect switch 56, and drives and controls an effect device such as a liquid crystal display 51 (exemplified on the left side of the effect control board 90 in FIG. 37). The effect control board 90 is equipped with a circuit configuration (exemplified in the effect control board 90 of FIG. 37) such as a sub control unit 91. The sub-control unit 91 receives a command transmitted from the game control board 40, performs a process of performing an effect, and directly or indirectly controls a configuration mounted on or connected to the effect control board 90. The sub-control unit 91 is a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, I / O port, and the like. The circuit configuration of the sub-control unit 91 includes, for example, a clock device 97 (hereinafter, also referred to as an RTC) for measuring at least one of a day and a time. The sub-control unit 91 can execute the effect control according to, for example, the value of at least one of the day and the time measured by the RTC 97, the detection signal from the effect switch 56, and the like. A hopper motor 34b, various operating means, detection means (exemplified on the right side of the power supply board 101 in FIG. 37), and the like are connected to the power supply board 101.

Further, the effect control board 90 includes an accessory driving device 99a capable of driving the accessory 2000, and also includes a mark detection circuit 105a. The mark detection circuit 105a includes, for example, a photo sensor and the like. The accessory 2000 is marked with the mark 201. By detecting the mark 201, the mark detection circuit 105a identifies that the accessory 2000 is present at the drive position. The mark 201 is attached to the accessory 2000 at a position where such identification is possible, and the photosensor included in the mark detection circuit 105a is provided. As a modification, the mark detection circuit 105a may detect the mark to specify that the accessory 2000 exists at the initial position.

38 to 42 are diagrams for explaining various winning combinations. Further, in the remarks column of FIG. 41 and the like, index symbols and the like corresponding to other names of the winning combination are shown. The index symbol refers to a symbol that is aligned with or may be aligned with any of the invalid lines LM1 to LM4 when the combination of symbols that causes a prize is stopped on the winning line LN. For example, the index symbol of bell 1, bell 2, AT1 to AT32 is "bell", and the index symbol of watermelon is "watermelon". In the present embodiment, a notification effect (hereinafter, also referred to as a winning suggestion effect) for notifying the corresponding index symbol when the lottery target combination described later is won is executed. FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the type of the outcome, the combination of the symbols of the outcome, and the technical matters related to the outcome. The result of FIG. 43 is when any of the 9 bells left 1 to 8, the 9 bells 1 to 8 and the 9 bells right 1 to 8 described later is won, and the winning 9 It is a specific result that is derived only when the winning winning combination is missed without operating according to the corresponding procedure according to the type of bell. No medals are paid out for such specific rolls.

In addition, among the winning prizes, watermelon has the same "bell" as the index symbol of the downward-sloping bell, middle bell, and upper bell, although it is not a symbol that aligns with or may align with any of the invalid lines LM1 to LM4. It is defined as a specific winning symbol. The specific winning symbol is a combination of winning symbols of the right-down watermelon, which corresponds to the right reel 2R, and is a symbol that can be stopped on the winning line LN when the right-down watermelon is won or won. When a watermelon is won, it is possible to perform an effect using an index symbol and an effect using a specific winning symbol. In the notification effect, the character image of the index symbol and the symbol corresponding to the specific winning symbol is displayed.

FIG. 44 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state controlled by the main control unit 41. The slot machine 1 in the present embodiment has a plurality of types of gaming states including RT0 to RT4 in which the replay is won with a predetermined winning probability, and a bonus in which the winning probability of the small winning combination is higher than that in RT0 to RT4. Of these, it is controlled to any of the corresponding gaming states from the time when the start condition is satisfied until the end condition is satisfied (see the winning combination or the outcome shown along the arrow in FIG. 44). Specifically, usually (most of the games) is controlled by RT1. Then, when the preparatory lip (rip 4) is won in RT1, the game shifts to RT2, which has a higher probability of winning the replaying role than RT1. Further, when the rush lip (rip 5) is won in RT2, the game shifts to RT3, which has a higher probability of winning the replaying role than RT2. In addition, in RT2, when a fall lip (rip 2, lip 3) is won or a bell is spilled (right spill, middle spill, left spill), the process shifts to RT1. Further, in RT2, when Lip 1 wins a prize, control over RT2 is maintained. In addition, in RT3, when a fall lip (rip 2, lip 3) is won or a bell is spilled (right spill, middle spill, left spill), the process shifts to RT1. RT2 and RT3 are in a gaming state in which the winning probability of the re-gaming combination is higher than that of RT1 and is advantageous for the player.

When any of BB1 to BB5 is won, it is controlled by RT4. The winning flag set when any one of BB1 to BB5 is won is carried over until the winning BB wins. In addition, RT4 is also continuously controlled from BB winning to BB winning. When a BB prize occurs during RT4, it is controlled by a bonus, and when the number of medals or more described in FIG. 38 is paid out, the bonus ends and the bonus is controlled to RT0. The type of replay to be drawn internally is determined for each type of RT (see FIG. 45). During the bonus, bell winning can be generated with an extremely high probability regardless of the operation timing and operation procedure, and the number of medals can be increased efficiently. Therefore, the bonus is in an advantageous state for the player.

45 and 46 are diagrams showing a combination of lottery target combinations that are read out as lottery target combinations (hereinafter, the winning lottery target combination is also referred to as a winning combination) for each game state. The name is shown in the lottery target combination column, the combination of winning combination included in the lottery target combination is shown in the winning combination combination column, and the lottery is circled for each RT type in the game status column. Indicates that the target combination is a lottery target. For example, the reach lip shown in FIG. 45 is subject to lottery in any of the states RT0 to RT3, but is not drawn in RT4. Further, in RT4, it is set so that replays other than missed, through lip, middle cherry lip, strong cherry lip, and weak cherry lip are not won. Instead, the winning probabilities of the middle cherry lip, the strong cherry lip, and the weak cherry lip are set higher in the RT4 state than in the other RT states.

In the following, the combination to which the corresponding procedure (pushing order) is associated is referred to as "pushing order combination". A bell with which the push order is associated is called a "push order bell", and a replay with which the push order is associated is called a "push order rip". In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46, the push order bells are 9 bells left 1 to left 8, 9 bells 1 to middle 8, and 9 bells right 1 to right 8. As shown in FIG. 45, the push order rips are the preparation rips 1 to 6, the maintenance rips 1 to 3, and the rush rips 1 to 6. In the following, "9 bells left 1 to left 8" are collectively referred to as "9 bells left", and "9 bells 1 to 8" are collectively referred to as "9 bells medium", and "9 bells". "Bell right 1 to right 8" are collectively called "9 bell right".

FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining a corresponding procedure. For example, the corresponding procedure (corresponding push order) on the left of 9 bells is the first stop on the left. Therefore, for example, when the 9-bell left is won, the reel control is performed so as to win the bell 1 when the left first stop is performed, and when an operation other than the left first stop is performed, the reel can be pulled in. In that case, reel control is performed so that another combination (any of AT1, AT12, AT23, AT30) is won and a left-dropped result is derived when the drawing is not possible.

Further, as shown in FIG. 46, in a gaming state other than RT4, the bonus may be won at the same time as another winning combination. For example, in BB1, when only BB1 wins alone, BB1 and reach eye lip, BB1 and middle cherry lip, BB1 and strong cherry lip, BB1 and weak cherry lip, BB1 and chance 1, BB1 and chance 2, and You may win with any combination of BB1 and watermelon. In addition, during the bonus, for example, a common bell is set as a lottery target combination, and it is set to win with an extremely high probability. The common bell is a role that can generate a prize regardless of the operation timing. Therefore, during the bonus, the common bell winning can be generated with an extremely high probability regardless of the operation timing and the operation procedure, and the number of medals can be efficiently increased. Therefore, the bonus is in an advantageous state for the player.

In addition, the ratio of winning roles that are won at the same time as the bonus is reach> middle cherry lip> strong cherry lip> weak cherry lip> watermelon> chance 1> chance 2. The rate of winning the bonus alone is set lower than the rate of winning the bonus at the same time. Therefore, the player can expect to win the bonus when the announcement effect described later, which is suggested to be won in some lottery target combination, is executed.

Further, for the lottery target combinations shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the number of determination values related to the winning probability of winning the lottery target combination in the internal lottery is determined. For example, for the common bell, for example, "360" is set as the number of determination values in any of the states of RT0 to RT4, and the common bell is won at 360/65536. Among the lottery target combinations, the number of judgment values for each lottery target combination corresponding to a bonus or a small combination is set so that the winning probability is the same regardless of the RT. On the other hand, among the lottery target combinations, the number of determination values for each lottery target combination corresponding to the re-game combination is determined so that the winning probability differs depending on the type of RT.

Here, the "game" in the slot machine 1 means, in a narrow sense, from the operation of the start switch 7 to the stop of the reels 2L to 2R, but when playing a game, a bet before the operation of the start switch 7 is performed. Since the number is set, medals are paid out and the game state is changed after the reels 2L to 2R are stopped, these incidental processes are also included in the "game" in a broad sense.

[Game processing]
The main control unit 41 performs game control processing to control one game. In the game control process, first, the bet number setting and the BET process for credit settlement and bet number settlement are performed.

When the start switch 7 is operated after setting the number of bets, a random number value is extracted from a predetermined random number circuit, and it is determined (internal lottery) whether or not to allow the generation of a prize based on the extracted random number value. The internal lottery process (see FIGS. 45, 46, etc.) is performed. The random number circuit updates the numerical value in the predetermined numerical range (0 to 65535) according to the predetermined update rule. The main control unit 41 extracts a numerical value updated by the random number circuit as a random number value when the start switch 7 is operated. When a lottery target combination is won in the internal lottery, the winning flag of the winning combination included in the lottery target combination is set in a predetermined area of the RAM. For example, when BB1 is won, the BB1 winning flag is set, and when the watermelon is won, the watermelon winning flag is set. The winning flags of BB1 to BB5 are carried over until the winning BB is won, while the winning flags corresponding to the winning combinations other than BB1 to BB5 are when the winning game ends regardless of whether or not the winning is generated. Will be erased.

When the internal lottery process is completed, the reel rotation process is performed. In the reel rotation process, the stop switches 8L to 8R are enabled after starting the rotation of the reels 2L to 2R on the condition that a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the reel rotation of the previous game. And stop the rotation of the reel according to the stop operation. In the reel rotation process, when a predetermined freeze condition is satisfied, a freeze effect is executed to delay the progress of the game for a predetermined period (delay the activation of each stop operation of the stop switches 8L to 8R). After executing the freeze effect processing for the operation, the stop switches 8L to 8R may be enabled to shift to the normal game.

When the reels 2L to 2R are stopped and the reel rotation process is completed, a winning determination process (see FIGS. 39 to 42, etc.) is performed to determine whether or not a winning or the like has occurred based on the symbol combination on the winning line. .. Further, the state shown in FIG. 44 is controlled according to the combination of symbols on the winning line.

When the winning determination process is completed, the payout process is performed. In the payout process, medals are paid out or credits are added according to the occurrence of winning, various processes not related to winning (for example, processing related to counting the number of medals paid out in the bonus and controlling the end of the bonus, and winning without carry-over). Flags (winning flags for small wins, replays, etc.) are erased). Further, when it is determined that any of BB1 to BB5 has been won, the winning flag of the winning BB is deleted. In the game end process, a process of setting the game state (see FIG. 44 and the like) is executed in preparation for the next game. As a result, the game control process for one game is completed, and the game control process for the next game is started.

[Processing related to AT]
The main control unit 41 can control AT (assist time) in addition to advantageous states such as bonus and RT2 and RT3. The main control unit 41 executes an AT lottery as to whether or not to control the AT. Further, the main control unit 41 controls the AT when it is determined to be controlled by the AT in the AT lottery, and can specify the corresponding procedure (pushing order) for stopping the symbol combination advantageous to the player on the winning line LN. Execute the process for executing the navigation effect. In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 performs navigation notification using the game auxiliary display 12 (see FIG. 59), and the sub control unit 91 displays the corresponding procedure on the liquid crystal display 51 to produce a navigation effect. Do (not shown in particular).

During non-AT, the main control unit 41 has a specific AT lottery target combination (in this embodiment, middle-stage cherry lip, strong cherry lip, weak cherry lip, watermelon, BB1 to BB5, shown in FIGS. 45 and 46. When the common bell) is won, an AT lottery process for determining whether or not to control the AT is performed. Further, when the specific lottery target combination is won during AT, the AT addition lottery is executed. The AT lottery process may be executed after the internal lottery is performed in the internal lottery process, for example, as long as it is executed at a predetermined timing in the progress of one game.

In the AT lottery process, it is determined whether or not to control the AT, and when it is determined to be controlled by the AT, the number of AT games is determined from the number of multiple types of games (50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300). .. The number of AT games is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control unit 41. In addition, the main control unit 41 draws a lottery for the timing to start the AT. The main control unit 41 determines, for example, to start AT 0 to 32 games after the AT winning game by drawing a random number.

The reliability determined to be controlled by AT in the AT lottery and the expected value of the number of AT games determined when controlling AT (the average number of games to be acquired), which are advantages for the player, are specific lottery targets. It is determined to be different depending on the type of role. For example, the order is middle cherry lip, strong cherry lip, weak cherry lip, watermelon, and common bell, and the AT lottery is performed so that the common bell is the lowest. Further, the reliability determined to be controlled by AT in the AT lottery and the expected value of the number of AT games determined when controlled by AT are determined even when the same specific lottery target combination is won. , When the specific lottery target combination is not simultaneously won with BB1 to BB5 (for example, when the strong cherry lip is won), but when it is simultaneously won with BB1 to BB5 (for example, when BB1 + strong cherry lip is won). The AT lottery is held so that the price is higher.

In addition, the sub-control unit 91 executes a notification effect of notifying the corresponding index symbol when any of the lottery target combinations is won and when any of the winning combinations is won. For example, as shown in FIG. 41, the index symbols of the lower right bell, the middle bell, and the upper bell are bells. As for watermelon, although it is not a symbol that is aligned with the invalid line LM4 or a symbol that may be aligned, the same "bell" as the index symbol of the bell is defined as a specific winning symbol. The specific winning symbol is a combination of winning symbols of the lower right watermelon included in the watermelon, which corresponds to the right reel 2R, and is a symbol that can be stopped on the winning line LN when winning the lower right watermelon. .. When a watermelon is won, it is possible to perform an effect using an index symbol and an effect using a specific winning symbol. In the notification effect, the character image of the index symbol and the symbol corresponding to the specific winning symbol is displayed. In addition, when the cherry lip is won, a notification effect indicating that the cherry has been won is executed. For example, when the cherry lip is won (when any of the strong cherry lip, the weak cherry lip, and the middle cherry lip is won), the character image corresponding to the cherry pattern is displayed.

When the main control unit 41 is controlled by the AT, the main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification by winning the push order combination, and also gives the sub control unit 91 a first internal winning command and a second internal. By transmitting the winning command and the push order command, the navigation effect by the sub control unit 91 is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can execute the navigation notification and execute the navigation effect by satisfying certain conditions even in the normal state where the AT is not set.

[About internal winning command setting process]
Next, the control contents of the internal winning command setting process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 53. In the present embodiment, a winning number is assigned in advance for each type of lottery target combination, and a lottery target combination that may be carried over, that is, a special combination winning number table in which a winning number for each type of special combination is set. A lottery target combination that is not carried over, that is, a general combination winning number table in which a winning number for each type of general combination is set is stored in a predetermined area of ROM 41b.

As shown in FIG. 48, in the special winning combination number table, when none of the special winning combination is won, that is, the winning number of the outlier is "0", and the winning numbers of BB1 to 5 are "1" to "5". Is assigned. Further, as shown in FIG. 49, in the general winning combination winning number table, "0" is used as the winning number when none of the general winning combination is won, that is, when the winning number is out of the game, and "1" is used as the winning number of the replaying combination. ~ "25" is assigned, and "30" to "60" are assigned as winning numbers for small wins. As described above, in the special winning combination winning number table and the general winning combination winning number table, the lottery target combination of the internal lottery and the winning number are set correspondingly.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 executes the internal lottery process when the start operation is performed, and when any of the special combination and the general combination is won in the internal lottery, , The winning number corresponding to the lottery target combination for which the winning is determined is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and when none of the winning combinations is won, the winning number corresponding to the loss is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The winning number indicating the winning of the general role is cleared after each game, while the winning number indicating the winning of the special role is maintained until the winning special role is won, and the winning special role wins. It will be cleared.

After setting the winning number, the main control unit 41 executes the internal winning command setting process, and the first internal winning command and the second internal winning are based on the internal winning number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The command is set in the command queue, and the first internal winning command and the second internal winning command are transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by the subsequent timer interrupt processing (main).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50, in the internal winning command setting process, first, in the internal lottery process, the winning number of the special combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired (Sf1), and the acquired winning number is obtained. , The transmission winning number to be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf2), and the first internal winning command is stored in the command queue based on the transmission winning number. The command transmitted by the main control unit 41 is composed of two bytes, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command content). When storing the first internal winning command in the command queue, 41 stores a MODE indicating that it is the first internal winning command in the first byte, and wins a special role in the EXT of the second byte. Store the number.

In the step of Sf3, after storing the first internal winning command, the winning number of the general winning combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired in the internal lottery process (Sf4), and the acquired winning number is less than 2. Winning obtained by sequentially determining whether or not there is (Sf5), whether or not it is less than 17 (Sf6), whether or not it is less than 31 (Sf7), and whether or not it is less than 58 (Sf8). It is determined which of the plurality of predetermined ranges the number is in.

Then, when it is determined in the step of Sf5 that the winning number is less than 2, that is, when the winning number is 0 or 1, the acquired winning number is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 for transmission winning. The number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf12). Further, when it is determined that the winning number is not less than 2 in the step of Sf5 and it is determined that the winning number is less than 17 in the step of Sf6, that is, when the winning number is any of 2 to 16, the winning number for transmission is used. 2 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf11). Further, when it is determined that the winning number is not less than 17 in the step of Sf6 and it is determined that the winning number is less than 31 in the step of Sf7, that is, when the winning number is any of 17 to 30, the winning number is assigned. The transmission winning number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf12). Further, when it is determined that the winning number is not less than 31 in the step of Sf7 and less than 58 in the step of Sf8, that is, when the winning number is any of 31 to 57, it is used as the winning number for transmission. 31 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf9). If it is determined in the step of Sf8 that the winning number is not less than 58, that is, if the winning number is 58 to 60, the winning number is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c as the transmitting winning number (Sf12). ..

Then, after setting the transmission winning number of the general combination in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the steps of Sf9, Sf11, and Sf12, the second internal winning command is stored in the command queue based on the transmission winning number (Sf10). ). When the main control unit 41 stores the second internal winning command in the command queue, the main control unit 41 stores a MODE indicating that the second internal winning command is the second internal winning command in the first byte, and serves as a general role in the EXT of the second byte. Stores the winning number for transmission. After storing the second internal winning command in the command queue in the step of Sf10, the internal winning command setting process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (main).

As described above, in the internal winning command setting process of the present embodiment, the winning number of the special combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the internal lottery process is set as the transmitting winning number, and the first winning number including the transmitting winning number is set. Set the internal winning command of to the command queue.

Further, in the internal winning command setting process of the present embodiment, the winning number of the general winning combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the internal lottery process is set in the first predetermined range (0 to 1, 17 to 25, 30, 58 to 60). , Corresponds to a combination different from the push order bell and push order lip), set the winning number as the transmission winning number, and command the second internal winning command including the transmission winning number. Set to queue. As a result, in the second internal winning command, which is transmitted when the winning number within the first predetermined range is set in the internal winning, the internal lottery is based on the transmission winning number included in the command. It is possible to identify the winning number by.

On the other hand, when the winning number is within the second predetermined range (2 to 16, corresponding to the push order lip), one winning number (2) included in the second predetermined range is set as the transmission winning number. Then, the second internal winning command including the transmission winning number is set in the command queue. As a result, in the second internal winning command, which is transmitted when the winning number within the second predetermined range is set in the internal winning, the winning is based on the transmission winning number included in the command. While it is not possible to specify which of the numbers in the second predetermined range the number is, it is possible to specify that the winning number is within the second predetermined range.

If the winning number is within the third predetermined range (31 to 57, corresponding to the push order bell), one winning number (31) included in the third predetermined range is set as the transmission winning number. Then, the second internal winning command including the transmission winning number is set in the command queue. As a result, in the second internal winning command, which is transmitted when the winning number within the third predetermined range is set in the internal winning, the winning is based on the transmission winning number included in the command. While it is not possible to specify which of the numbers is in the third predetermined range, it is possible to specify that the winning number is within the third predetermined range.

The first internal winning command and the second internal winning command set in the internal winning command setting process of the present embodiment are subsequently executed by the timer interrupt processing (main) to the sub-control unit 91. Will be transmitted sequentially.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to transmit a command composed of 2 bytes to the sub control unit 91, but the command form shown in this embodiment is an example and other data. The form may be used. Further, in the present embodiment, the command is composed of a 2-byte signal, but these commands may be composed of a 1-byte signal or a 3-byte or more signal.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which a first internal winning command and a second internal winning command composed of 2 bytes are transmitted to the sub control unit 91, and 2 of each command. Although the configuration includes the winning number for transmission in the byte, the form of the command shown in this embodiment is an example, and other data forms may be used. For example, the first internal winning command and the second internal Each winning command is composed of a 3-byte signal, and the 3rd byte includes the special winning transmission winning number or the general winning transmission winning number, the first internal winning command, and the second internal winning command. It may be configured by one signal consisting of 3 bytes, the 2nd byte including the winning number for transmission of the special combination, and the 3rd byte including the winning number for transmission of the general combination.

Further, in the present embodiment, the winning numbers of the special winning combination and the general winning combination are assigned separately, that is, the winning numbers of the special winning combination corresponding to the types and deviations of the special winning combination (BB1 to 5) in the special winning combination winning number table are assigned. It is configured to set and set the winning number of the general winning combination according to the type and the loss of the general winning combination in the general winning combination winning number table, and the main control unit 41 sets the winning number of the special winning combination and the general winning combination according to the result of the internal lottery. The winning number of the winning combination is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, but the winning number is assigned without dividing the special winning combination and the general winning combination, for example, "BB1", "small winning combination", and "BB1 + winning at the same time". The winning number may be assigned to each of the "small wins" as the lottery target wins. In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 sets one winning number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c according to the result of the internal lottery, so that the special winning combination and the small winning combination are won based only on the one winning number. It is possible to determine whether or not the reels are being used, and perform predetermined control (setting of internal winning flag, navigation notification, command creation, stop control of reels 2L, 2C, 2R, etc.).

Next, the control content of the push order command transmission process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49, 51, and 52. In the present embodiment, a navigation number (0 to 9) capable of identifying the reel stop order by the navigation notification and a navigation number (10 to 14) capable of identifying a predetermined symbol suggested by the navigation notification are assigned in advance and a lottery is performed. Of the target combinations, the push order combination is assigned a navigation number in advance for each type, and a navigation number table in which the navigation number for each type of the lottery target combination is set is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b.

In the example of FIG. 51, for example, 0 is associated with the standard push order (in this embodiment, the stop order in which the left reel 2L is the first stop) as the navigation number. Further, 1 is associated with the left, middle, and right navigation numbers (see also the navigation numbers in FIGS. 48 and 49). In the present embodiment, the stop order in which the left reel 2L is the first stop is applied as the standard push order specified by the navigation number 0, but the standard push order is disadvantageously advantageous for the player. Any other stop order may be used as long as it is a standard push order.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 wins a general combination set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c when the start operation is performed and when the stop operations of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are performed. The push order command setting process for setting the push order command according to the number in the command queue is executed, and the push order command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91 by the subsequent timer interrupt process (main).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52, in the push order command setting process, first, in the internal lottery process, the winning numbers of the special combination and the general combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c are acquired (Sg1), and then the RAM 41c With reference to a predetermined flag indicating whether or not the navigation notification is being performed, which is set in the predetermined area of the above, the state in which the navigation notification is performed (when the navigation notification is performed during AT or non-AT, it will be described later. It is determined whether or not the condition is from the time when the conditions for implementing the navigation notification of the special role are satisfied to the time when the special role wins a prize (Sg2). If it is determined in the step of Sg2 that the navigation notification is not performed, whether or not the winning combination to stop at the winning line LN is determined based on the stop status of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R and the result of the internal lottery. (Sg5), and if the winning combination to stop at the winning line LN is not determined, the standard navigation number (0 in this embodiment) is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c as the transmission navigation number (Sg6).

On the other hand, when it is determined in the step of Sg2 that the navigation notification is performed, and when it is determined in the step of Sg5 that the winning combination to stop at the winning line LN is confirmed, it is stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 41b. With reference to the navigation number table (see FIGS. 48 and 49), the navigation numbers corresponding to the winning numbers of the special combination and the general combination acquired in the step of Sg1 are set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c as the transmission navigation numbers.

At this time, if it is specified that the push order rip is won based on the internal winning number, an advantageous replay that promotes the RT state according to the type of the winning combination (rip 4, rip 4 shown in FIG. 44). 5. A navigation number indicating the stop order in which the combination of the rip 1) for maintaining RT2 is stopped at the winning line LN is set as the transmission navigation number. If it is specified that the push order bell has been won based on the internal winning number, the combination of bell 1 or bell 2 is stopped at the winning line LN according to the type of winning combination. Set the navigation number indicating the above as the transmission navigation number.

In addition, one of the special roles (BB1 to BB5) is won based on the internal winning number, and the implementation condition of the special role navigation notification (in this embodiment, after the special role is won, a predetermined number of games (for example, for example) If it is specified that (5 games) have passed) and none of the small wins have been won (missing), the relevant special role will be selected according to the type of special win. A navigation number (10 to 14) suggesting a symbol constituting a special role is set as a transmission navigation number.

After the transmission navigation number is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the step of Sg3 or the step of Sg6, the push order command is stored in the command queue based on the transmission navigation number (Sg4). When the push order command is stored in the command queue, the main control unit 41 stores a MODE indicating that the push order command is in the first byte, and stores a transmission navigation number in the EXT of the second byte. After the push order command is stored in the command queue in the step of Sg4, the push order command setting process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (main).

As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes the push order command setting process when the start operation is performed, which is advantageous for the player when the navigation notification is being executed. If a push order command that can specify the stop order is set in the command queue and the navigation notification is not being executed, the stop order that is advantageous to the player cannot be specified, and the standard is disadvantageous or advantageous to the player. Set a push order command that can specify a specific push order in the command queue.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes the push order command setting process every time the stop operation is performed, so that the main control unit 41 stops at the winning line LN even when the navigation notification is not being executed. If is confirmed, a push order command that can specify a stop order that is advantageous to the player is set in the command queue.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is executed by the push order command setting process, so that, for example, the game state is RT1 and the navigation notification is not performed, and the preparation lip 1 (corresponding procedure is When (left, middle, right) is won and none of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, the advantageous replay can be stopped, but it is uncertain which combination will be stopped, so it is standard. The navigation number (“0”) is set as the transmission navigation number, and the push order command including the transmission navigation number is set. Further, when the left reel 2L is stopped as the first stop, the advantageous replay can still be stopped, and it has not been determined which combination will be stopped, so the standard navigation number (“0”) is used as the transmission navigation number. Push order commands including are set. Then, when the left reel 2L is stopped as the first stop and then the middle reel 2C is stopped as the second stop, only the advantageous replay can be stopped by the subsequent stop of the right reel 2R, and the winning combination is confirmed. Therefore, even when the navigation notification is not performed, a navigation number capable of specifying an advantageous stop order for the player (stop order for winning the advantageous replay) is set as the transmission navigation number. Further, when a reel other than the left reel 2L is stopped in the first stop, the left reel 2L is stopped as the first stop, and then a reel other than the middle reel 2C is stopped as the second stop. Regardless of the order, replays other than the advantageous replay can be stopped, and the winning combination to be stopped is determined. Therefore, even if the navigation notification is not performed, the navigation number that can specify the advantageous stop order for the player. Is set as the navigation number for transmission.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the push order combination is won in the state where the main control unit 41 is not controlling the AT, the stop order advantageous to the player is determined for the player. A push order command including a navigation number capable of specifying an advantageous stop order is set and transmitted to the sub control unit 91. The timing at which the advantageous stop order is determined is the timing at which the first stop operation is performed in the three-choice combination (push order bell, maintenance lip, rush lip), and in the six-choice combination (preparation lip). This is the timing at which the first stop operation is performed and it is determined that the winning combination for the player is not stopped, or the timing at which the second stop operation is performed.

In addition, in the game after the special role has been won and the conditions for implementing the prescribed navigation notification have been met, the internal lottery result shows that none of the small roles have been won. In that case, a push order command including a navigation number ("10" to "14") suggesting a symbol constituting one special role that has been won is set.

The push order command set in the push order command setting process of the present embodiment is subsequently transmitted to the sub control unit 91 by executing the timer interrupt process (main).

Then, when the sub control unit 91 is specified to perform navigation notification on the main control unit 41 side based on the push order command, the above-mentioned first internal winning command, and the second internal winning command. In addition, a navigation effect is performed. When the sub-control unit 91 performs the navigation effect, the winning of the push order combination is specified based on the second internal winning command, and the navigation number is other than "0" based on the push order command. That is, when it is specified that the push order advantageous to the player is other than the standard push order, the liquid crystal display 51 displays a stop order image showing the stop order according to the navigation number specified based on the push order command. To display. Further, in the navigation effect, the liquid crystal display 51 displays an image suggesting a combination that may win a prize based on the second internal winning command. At this time, for example, when the push order bell is won as the push order role, the push order replay is won by displaying the image of "bell" to suggest the possibility of winning the push order bell. If so, the type of push order lip that may win a prize is specified based on the game state on the main control unit 41 side specified based on the game state command or the like, and is included in the specified push order lip. It is possible to suggest the possibility of winning a role that is advantageous to the player by performing an effect according to the role to be played (for example, in the maintenance lip, lip 1).

Further, as an effect according to the combination included in the push order rip in the navigation effect, for example, even if the push order rip is won in the internal lottery, in the internal winning command setting process on the main control unit 41 side, the second internal As the winning command for transmission of the winning command, "2" indicating the winning of any of the push order rips is uniformly set, but the sub-control unit 91 wins for transmission based on the second internal winning command. By specifying that the number is "2" and that the game state is RT1 based on the game state command, etc., it is specified that the push order lip is won, and based on the push order command. An image showing the stop order according to the navigation number specified in the above, and an image suggesting the possibility that the advantageous replay wins by the operation according to the stop order (in the present embodiment, the image showing the combination of symbols constituting the advantageous replay). ) Is displayed, so that it is possible to perform an effect according to the role that is advantageous to the player among the roles included in the push order lip.

Further, when it is specified that the special role has been won based on the first internal winning command as an effect suggesting the winning of the special role in the navigation effect, the sub-control unit 91 then performs the above-mentioned special role. When the predetermined number of games (5 games in this embodiment) for which the conditions for implementing the navigation notification are satisfied have passed, a definite notification (special role on the liquid crystal display 51) is notified that the special role has been won in the internal lottery. Displays a message, an image, etc. indicating that the player has won). Then, after the definite notification is performed, that is, after the execution condition of the special role navigation notification is satisfied, the navigation number specified based on the push order command suggests a predetermined symbol of the special role. In addition, by performing a stop operation at the timing when a predetermined symbol can be stopped at the winning line LN according to the navigation number, a special role winning promotion effect (for example, specified based on the navigation number) for promoting the winning of a special role is performed. The liquid crystal display 51 that displays an image of a predetermined pattern is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, etc.). In this way, the sub-control unit 91 plays a predetermined number of games after the special combination is won based on the first internal winning command, and the execution condition of the special combination navigation notification is established on the main control unit 41 side. Since the final control notification is performed when it is determined that the special role has been performed, the main control unit 41 includes a navigation number suggesting a symbol capable of winning the special role after the execution condition of the special role navigation notification is satisfied. By transmitting the push order command, the sub-control unit 91 can be made to perform the special role winning promotion effect based on the navigation number after the confirmation notification is performed.

Next, the control content of the winning determination command setting process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 53. Further, in the present embodiment, a winning number is assigned in advance for each type of winning combination shown in FIGS. 38 to 41 (not particularly shown), and a winning number is set for each type of winning combination. The table is stored in a predetermined area of ROM 41b.

When all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped after the start operation is performed, the main control unit 41 has won a prize according to the combination of the symbols stopped on each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R. The winning judgment process for determining whether or not to perform is executed. In the winning determination process, it is determined whether or not the combination of the symbols constituting the winning combination is stopped on the winning line LN for each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R, and the combination of the symbols constituting the winning combination is stopped. When it is determined that, the winning number corresponding to the combination of the symbols constituting the stopped winning combination is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c with reference to the winning number table, while the combination of the symbols constituting the winning combination. If it is determined that is not stopped, "0" indicating a loss is set as a winning number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the winning determination process is completed.

Then, after executing the winning determination processing, the main control unit 41 executes the winning determination command setting process for setting the winning determination command capable of specifying the winning number in the command queue.

As shown in FIG. 53, in the winning determination command setting process, the winning number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired based on the winning determination result in the winning determination process (Sh1), and the winning determination command is obtained based on the winning number. Is stored in the command queue (Sh2), and the winning judgment command setting process is completed. When the winning determination command is stored in the command queue, the main control unit 41 stores a MODE indicating that the winning determination command is a winning determination command in the first byte, and stores the winning number in the EXT of the second byte.

The winning determination command set in the winning determination command setting process is subsequently transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by executing the timer interrupt processing (main).

In this way, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes the winning determination command setting process when all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, and sets the winning determination command including the winning number. The winning determination command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91.

Further, in the winning judgment command setting process of the present embodiment, the winning judgment command including the winning number set in the RAM 41c in the winning judgment processing as it is is set in the command queue, so that it can be used as a special command or the like that can specify the winning number. The processing load can be reduced without performing the conversion process.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the winning number is assigned to each type of winning combination and stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 41b, the sub-control unit 91 that has received the winning determination command including the winning number is based on the winning number. It is possible to specify the combination of symbols stopped on each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R and execute the effect.

A conventional slot machine has a configuration including a game control unit that controls a game and an effect control unit that controls an effect, and the game control unit determines an internal lottery result when a predetermined push order combination is won. In response to this, it is determined whether or not to control the AT that executes the navigation notification that notifies the operation procedure of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player, and when controlling to the AT, the navigation notification is executed and the internal lottery result is obtained. Is transmitted to the effect control unit regardless of whether or not the AT controls the internal winning command, and the effect control unit identifies the internal lottery result based on the internal winning command and controls the game. When the unit is controlled by the AT, the navigation effect for notifying the operation procedure advantageous to the player is executed based on the specified internal lottery result.

In such a configuration, the effect control unit can specify an operation procedure that is advantageous to the player based on the internal winning command regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT, so that the effect control unit is illegal. By doing so, although the game control unit has not decided to control the AT, the internal winning command identifies an operation procedure that is advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result, and the operation procedure is There is a possibility that it will be notified by the production control unit.

On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment serves as an internal winning command capable of specifying the internal lottery result, and the first internal winning command and the general winning command capable of specifying the winning status of the special combination as the internal lottery result. A second internal winning command that can specify the winning status is set in the internal winning command setting process, and the set command can be transmitted to the sub control unit 91. In the internal winning command setting process, the AT is controlled. Regardless of whether or not it is done, when the internal lottery result becomes the push order, it is possible to specify that the push order has been won, but it is general so that it is not possible to specify the stop order that is advantageous for the player. Since the second internal winning command related to the combination is set, it is advantageous for the player according to the internal lottery result from the second internal winning command regardless of whether or not the main control unit 41 controls the AT. Since the common second internal winning command is transmitted regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT without specifying the stop order, the process related to the transmission of the second internal winning command can be simplified. Even if the sub-control unit 91 side is cheated, it is possible to prevent the stop order that is advantageous for the player from being notified by the navigation effect without being controlled by the AT.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to notify the stop order of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, which is advantageous for the player, by the navigation notification according to the push order winning combination by the internal winning. The control unit 41 operates by navigation notification at one of a plurality of different operation timings, an operation mode of operating in any one of a plurality of operation orders, and an operation mode based on a combination thereof. Even in such a configuration, the main control unit 41 specifies that the push order combination has been won regardless of whether or not the main control unit 41 controls the AT. However, by setting the second internal winning command so that the operation mode advantageous to the player cannot be specified, the sub-control unit 91 side responds to the internal lottery result from the second internal winning command. An operation mode that is advantageous to the player is not specified.

Further, in the present embodiment, the push order replay and the push order bell are included as the push order role in which the main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification, and the main control unit 41 has the internal lottery result in the internal winning command setting process. A second internal winning command is set for the sub-control unit 91 so that it can be specified whether the push order combination is a push order replay or a push order bell when is a push order combination. Since the transmission is performed, when the internal lottery result becomes the push order combination, the sub control unit 91 can specify whether the push order combination is the push order replay or the push order bell, and the sub control unit 91 pushes. It is also possible to perform different effects depending on the type of command.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is controlled by the AT, and when the internal lottery result becomes the push order in the state where the navigation notification is executed, the stop order advantageous to the player is specified. Since the push order command setting process for setting the push order command that can be performed is executed and the set push order command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, the player can use the sub control unit 91 side in the state where the navigation notification is executed. It is possible to perform a navigation effect that notifies an advantageous stop order.

Further, in the present embodiment, the push order replay and the push order bell are included as the push order role in which the main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification, and the main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification in the push order command setting process. The push order winning combination is different when the internal lottery result is a push order replay and when the push order bell is executed, that is, when the navigation notification is executed. However, when the stop order advantageous to the player is common, the push order command including the common navigation number that can specify the stop order advantageous to the player is set, so that the types of push order commands can be reduced. it can.

Further, in the push order command setting process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment specifies a stop order that is advantageous for the player when the internal lottery result becomes the push order in the state where the navigation notification is executed. While setting a push order command including a possible navigation number, in a state other than the state in which the navigation notification is executed, when the internal lottery result becomes the push order, it is not possible to specify the stop order that is advantageous for the player. Since the push order command including the navigation number that can specify the standard push order (first stop on the left) is set, the internal lottery result becomes the push order regardless of whether or not the navigation notification is executed. Sometimes, the process of setting the push order command including the navigation number can be shared.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped stepwise each time the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, which is advantageous for the player. The order is determined before the operation of all the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, that is, the operation of the third stop is completed. When the 3-choice push order bell is won, the first stop operation is performed to determine whether or not the advantageous lip is won, and when the 6-choice push order lip is won, the second stop operation is performed. By doing so, it is decided whether or not the advantageous replay can be won. In the push order command setting process, the main control unit 41 decides a stop order that is advantageous to the player when the internal lottery result becomes the push order in a state other than the state in which the navigation notification is executed, that is, After the first stop and second stop operations are performed, a push order command including a navigation number that can specify a stop order that is advantageous for the player according to the internal winning result is set and transmitted, so that sub-control Even if the unit 91 is fraudulent, the sub-control unit 91 side stops in an advantageous manner for the player while preventing the stop order that is advantageous for the player from being specified, and when the internal lottery result becomes the push order. It is possible to perform an effect according to whether or not the operations are performed in order.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 stops the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R when the push order combination is won in a state other than the state in which the navigation notification is executed in the push order command setting process. Is performed and it is determined that the winning combination to be stopped is determined, a push order command including a navigation number capable of specifying a stop order advantageous to the player is set, and the push order command is sent to the sub control unit 91. However, the command that can specify the stop order that is advantageous to the player after the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped and the winning combination is determined is different from the push order command. It may also be a command, for example, by sending another command including the winning number of the push order winning in the internal lottery, the stop order advantageous to the player based on the type of the winning push order The configuration may be such that it can be specified, or it may be configured to provide a separate command including a navigation number that can specify the stop order that is advantageous for the player. In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 executes the push order command setting process only when the internal lottery is performed, and then when the winning combination to be stopped is determined, the stop order is advantageous to the player. By configuring the process to set a command that can specify the above, it is possible to reduce the load related to the transmission of the push order command by the main control unit 41.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 executes the push order command setting process when the internal lottery is performed and when the stop operations of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are performed. After the combination to be stopped is determined, each time the push order command setting process is performed, a push order command capable of specifying a stop order advantageous to the player is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. The push order command that can specify the stop order that is advantageous to the player after the winning combination is determined may be a configuration that is transmitted at least once when the stopping combination is determined. After sending the push order command that can specify the stop order that is advantageous to the person, the push order command setting process may not be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the load related to the transmission of the push order command by the main control unit 41.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 performs a push order command setting process when an internal lottery is performed or when each reel 2L, 2C, or 2R is stopped in a state of performing navigation notification. However, in the case where the navigation notification is performed, the push order command setting process may be executed only when the internal lottery is performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the load related to the transmission of the push order command by the main control unit 41 when the navigation notification is performed.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment performs an internal lottery when the start operation is performed, sets a different winning number for each internal lottery result in the RAM 41c according to the internal lottery result, and sets the winning number. The internal winning flag is set, navigation notification, command creation, reel 2L, 2C, 2R stop control, etc. are performed according to the internal winning command, and the winning status of the special role is displayed as an internal winning command that can specify the internal lottery result. A first internal winning command that can be specified and a second internal winning command that can specify the winning status of a general combination are set in the internal winning command setting process, and the set command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. It is a configuration, and the winning number when the push order is won as the internal winning result is assigned a continuous numerical value consisting of a predetermined numerical range, and in the internal winning command setting process, it is controlled by AT and the navigation notification When the winning number set in the RAM 41c is within the predetermined numerical range in a state other than the state in which is executed, it can be specified that the push order has been used, but the stop order that is advantageous to the player cannot be specified. Since the second internal winning command is set and the set second internal winning command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, the second internal winning command is controlled regardless of whether the main control unit 41 controls the AT. Since the stop order that is advantageous for the player according to the internal lottery result is not specified from the internal winning command of 2, the player is not controlled by the AT even if the sub control unit 91 side is cheated. It is possible to prevent the advantageous stop order from being notified by the navigation effect.

Further, as the winning number set when the internal lottery result becomes the push order, a continuous numerical value consisting of a predetermined numerical range is assigned, and the main control unit 41 uses the internal lottery result as the push order. Since it can be determined whether or not the winning number used when performing the predetermined control is within the predetermined numerical range assigned to the push order combination, a second internal winning command is transmitted. The processing when doing so can be simplified.

Further, in the present embodiment, the push order role in which the main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification includes the push order replay and the push order bell, and is used as the winning number when the internal lottery result is the push order replay. , A continuous numerical value in the second predetermined range is assigned, and a continuous numerical value in the third predetermined range is assigned as a winning number when the internal lottery result becomes a push order bell. Therefore, the main control unit 41 Is whether the internal lottery result is a push order replay, depending on whether the winning number is in the second predetermined range or the third predetermined range when the internal lottery result becomes the push order combination. Since it is possible to determine whether or not the push order bell is used, it is possible to simplify the process of setting the second internal winning command in the internal winning command setting process.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can control a plurality of RT states, and in each game state, the type of push order replay as the push order combination determined in the internal lottery is different (this). In the embodiment, for example, in RT1, the preparation rip is the lottery target role, while the maintenance rip and the rush rip are not the lottery target roles, and in RT2, the maintenance rip and the rush rip are the lottery target roles, while the preparation The winning number when the internal lottery result is the push order replay in RT1 and the winning number when the internal lottery result is the push order replay in RT2 are both the first. Since it is assigned to the predetermined range (2 to 16) of 2, in the internal winning command setting process, the process for determining whether or not the internal lottery result is a push order replay is common to both RT1 and RT2. it can.

Further, in the internal winning command setting process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment responds to the internal lottery result when the internal lottery result is a combination other than the push order combination or out of order in a state where the AT is not controlled. When a second internal winning command including the winning number is set and the internal lottery result is a push order replay which is a push order, one winning number (book) included in the second predetermined range (2 to 16). In the embodiment, when 2) is included and the internal lottery result is a push order bell which is a push order combination, one winning number included in the third predetermined range (31 to 57) (31 in the present embodiment). By setting a second internal winning command including, the internal lottery result is an internal lottery regardless of whether the result is a push order combination, a combination other than the push order combination, or a loss in the state where the AT is not controlled. Since the second internal winning command including the winning number corresponding to the result is transmitted, the process of creating and transmitting the second internal winning command is standardized regardless of whether the internal lottery result is a push order. can do.

In the internal winning command setting process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment changes the pushing order when the internal lottery result becomes the pushing order regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT. Although it is possible to specify that the player has won, a second internal winning command related to the general role is set so that the stop order that is advantageous to the player cannot be specified, but when the AT is not in control. , When the result of the internal lottery becomes the push order, it can be specified that the push order has been won, but the second internal win for the general role can be specified so that the stop order that is advantageous for the player cannot be specified. While setting the command, when it is in the state of being controlled by AT, when the internal lottery result becomes the push order combination, by setting the winning number according to the type of the winning push order combination, AT When it is in the state of being controlled by, a second internal winning command capable of specifying the type of the winning push order combination may be transmitted to the sub control unit 91. In such a configuration, in the state controlled by the AT, the stop order advantageous to the player can be specified from the winning number included in the second internal winning command according to the type of push order, so that the sub On the control unit 91 side, the stop order advantageous to the player can be notified by the navigation effect. Further, in such a configuration, in the state controlled by the AT, the winning number of the lottery target winning combination in the internal lottery can be specified from the winning number included in the second internal winning command, so that the lottery target winning combination internally won. It is possible to perform an effect according to the type of winning combination included in, for example, an effect suggesting that the replay 1 included in the maintenance lip 1 may win a prize when the maintenance lip 1 is won.

Further, in such a configuration, the main control unit 41 may be configured not to execute the push order command setting process and not to transmit the push order command, and is controlled by the AT by such a configuration. In the state, from the winning number included in the second internal winning command, the stop order advantageous to the player can be specified according to the type of push order combination, and the stop order advantageous to the player can be specified on the sub control unit 91 side. It can be notified by the navigation effect, and the load related to the transmission of the push order command by the main control unit 41 can be reduced.

The winning number of the push order replay and the winning number of the push order bell need only be set in a continuous numerical range, and the second predetermined range and the push order in which the winning number of the push order replay is set are set. The configuration may be continuous with a third predetermined range in which the winning number of the bell is set. Even with such a configuration, as in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the internal lottery result is a push order combination, and the winning number used when performing predetermined control is the push order combination. Since it can be determined whether or not it is within the predetermined numerical range assigned to the user, the process of transmitting the second internal winning command can be simplified.

Further, in the present embodiment, 1 to 60 are assigned as the winning numbers of the general combination, and the winning numbers of the push order replay, which is the push order combination, are continuously set in the first and second predetermined ranges, and the first The winning numbers of the push order bells, which are push order combinations, are continuously set in the predetermined range of 3, and the winning numbers of the non-push order combinations are distributed to the numerical ranges before and after the second predetermined range and the third predetermined range. However, the configuration may be such that all the winning numbers of the non-pushing order combinations are continuously set in the fourth predetermined range. With such a configuration, whether or not the internal lottery result is a push order combination is within a predetermined numerical range assigned to the push order combination by the winning number used when performing the predetermined control. Since it can be determined by whether or not, it is possible to simplify the process when transmitting the second internal winning command, and it is also determined whether or not the winning number assigned to the non-pushing order is within a predetermined numerical range. The process to be performed can be simplified.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the internal winning command setting process, the main control unit 41 has the same type of push order combination group (in this embodiment, the push order replay group and the push order bell) regardless of the game state. The same transmission winning number (in this embodiment, "2" for the push order replay group and "31" for the push order bell group) is uniformly set for each group), and the transmission is performed. The configuration is such that a second internal winning command including the credit winning number is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, but in the internal winning command setting process, at least a group of push orderers in which the same transmission winning number is set is , Regardless of whether it is controlled by AT or not, when the internal lottery result becomes the push order combination, it can be specified that the push order combination has been won, but it is possible to specify the stop order that is advantageous for the player. It is only necessary to prevent this, and the groups of the same type of push order that are the targets of the lottery in one game state are divided into multiple groups so that each group includes one advantageous role for the player. Therefore, a different transmission winning number may be set for each divided group. As a result, it is possible for the sub-control unit 91 side to specify whether the push order combination belonging to any of the plurality of groups has been won, and to execute the effect according to the specified group.

[About reel rotation control]
Next, the rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R performed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 57. Each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the present embodiment is rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R provided corresponding to each. The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are composed of a hybrid stepping motor that makes one revolution in a cycle of 336 steps (0 to 335), and are based on a phase signal output from the motor drive circuit 45 based on control by the main control unit 41. , Each exciting phase in the stepping motor (in this embodiment, four phases of φ1 to φ4) is rotated by being switched between exciting and non-exciting in a predetermined order.

The main control unit 41 rotates each reel motor 32L, 32C, 32R, setting 0 as the number of steps when the reel reference position is detected by the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R provided on each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. To control. Further, in the above-mentioned main process, an excitation pattern for rotating the reel in a predetermined mode is set, and in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process (main), it is specified based on the excitation pattern and the number of steps from the reel reference position. A control signal indicating the excitation state of each exciting phase of the stepping motor is output to the motor drive circuit 45, and the motor drive circuit 45 outputs a phase signal indicating the excitation state based on the control signal to the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R. Is output to. As a result, in each reel motor 32L, 32C, 32R, the exciting state of the exciting phase of the reel motor is switched from the phase signal and controlled to a predetermined rotation mode, and each reel 2L, 2C corresponding to the reel motor 2R is designed to control the rotation.

The excitation pattern of the reel motor set by the main control unit 41 by the main processing is not directly related to the game progress status and the game excitation pattern group for controlling the rotation of the reel according to the progress status of the game. For example, a non-game excitation pattern group for performing an effect using a reel is included, and these excitation patterns are predetermined in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b. Among the excitation patterns of the reel motor, the game excitation pattern group includes a start pattern for starting the rotation of the reel in a stopped state and accelerating to a predetermined constant speed state, and a predetermined constant speed state. A constant speed pattern for continuing to rotate the reel accelerated to the constant speed state and a stop pattern for stopping the reel rotating in the predetermined constant speed state in a predetermined number of steps are included.

In each excitation pattern, the excitation state (excitation, non-excitation) of each excitation phase of the reel motor is determined for each number of steps from the reference position of the reel, and the excitation and non-excitation of the excitation state of the reel motor are stepped. By switching to the excitation state defined in the order of numbers, the rotation of the reel can be controlled to a predetermined rotation mode, and the main control unit 41 is a reel motor for each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. After setting the start pattern as the excitation pattern of, by switching the excitation pattern to the constant speed pattern, it is possible to start the rotation of the reel in the stopped state and perform start control to accelerate to a predetermined constant speed rotation. By repeatedly setting the constant speed pattern as the excitation pattern of the reel motor, it is possible to perform constant speed rotation control to maintain the rotation of the reel at the constant speed rotation, and for the reel on which the stop switch is operated, By switching the excitation pattern of the reel motor to a stop pattern at a predetermined timing, it is possible to perform rotation stop control for stopping the reel at a predetermined stop position according to the timing at which the stop switch is operated.

Further, the predetermined area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is updated according to the number of steps for exciting the reel motor, and is initialized every time the reel reference position is detected, so that each reel 2L, 2C, A step number counter for counting the number of steps after the reel reference position is detected for 2R is provided, and the value of the step number counter for the rotating reel is the predetermined number of steps (at least one reel makes one revolution). The number of steps is set to be larger than the 336 steps required for the purpose, for example, 400 steps) or more, the main control unit 41 determines that a rotation abnormality has occurred in the reel, and the relevant reel It is possible to reset the excitation pattern of the reel motor to the starting pattern, change the exciting state of the reel motor from the beginning of the starting pattern, and restart the rotation of the reel.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54A, the main control unit 41 sets a start pattern as an excitation pattern for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R as the game start operation is performed. , The rotation of each reel is started by changing the exciting state of each exciting phase of each reel motor in the stopped state based on the starting pattern. Further, when setting the start pattern as the excitation pattern, the step number counter is initialized to start counting the number of steps. Then, by switching the excitation pattern from the starting pattern to the constant speed pattern, the rotation of the reel is controlled to a predetermined constant speed rotation. After that, when the reel is rotating normally, the reel reference position is detected by making at least one revolution of the reel before the step number counter reaches the above-mentioned predetermined number of steps (for example, 400 steps). It will be. Then, for all the rotating reels, the activation pattern of the reel motor is switched to the constant speed pattern, and the reel reference position is detected, so that the activation condition for activating the acceptance of the stop operation of the rotating reels is set. Judge that it was established. With the establishment of this activation condition, the main control unit 41 activates the acceptance of the stop operation of the rotating reel, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated in this state to correspond to the corresponding reel. The stop operation of the above is effectively accepted, and the stop control for stopping the rotation of the reel is started.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 54B, after the main control unit 41 starts the rotation of each of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32 in the stopped state, the reel reference position is set for at least one of the reels. When the number of steps counter reaches a predetermined number of steps (for example, 400 steps) without being detected, that is, the number of steps since the start of rotation or the previous detection of the reel reference position is required for the reel to make one revolution. If the number of steps exceeds the number of steps, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the rotation state of the reel, restart control is performed, and the excitation pattern of the reel motor is set to the starting pattern again for the reel. The excitation state of the reel motor is changed from the beginning of the starting pattern to restart the rotation. Further, when performing restart control, the step number counter is initialized. After that, when the reel is rotated normally, the reel reference position is detected before the step number counter reaches a predetermined number of steps (for example, 400 steps). Then, for all the rotating reels, the excitation pattern is switched to the constant speed pattern and the reel reference position is detected, so that the condition for validating the acceptance of the reel stop operation is satisfied, and the main control unit 41 Activates the acceptance of the stop operation of the rotating reel when the activation condition is satisfied.

Further, as shown in FIG. 55, in a state where at least one of the reels is controlled to rotate at a constant speed and the acceptance of the stop operation is enabled, for example, a momentary power failure occurs for an extremely short time. The rotation control of the reel is stopped, the reel is caught or slips, the reel does not rotate normally, the reel reference position is not detected, and the step count counter has a predetermined number of steps (for example, 400). Step) is exceeded, that is, when the number of steps since the previous reel reference position was detected exceeds a predetermined number of steps, the main control unit 41 states that an abnormality has occurred in the rotation state of the reel. Judging, the acceptance of the stop operation is invalidated for all reels. Then, for the reel for which the reel reference position is not detected and it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the rotation state, the step count counter is initialized and restart control is performed, and the reel motor is excited again from the beginning of the starting pattern. By changing the state, the rotation of the reel is restarted. After that, when the reel is rotated normally, the reel reference position is detected before the step number counter reaches a predetermined number of steps after the change of the excitation state of the reel motor is started again by the starting pattern. It will be. Then, for all the rotating reels, the excitation pattern is switched to the constant speed pattern and the reel reference position is detected, so that the condition for validating the acceptance of the reel stop operation is satisfied, and the main control unit 41 activates the acceptance of the stop operation of the rotating reel when the activation condition is satisfied.

Further, as shown in FIG. 56, in a state where at least one of the reels is controlled to rotate at a constant speed and the acceptance of the stop operation is enabled, for example, a momentary power failure occurs for an extremely short time. The rotation control of the reel is stopped, the reel is caught or slips, the reel does not rotate normally, the reel reference position is not detected, and the step count counter has a predetermined number of steps (for example, 400). If the number exceeds step), the main control unit 41 determines that an abnormality has occurred in the rotation state of the reel, invalidates the acceptance of the stop operation for all reels, and the reel reference position is not detected. The step count counter is initialized and restart control is performed. Then, when the reel for which the restart control is performed does not rotate normally and the step number counter exceeds a predetermined number of steps, the step number counter is initialized again and the restart control is repeated. After that, if the reel reference position is not detected before the step count counter reaches the predetermined number of steps even though the restart control is performed up to three times in succession for the reel. All the reels that are rotating are stopped, and error control that controls the error state is started to disable the progress of the game.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment includes a backup storage area capable of holding the stored contents by being supplied with electric power by the backup power supply, and the power failure occurs based on the output of the power failure detection circuit 48. When it is detected, the control state of the main control unit 41 is stored in the backup storage area, and when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the control state at the time when the power failure is detected is restored. Can be done. Then, when at least one of the reels is controlled to rotate at a constant speed and the reception of the stop operation is enabled for the reel and a power failure is detected, the control state of each reel is set. Data including the rotation state, the excitation pattern of each reel motor, etc. are stored in the backup storage area.

Then, when the main control unit 41 recovers from the power failure by restarting the power supply to the slot machine 1, the power failure is detected based on the control state stored in the backup storage area. For reels that were in a rotating state at that time, the excitation pattern at the time when power failure is detected is set as the excitation pattern of the reel motor, while for each reel, the enabled state or invalid state of accepting the stop operation is electric. Regardless of the state before the disconnection, it returns as an invalid state. After that, various controls will be performed based on the control state reset at the time of recovery.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 57 (a), the main control unit 41 controls at least one of the reels to rotate at a constant speed, and the electric power is generated in a state where the acceptance of the stop operation is enabled. When a power failure occurs and the device recovers from the power failure, a constant speed pattern is set as the excitation pattern at the time of the power failure, but the device returns in a state in which acceptance of the stop operation is invalid. After that, by starting the rotation control of the reel, the excitation state of the corresponding reel motor is changed based on the constant speed pattern which is the excitation pattern set at the time of return. As a result, when the reel is rotated normally, the reel reference position is detected before the step number counter reaches a predetermined number of steps (for example, 400 steps) for the rotating reel, so that the reel of the reel is rotated normally. The condition for validating the acceptance of the stop operation is satisfied. Then, when the condition for enabling the acceptance of the stop operation is satisfied for all the rotating reels, the acceptance of the stop operation is enabled for all the rotating reels. By operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in this state, the stop operation is effectively accepted and the stop control of the corresponding reel is performed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 57 (b), the rotation control of the reel was started according to the constant speed pattern set at the time of recovery from the power failure, but the torque of the reel motor was insufficient and the reel did not rotate normally. In that case, the number of steps counter exceeds the predetermined number of steps without detecting the reel reference position for the reel. In such a case, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the rotational state of the reel, and for the reel, the step count counter is initialized and restart control is performed to set the excitation pattern of the reel motor to the starting pattern. Is set again to, and the reel rotation is restarted by changing the excitation state of the reel motor from the beginning of the starting pattern. After that, by performing the restart control, the reel is rotated normally, the excitation pattern is switched to the constant speed pattern for all the rotating reels, and the reel reference position is detected, so that the stop operation is performed. When the activation condition of is satisfied, the acceptance of the stop operation of all the rotating reels is enabled. On the other hand, if the reels are not rotated normally and the reels are not rotated normally even though the restart control is performed up to 3 times in succession, all the rotating reels are stopped and an error occurs. Starts error control to control the state and disables the progress of the game.

Further, the main control unit 41 detects the reel reference position for the other reel when the step number counter for any of the reels exceeds a predetermined number of steps while the plurality of reels are rotating. Regardless of whether or not the number of steps counter exceeds a predetermined number of steps, the reels are sequentially restarted from the reels. For example, the reels rotate at different timings for a plurality of reels. Even if an abnormality occurs in the state, the reels for which the abnormality in the rotation state is determined first are restarted in sequence without waiting for the reels for which the abnormality in the rotation state is determined to be restarted.

After starting the rotation of the reels, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment detects the reel reference position and the constant speed rotation for all the rotating reels, and when the condition for enabling the stop operation is satisfied. , While enabling the acceptance of stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for all rotating reels, the reel reference position is detected for at least one reel after the reel rotation is started. If the number of steps since the start of rotation specified based on the number of steps counter or the previous reel reference position is detected exceeds the predetermined number of steps exceeding one lap of the reel without being performed, the reel It is now judged that an abnormality has occurred in the rotation state of.

In such a configuration, if an abnormality occurs in the reel rotation state even once, it is determined that the reel rotation is abnormal, and if the error state is controlled to disable the progress of the game, the reel is temporarily disabled. Even in a situation where the reel can be rotated normally only after the rotation of the reel is delayed, the progress of the game is disabled, which hinders the smooth progress of the game. There is.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after the rotation of the reels is started, the reel reference position is detected for all the rotating reels and the rotation is shifted to the constant speed rotation, and the activation condition of the stop operation is set. In the established situation, when a reel rotation abnormality is determined, restart control is performed to restart the reel by changing the exciting state of the reel motor again according to the starting pattern which is the exciting pattern at the time of reel starting. Every time it is determined that the rotation is abnormal, the progress of the game is not disabled, and the game can proceed smoothly.

In addition, since the acceptance of the stop operation is invalidated during the period from the determination of the rotation abnormality to the establishment of the condition for enabling the stop operation after the restart control is performed, the reel is not rotated normally. It is possible to prevent the stop control of the above from being executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the power supply is restarted and the power supply is restored after the power supply is stopped due to the power failure in the state where the activation condition of the stop operation is satisfied, the control state before the power failure is obtained. The control to change the excitation state of the reel motor will be restarted from, but after that, if the normal rotation is specified by detecting the reel reference position, the acceptance of the stop operation will be enabled from that time. Therefore, even if a momentary power failure occurs, if the normal rotation of the rotating reel is maintained, the power supply can be restarted and the game can be advanced immediately.

In addition, when the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped while the stop operation activation condition is satisfied, the torque for rotating the reel is insufficient and the reel is not rotated, resulting in a rotation abnormality. Even if it is determined, the restart control is performed for the reel, and the progress of the game is not immediately disabled, so that the game can proceed smoothly.

Further, in such a case, the reel reference position is detected for all the rotating reels after the reel rotation abnormality is determined and the restart control is performed from the time when the power supply is restarted. In the period until the activation condition is satisfied by shifting to constant speed rotation, the acceptance of the stop operation is invalidated, so after the power supply is restarted, the reel is in a situation where it is unknown whether the reel is in normal rotation. It is possible to prevent the stop control of the above from being executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the reel reference position is detected and the rotation of the reel shifts to the constant speed rotation, it is determined that the condition for enabling the stop operation is satisfied, and the reel has a constant speed. It is possible to prevent the stop control of the rotating reel from being executed by the stop operation even though the rotation has not been reached.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the restart control for changing the excitation state of the reel motor according to the excitation pattern at the time of starting, the restart control is performed when the reel reference position is not detected and the activation condition of the stop operation is not satisfied. Is repeatedly executed, and if the activation condition of the stop operation is not satisfied even if the restart control is performed a predetermined number of times (three times in this embodiment), the error state is controlled and the game is disabled. , If the reel does not rotate normally even by the restart control, that is, if the problem cannot be solved by the restart control, the game can be disabled.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a rotation abnormality is determined in a plurality of reels at different timings while the stop operation activation condition is satisfied, the restart control is sequentially performed from the reel in which the rotation abnormality is determined. Even if rotation abnormalities are determined at different timings on a plurality of reels, each reel can be set to normal rotation at the earliest possible stage.

In this embodiment, when the main control unit 41 determines a rotation abnormality in a plurality of reels at different timings while the stop operation activation condition is satisfied, the reels for which the rotation abnormality is determined are sequentially re-started. The configuration is such that start control is performed. For example, when a rotation abnormality of any of the reels is determined, the operation is repeated until a period (a period for a predetermined number of steps) in which the rotation abnormality of the remaining reels can be determined elapses. A configuration that delays the start control, that is, when a rotation abnormality is determined at different timings on a plurality of reels while the stop operation activation condition is satisfied, the restart control of the reel for which the rotation abnormality is determined earliest is performed. It may be configured to delay until the restart control of the reel for which the rotation abnormality is determined to be the latest, and with such a configuration, even if the rotation abnormality is determined at different timings in a plurality of reels, the rotation abnormality will occur. Since a plurality of determined reels can be restarted at the same timing, the appearance at the time of restart is improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of steps since the start of rotation or the previous detection of the reel reference position exceeds a predetermined number of steps (400 steps) exceeding one reel lap without detecting the reel reference position. , The configuration is such that the rotation abnormality of the reel is specified, but the predetermined number of steps is a value larger than the number of steps required for the reel to make one revolution, that is, the reel reference position is detected when the reel is rotating normally. The value may be larger than the number of steps required to be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, control is performed to restart the reel when the number of steps since the start of rotation or the previous detection of the reel reference position exceeds a predetermined number without detecting the reel reference position. If the activation condition of the stop operation is not satisfied even after performing a predetermined number of times (three times in this embodiment), it is determined that the reel rotation is abnormal and the game is disabled, but the activation condition of the stop operation is satisfied. If the reel is not restarted at least once, it is possible to prevent the game from being frequently disabled.

Further, in the present embodiment, the reel reference position is detected after the start of rotation, and the acceptance of the stop operation is enabled by shifting to the constant speed rotation, but at least the reel reference position is detected. Any configuration may be used as long as the acceptance of the stop operation is enabled by.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the rotation has shifted to the constant speed depending on whether the number of steps from the start of the reel rotation is equal to or greater than the number of steps required to shift to the constant speed rotation. However, by determining whether or not a constant speed is satisfied based on the number of steps or time until the reel reference position is detected and the next reel reference position is detected, it is determined whether or not the rotation has shifted to a constant speed rotation. It may be configured to judge.

Next, the control related to the navigation notification performed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment using the game auxiliary display 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61.

As shown in FIG. 58, the game auxiliary display 12 includes two displays 12L and 12R that can turn on / off the first to eighth segments, respectively, and each segment can be turned on in red. It is a vessel. Each segment of the game auxiliary display 12 is driven by the LED drive circuit 47 based on the lighting mode data stored in the predetermined output buffer provided on the game control board 40, thereby driving the predetermined lighting mode. It is controlled to be on or off in. As the game auxiliary display 12, a display, a liquid crystal display, or the like capable of lighting each segment in any one color such as white, pink, yellow, orange, red, green, and blue, or a plurality of colors is provided. You may use it.

The main control unit 41 can display the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 and perform the navigation notification by setting the navigation notification display data as the lighting mode data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12. .. Further, by setting the payout number display data as the lighting mode data in the output buffer, it is possible to notify the payout number of medals to be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 when a prize is generated. By setting error display data as lighting mode data in the buffer, it is possible to perform error notification for displaying the error code indicating the content of the error on the game auxiliary display 12.

When the internal lottery is performed at the start of the game, the main control unit 41 refers to the result of the internal lottery set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and one of the special combinations (BB1 to 5) is won. In addition, it is determined whether or not the implementation condition of the navigation notification of the predetermined special role (in this embodiment, it is established when a predetermined number (for example, 5 games) is performed after the special role is won) is satisfied. , When the execution condition of the special role navigation notification is satisfied, a flag indicating that the navigation notification is performed when the special role navigation notification implementation condition is satisfied is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the above-mentioned Press order command setting process. The flag is referred to in the push order command setting process, and is after the execution condition of the special role navigation notification is satisfied, and the timing at which the winning special role can be won, that is, inside When the result of the lottery is out of order, the navigation numbers (10 to 14) suggesting the symbols constituting the winning special combination are set as the transmission navigation numbers.

Then, after the push order command setting process is completed, the lighting mode data setting process of the game auxiliary display 12 is performed. In the setting process of the lighting mode data of the game auxiliary display 12, if the special combination is not won or the implementation condition is not satisfied, it is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c by the push order command transmission process described above. The transmission navigation numbers ("0" to "9") that can identify the reel stop order by the navigation notification are referred to, and the navigation notification display data corresponding to the transmission navigation number is set in the output buffer. On the other hand, when the special combination is elected and the implementation conditions are satisfied, it is set by the push order command transmission process, and a predetermined symbol suggested by the navigation notification (in this embodiment, "blue 7"). Refer to the transmission navigation numbers ("10" to "14") that can identify the "red 7" symbol), select the navigation notification display data corresponding to the transmission navigation number, and set it in the output buffer. ..

As shown in FIG. 59 (a), when the main control unit 41 sets the navigation notification display data, the navigation number is the standard pressing order number “0”, and when the navigation notification is not performed, the navigation notification display is displayed. By setting the initial value of the output buffer as data, that is, by initializing the output buffer of the game assistance display 12, and setting all the first to eighth segments of each display 12L and 12R to the off state, the game assistance is provided. The display 12 is controlled to be hidden. In addition, the navigation number is any of the navigation numbers "1" to "9" other than the standard pressing order, and when the navigation notification is performed, each segment of the game auxiliary display 12 is lit so as to display the number of the navigation number. By setting the navigation notification display data in the output buffer to turn on the 8th segment of the display 12R and turn off the other segments, the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. To control. In addition, when the special role is elected and the implementation conditions are satisfied, if the navigation notification display data including the navigation number suggesting the design corresponding to the special role is selected, the number of the navigation number is selected. The navigation notification display data is set in the output buffer so that each segment of the game auxiliary display 12 is turned on, the eighth segment of the display 12R is turned on, and the other segments are turned off. As a result, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to display the navigation number.

As a result, the segment that lights up in each stop order (left middle right, left and right middle, middle left and right, middle right left, right left middle, right middle left, left first stop, middle first stop, right first stop) By different combinations of, the navigation number is displayed so that it can be identified from the combination of the lit segments, and as a navigation notification, the stop order that is advantageous for the player according to the internal lottery result is provided as a game assistance. It is possible to make a notification using the display 12. In addition, if the special role has been won and the implementation conditions have been met, the navigation number ("10" to "10" suggests a pattern (blue 7, red 7) according to the winning special role. By displaying "14") in a recognizable manner, a predetermined symbol is suggested as the timing of the stop operation that is advantageous for the player, and as a navigation notification, the stop operation that can win a special role is performed. The timing can be notified by using the game auxiliary display 12. Further, the main control unit 41 controls the 8th segment main of the display 12R to be lit together with the navigation number when performing the navigation notification, while the 8th segment main of the display 12R is turned off when the navigation notification is not performed. By controlling to, it is possible to recognize whether or not the navigation notification is being executed by the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12.

In the navigation notification of the present embodiment, the combination of segments corresponding to the navigation number is lit so that the display mode of the game assistance display 12 is the navigation number. However, the game assistance display 12 is used as the navigation notification. The display mode of the above may be a display mode that directly indicates the stop order, is not a display mode that directly recalls the stop order, and immediately identifies the stop order from the combination of lit segments. It may be difficult to identify the display mode without a correspondence table or the like.

Specifically, as shown as a modification 2 in FIG. 60, for example, the reel number of the left reel 2L is "1", the reel number of the middle reel 2C is "2", and the reel number of the right reel 2R is "3". As a result, the reel number of the first stop is displayed on one of the two game auxiliary indicators 12 L, and the reel number of the second stop is displayed on the other indicator 12R (game auxiliary indicator). By displaying, for example, "21" on 12, it is shown that the stop order is middle, left, and right), and the stop order can be directly suggested as a navigation notification. Although not shown, the design of blue 7 is "b7", the design of red 7 is "r7", and these "b7" and "r7" are displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, so that blue 7 and red 7 can be displayed. The design may be suggested.

Further, as shown as a modification 3 in FIG. 60, a display is used as a combination of segments in which it is difficult to immediately identify the stop order in advance in the stop order (for example, as a combination of segments suggesting the stop order of left, middle, and right). It is difficult to immediately identify the stop order by allocating the 2nd segment of 12L, the 4th and 6th segment combinations of the display 12R, etc.) and turning on the corresponding segment, but the correspondence table etc. is used. The stop order can be suggested by the display mode that can be identified by the above.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines whether or not any combination has been won when the game progresses and all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, and payout is made. If any of the accompanying wins (small wins) has been won, the number of medals to be paid out due to the occurrence of the winning is set in the output buffer as the payout number display data, and is paid out to the game auxiliary display 12. Display the number of medals to be played.

As shown in FIG. 59 (b), when the payout number display data is set in the output buffer, each segment of the game auxiliary display 12 is turned on so as to display the payout number of medals, and the eighth By setting the payout number display data that turns off the other segments including the segment in the output buffer, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to display the payout number of medals. For example, when eight medals are paid out, the first to seventh segments of the display 12R are turned on, while the first to eighth segments of the display 12L and the eighth segment of the display 12R are turned off. As a result, when displaying the number of medals to be paid out on the game auxiliary display 12, the eighth segment of the display 12R is controlled to be in the off state, so that the lighting mode and the number of medals to be paid out in the navigation notification are as described above. The lighting mode is different from the lighting mode in the notification of, so that it is not misunderstood whether the navigation notification is performed on the game auxiliary display 12 or the number of medals to be paid out is notified. There is.

When an error is detected during the progress of the game, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets a predetermined error code (E1 to E8, see FIG. 61) in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c according to the type of the error. When a predetermined error display condition to be set and described later is satisfied (in the present embodiment, when an error is detected during reel rotation control, all reels are stopped, and reel rotation control is in progress. When an error is detected at a time other than the above, the error display data including the error code set in the RAM 41c is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12.

As shown in FIG. 61, when setting the error display data, the main control unit 41 turns on each segment of the game auxiliary display 12 so as to display the letters and numbers of the error code, and the other segments. By setting the error display data that turns off the light in the output buffer, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to display an error code that can identify the type of the detected error. Then, when a predetermined error release condition (see FIG. 61) is satisfied, the output buffer is initialized and the display of the error code on the game auxiliary display 12 is terminated. In the error display data, by lighting the first, second, fourth, fifth, and seventh segments of the display 12L, the letter "E" is displayed and the number corresponding to the error code number in the segment of the display 12R is displayed. While turning on the segment, the other segments of the indicators 12L and 12R are turned off. As a result, when displaying the error code on the game auxiliary display 12, the lighting mode is controlled so that the alphabetic character "E", which is not displayed in the navigation notification or the payout number display, is displayed on the display 12L. Therefore, the lighting mode when notifying the error code is different from the lighting mode in the navigation notification and the lighting mode in the notification of the number of payout medals, and is the error code notified by the game auxiliary display 12? , Navi notification, and notification of the number of medals to be paid out are not misunderstood.

Next, the timing at which the main control unit 41 switches the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12 according to the progress of the game or the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 65.

As shown in FIG. 62A, the main control unit 41 initializes the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 when a bet number of 1 or more is set to start the game, and displays the game auxiliary display. All segments of the device 12 are turned off and controlled to be hidden. Then, when the start operation is performed with the specified number of bets set, the rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R related to the game is started. At this time, the navigation number "0" in the standard pressing order is set with reference to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and when the navigation notification is not performed, all the segments of the game auxiliary display 12 are turned off. maintain. Then, when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are all stopped after the operation of the third stop is performed, if any of the small wins has been won, the number of medals to be paid out by the winning. Is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 as the payout number display data, and the number of medals to be paid out is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. Then, when a bet number of 1 or more is set to start the next game, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is initialized again, and the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be hidden. As a result, in the game in which the navigation notification is not performed, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be hidden from the time when the number of bets of 1 or more is set to the time when the payout of medals is started by winning. , From the time when all reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped and the payout of medals is started, the number of bets of 1 or more is set, or the waiting condition (no operation for a certain period of time, settlement operation is performed). That) is established, and the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to display the number of medals as the payout number display over the period until the transition to the standby state is established. When the third stop operation is performed and all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, if the re-game combination has won a prize or if neither prize has occurred, the game assistance By not setting the payout number display data in the output buffer of the display 12, the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is kept hidden, and one or more bets are set in order to start one game. The lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be hidden from time to the time when the bet number is set to start the next game, that is, for the entire period in one game.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 62B, when the main control unit 41 performs the navigation notification, the reel 2L related to the game is performed after the start operation is performed with the specified number of bets set. When starting the rotation control of 2, 2C and 2R, one of the navigation numbers "1" to "9" is set as the transmission navigation number by the above-mentioned push order command transmission process with reference to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. If, or if the conditions for implementing the special role navigation notification are satisfied and any of the navigation numbers "10" to "13" is set as the transmission navigation number, the corresponding navigation number is used. The navigation notification display data to be displayed is set in the output buffer of the game assistance display 12, and the navigation number is displayed on the game assistance display 12. After that, the stop switch of the third stop is operated, and when the stop switch is released, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is initialized to control the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12 to be hidden. Then, it waits for a predetermined waiting period. Then, after the predetermined waiting period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not any of the small wins has been won, and if the small win has been won, the number of medals to be paid out by the winning is determined. It is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 as the payout number display data, and the number of medals to be paid out is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. As a result, in the game in which the navigation notification is performed, the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed for a period from the time when the rotation of the reel is started with the start of the game to the time when the stop switch of the third stop operation is released. It is controlled so that the navigation number is continuously displayed as a navigation notification. Then, when the output buffer is initialized, the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is once controlled to be hidden, and then all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped and the payout of medals is started. From the above, the number of medals is controlled to be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 as the payout number display over the period from when one or more bets are set.

Further, as described above (see FIG. 55), the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment controls at least one of the reels to rotate at a constant speed, and in a state where the acceptance of the stop operation is enabled. If it is determined that the rotating reel has an abnormality in the rotation state, the acceptance of the stop operation is invalidated for all reels, and the rotation is restarted for the reel that is determined to have an abnormality. Perform restart control. After that, when all the rotating reels are rotated normally, the acceptance of the stop operation is re-enabled. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 62B, when the navigation notification is performed, the navigation notification is sent to the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 when the rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R related to the game is started. The display data is set, and then the output buffer is initialized when the stop switch of the third stop is released. As a result, when performing navigation notification, acceptance of the stop operation is effective in the period from the start of the rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R related to the game to the time when the stop switch of the third stop is released. Regardless of whether it is disabled or disabled, the display of the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 is continued.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62B, the main control unit 41 transmits the above-mentioned push order command to the sub control unit 91 when the game start operation is performed. On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 specifies the navigation number based on the push order command, and when it is specified that the navigation notification is performed based on the navigation number, it is specified based on the navigation number. A navigation effect that suggests an advantageous operation mode is executed. In the navigation effect, for example, a number indicating the stop order based on the navigation number is displayed at a position corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R on the display area of the liquid crystal display 51, or the timing of the stop operation based on the navigation number is displayed. By displaying an image suggesting (for example, an image of “red 7” or the like) in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51, an advantageous operation mode is suggested.

In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 is configured to start the navigation effect when the push order command is received when performing the navigation effect, but the timing at which the navigation effect is started is the main. It may be before the stop operation of the stop switch is enabled on the control unit 41 side. For example, a reel acceleration information command indicating that the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are started to rotate with the start of the game is received. Even if the timing is within the period from the reception of the push order command to the time before the acceleration completion command is received, which indicates that the control to accelerate the reel to the predetermined constant speed rotation is completed with the start of the game. good. In particular, when the stop operation is enabled, the navigation notification is started on the main control unit 41 side and the navigation effect is started on the sub control unit 91 side, so that the navigation notification is performed. Even in the state, during the period from the start operation to the activation of the stop operation, the navigation notification and the navigation effect do not suggest the winning of the push order role, so the inside is over the period. It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the winning role in the lottery. Further, in particular, by configuring the navigation notification on the main control unit 41 side and the navigation effect on the sub control unit 91 side to be started after the reel rotation related to the game is started, for example. , The main control unit 41 controls the game to a freeze state that delays the progress of the game in the period from the start operation to the start of the reel rotation control related to the game, and the reel effect using the reel in the freeze state. In the period from the start operation to the start of the reel rotation control related to the game, that is, the period controlled to the frozen state, the push order is performed by the navigation notification and the navigation effect. Since the winning of the winning combination is not suggested, it is possible to maintain the expectation for the winning combination in the internal lottery during the period.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment ends the navigation notification when the stop switch of the third stop operation is released after starting the navigation notification, and issues a game end command to the sub control unit 91. It is a configuration to transmit, and the sub control unit 91 can end the navigation effect when the navigation notification on the main control unit 41 side is ended based on the reception of the game end command. , The navigation effect may be configured to be performed at least when the result of the game changes depending on the stop order. For example, the stop switch is operated in a stop order other than the stop order suggested by the navigation notification and the navigation effect. If it is decided that the push order combination will not win, or if it is confirmed that only one combination will win by performing the first stop operation or the second stop operation, etc., the main control unit 41 side The navigation effect may be terminated before the navigation notification is terminated. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the navigation effect from being continued even after the result of the game is confirmed.

The RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can retain the stored contents by being supplied with power by the backup power supply even when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped. When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and the power failure is detected based on the output of the power failure detection circuit 48, the control state of the main control unit 41 set in the RAM 41c is changed. Performs power interruption processing so that the power can be restored when returning from, and then when power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, control is started in the control state when the power interruption is detected. Can be done.

As shown in FIG. 63, when the main control unit 41 rotates and controls at least one or more reels as the game progresses, and the game auxiliary display 12 is notified of the navigation, the power is cut off. When it is detected, the control related to the power failure is performed, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is initialized, the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be hidden, and the rotation is controlled. When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, the control state including the excitation pattern of the reel motor of the reel, the number of steps of excitation control, the navigation number, etc. can be restored with the contents when the power failure is detected. Perform power failure processing so that it can be done.

After that, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, when the control state in the main control unit 41 is returned to the control state before the power failure, it is stored in the RAM 41c when the power failure is detected. The control state before the power failure is restored based on the control state, but the state of accepting the stop operation by all the stop switches among the control states is changed to invalid and set. As a result, the main control unit 41 returns in a state in which acceptance of the stop operation by all the stop switches is invalidated.

Further, when the main control unit 41 returns the control state to the state before the power failure, the navigation number, the excitation pattern of the reel motor of each reel and the number of steps are stored in the RAM 41c when the power failure is detected. Restore the contents as they were. Then, when returning, the control state on the main control unit 41 side including the return command indicating that the main control unit 41 has returned to the control state before the power failure and the push order command capable of specifying the navigation number is displayed. Various identifiable commands are transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. After that, the same control as at the start of the game is executed, and the control for advancing the game is performed based on the control state set in the RAM 41c, based on the navigation number set in the RAM 41c. The navigation notification display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and after controlling to restart the display of the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12, the excitation pattern of the reel motor set in the RAM 41c, that is, Based on the constant speed pattern, the reel motor of the reel whose rotation was controlled before the power failure is excited from the number of steps of the excitation pattern when the power failure is detected, and the corresponding reel is rotated at the predetermined constant speed again. It is controlled to rotate, and when the reel reaches a predetermined constant speed rotation, control is performed to enable acceptance of a stop operation by the stop switch of the corresponding reel.

At this time, in the control of rotating the corresponding reel again at a predetermined constant speed rotation, the rotation control of the corresponding reel motor is performed based on the constant speed pattern as the excitation pattern set at the time when the power failure is detected. In such a case, the corresponding reel is normally rotated depending on the state (rotated state or stopped state) of the corresponding reel as described above (see FIGS. 57 (a) and 57 (b)). In some cases, it may not rotate normally, and if it does not rotate normally, restart control is performed to rotate the corresponding reel normally.

Then, when the reel is rotated normally or is not rotated normally and the reel is rotated normally by the restart control, and the reel reaches a predetermined constant speed rotation, the corresponding reel is used. Enables the acceptance of stop operations by the stop switch of. After that, it waits until the stop switch for which acceptance is enabled is operated, and when the stop switch is operated, it controls to stop the corresponding reel.

On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 receives the return command after recovering from the power failure, and then receives the push order command, so that the sub control unit 91 is based on the navigation number specified by the push order command. When it can be specified that the navigation notification is performed on the 41 side, the navigation effect that can specify the advantageous operation mode that is advantageous for the player based on the navigation number is restarted. After that, the production is controlled based on various commands received according to the progress of the game. As a result, the main control unit 41 recovers from the power failure, transmits a push order command, etc., then restarts the reel rotation control, and the corresponding reel rotates at a constant speed, so that the stop operation is performed by the stop switch. On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 restarts the navigation effect when the push order command is received after returning from the power failure, so that the sub control unit 91 is the main control unit 41. When the stop operation is enabled on the side, it is possible to assume that the navigation effect has already been performed.

As described above, when the power failure is detected, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment initializes the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and controls the game auxiliary display 12 to be hidden. During the period from the time when the above is detected until the power supply to the slot machine 1 is completely stopped, the navigation number by the navigation notification is not displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. Further, when a power failure is detected, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is initialized, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, and when the main control unit 41 returns, a navigation notification is displayed on the output buffer. Since the data is controlled to be reset, the navigation number by the navigation notification is not displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 during the period from the time when the power supply is restarted to the time when the main control unit 41 is restored. It has become like.

Further, the main control unit 41 resets the navigation notification display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed and the main control unit 41 returns, and then the main control unit 41 resets the navigation notification display data. When a power failure is detected, the reel that was in rotation control is controlled to rotate again at a predetermined constant speed rotation, and when the corresponding reel reaches a constant speed rotation, a stop operation by the stop switch of the reel is performed. When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, the game auxiliary display 12 starts to display the navigation number by the navigation notification, and then stops by the stop switch. The acceptance of operations is enabled, and the acceptance of stop operations is enabled while the navigation number is already displayed.

Further, the main control unit 41 detects a power failure while controlling the rotation of the reel, and then, when recovering from the power failure, executes the same process as at the start of the game and is set at the time of recovery. The progress of the game is controlled based on the control state.

As a conventional slot machine, a game control means for controlling a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect are provided, and notification of an operation mode advantageous to the player is performed by a notification means controlled by the game control means side. There was a document (for example, Japanese Patent No. 5770922) in which such a document was disclosed. In the slot machine described in this document, when a power failure occurs while the game control means is notifying an advantageous operation mode, the advantageous operation mode is notified even after the power failure is restored. However, if the stop operation is enabled after the power failure is restored and before the notification of the advantageous operation mode is restored, the stop operation may be performed in an operation mode different from the notified advantageous operation mode. is there. The present embodiment pays attention to such a problem, and provides a slot machine capable of preventing a player from operating in an operation mode different from the notified operation mode. The purpose.

Specifically, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control unit 41 that controls the game and a sub control unit 91 that controls the effect, and the main control unit 41 is provided by the main control unit 41 side. The game auxiliary display 12 to be controlled is configured to be capable of performing navigation notification to notify an operation mode that is advantageous to the player. In such a configuration, if a power failure occurs while the game auxiliary display 12 is performing the navigation notification, the navigation notification will be performed even after the power failure is restored. If the stop operation is enabled before the navigation notification is restored, the stop operation may be performed in an operation mode different from the advantageous operation mode to be notified.

On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has a configuration capable of performing navigation notification for notifying an operation mode advantageous to the player on the game auxiliary display 12 controlled by the main control unit 41 side. Yes, after starting the rotation control of the reel with the start of the game, the stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is accepted in the state where the predetermined activation condition is satisfied, while the predetermined activation condition is satisfied. In addition, when the power supply is restarted after the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped while the navigation notification is being performed, during the period from the restart of the power supply to the establishment of the predetermined activation condition. , The stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is not accepted, the navigation notification is restarted by the game auxiliary display 12, and the stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is accepted after the predetermined activation condition is satisfied. Therefore, when the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped in the state where the predetermined activation condition is satisfied, the stop switch 8L, during the period from the restart of the power supply until the activation condition is satisfied, Since the stop operation by the 8C and 8R is not accepted, it is possible to prevent the reels 2L, 2C and 2R from being stopped in a situation where it is unknown whether the normal rotation is performed after the power supply is restarted. In addition, when the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped while the predetermined activation condition is satisfied and the navigation notification is being performed, the timing is earlier than the predetermined activation condition is satisfied. Since the navigation notification is restarted at, the stop switches 8L, 8C are mistakenly used in an operation mode other than the advantageous operation mode without the player knowing that the advantageous operation mode is notified by the navigation notification. , 8R can be prevented from being operated.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment displays the number of medals to be paid out in connection with the winning of a small winning combination and the error that has occurred on the game auxiliary display 12 controlled by the main control unit 41. It is possible to display an error code indicating the content, and the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed with a navigation number capable of identifying an advantageous operation mode that is advantageous to the player as a display content different from the predetermined content. Therefore, when displaying the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 directly controlled by the main control unit 41 side, a new display is made by displaying the navigation number using a display means for displaying a predetermined content. The predetermined content and the navigation number can be displayed without providing any means.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment restarts the power supply after the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped in the state where the predetermined activation condition is satisfied and the navigation notification is performed. Then, when the main control unit 41 returns to the state before the power failure, the rotation of the reel that was controlling the rotation when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped after restarting the navigation notification is performed. The control is restarted, and after the power supply is restarted, the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 in the same display mode as when the power supply is stopped, regardless of the stopped state of the reel. Since the advantageous operation mode is notified, it is possible to simplify the control related to the resumption of the control for notifying the advantageous operation mode by the navigation notification.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 sets a plurality of different operation timings (“blue 7”, “red 7”, “white 7”, and “BAR” as a winning line as an advantageous operation mode that is advantageous for the player. An operation mode for operating at one of the operation timings (timing at which the LN is stopped) and an operation mode for operating at any one of a plurality of operation orders (for example, left middle right, left and right middle operation order, etc.) , The configuration is such that the navigation notification is used, but the operation mode and the like may be notified by a combination of these.

When the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment starts the rotation control of the reel with the start of the game, the predetermined activation condition is satisfied after starting the navigation notification for notifying the advantageous operation mode for the player. Since the stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is accepted in this state, the navigation notification is started at a timing earlier than the predetermined activation condition is satisfied after the start of the game, which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to prevent the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R from being accidentally operated in an operation mode other than the advantageous operation mode without knowing that the operation mode has been notified.

In the present embodiment, when the main control unit 41 starts the rotation control of the reel with the start of the game, the main control unit 41 starts the navigation notification for notifying the advantageous operation mode for the player, and then enables the predetermined activation. The configuration is such that the stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is accepted when the conditions are satisfied, but the navigation notification may be started after the start of the game until the predetermined activation condition is satisfied. For example, the navigation notification may be started when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game, or a predetermined effect may be obtained from the time when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game. The navigation notification may be started at any timing within the period until the conversion condition is satisfied. Even in such a configuration, after the start of the game, the navigation notification is started at a timing earlier than the predetermined activation condition is satisfied, so that the player does not know that the advantageous operation mode is notified. It is possible to prevent the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R from being accidentally operated in an operation mode other than the advantageous operation mode.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment invalidates the acceptance of the operations of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R when an abnormality is detected in the rotation state of the reel after the predetermined activation condition is satisfied, and determines again. When the activation condition of is satisfied, the acceptance of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is enabled, and after the navigation notification is started, even when an abnormality is detected in the reel rotation state, the navigation is performed. Since the notification of the advantageous operation mode is continued by the notification, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are erroneously operated in the operation mode other than the advantageous operation mode without knowing that the advantageous operation mode is notified to the player. It can be prevented from being lost.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can transmit a push order command capable of specifying an advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player to the sub control unit 91, whereas the sub control unit 91 has a push order. It is possible to execute a navigation effect that can specify an advantageous operation mode based on a command, and when navigation notification is performed on the main control unit 41 side, a liquid crystal display 51 controlled by the sub control unit 91 side is used. Since it is possible to notify the advantageous operation mode, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect when the advantageous operation mode is notified.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is in a state where the activation condition is satisfied and the navigation notification is being performed, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, and then the power supply is restarted to perform the main control. When the unit 41 returns to the state before the power failure, the navigation notification is restarted, the push order command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, and then the rotation control of the reel is started to enable a predetermined value. When the condition is satisfied, the acceptance of the operations of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is activated. Therefore, the push order command that can specify the advantageous operation mode at an earlier timing than the activation condition is satisfied is the sub-control unit 91. When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, the sub-control unit 91 starts the navigation effect before the stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R becomes effective. This makes it possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in an operation mode other than the advantageous operation mode without knowing that the advantageous operation mode has been notified.

In the present embodiment, since the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, the power failure is detected when the control state of the main control unit 41 is returned to the control state before the power failure. It is configured to return to the control state before the power failure based on the control state stored in the RAM 41c at times. In particular, for the reel whose rotation control was performed before the power failure, the reel motor at the time of the power failure It is designed to recover with the excitation pattern and the number of steps set, and when recovering from the power failure, the excitation state of the reel motor is changed from the excitation pattern at the time of the power failure, that is, the constant speed pattern and the number of steps. After controlling to restart the rotation of the reel, if the reel does not rotate normally, the excitation pattern of the corresponding reel is reset to the starting pattern and the restart control is performed to restart the rotation. However, when the main control unit 41 is in a state where one of the reels is rotationally controlled before the power failure and the power supply is stopped and the power supply is restarted, the control state before the power failure is restored. May be configured to set the excitation pattern of the reel motor as the starting pattern for the corresponding reel.

Specifically, the main control unit 41 selects the excitation pattern of the reel motor in the order of the start pattern, the constant speed pattern, and the stop pattern when controlling the normal game. FIG. 64 As shown in (a), the starting pattern was selected on condition that the effective start switch 7 was operated, and the reel in the stopped state was started and accelerated to a predetermined constant speed rotation. After that, a constant speed pattern is selected and the reel is rotated at a predetermined constant speed. Then, on standby in this state, a stop pattern is selected according to the number of sliding frames for the reel corresponding to the stop switch operated on the condition that the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the stop switch is operated. The reel is stopped at the stop position according to the operation of the stop switch within the maximum stop delay time (190 ms in this embodiment). After that, in the configuration in which the main control unit 41 does not select the excitation pattern until the next game is started and keeps the reel in the stopped state, as shown in FIG. 64 (b), the start pattern before the power failure When the reel is stopped in the middle of starting due to power failure, the starting pattern selected at the time of power failure is used when recovering from power failure. By changing the excitation state from the first step of the starting pattern, the reel can be started without temporarily causing the reel to rotate normally.

Further, as shown in FIG. 64 (c), the rotation of the reel is controlled by a constant speed pattern before the power failure, and when the reel is stopped in the middle of starting due to the power failure, the reel is stopped from the power failure. When returning, the exciting pattern is changed from the constant speed pattern selected at the time of power failure to the starting pattern, and the excited state is changed from the first step of the starting pattern, so that the reel is not rotated normally once. The reel can be started without the above.

Further, as shown in FIG. 64 (d), the rotation of the reel is controlled to be stopped by a stop pattern before the power failure, and when the reel is stopped during the control to stop due to the power failure, When recovering from a power failure, the stop pattern selected at the time of the power failure is used, and the excitation state is changed from the number of steps at the time of the power failure in the stop pattern, so that the stop pattern executed at the time of the power failure can be changed. By continuously executing, the stop pattern that was executed at the time of power failure is executed to the end within a specific time (190 ms in this embodiment) excluding the time during power failure after starting before power failure. Can be done.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can detect the occurrence of various errors related to the game such as an error related to medal payout, an error related to medal insertion, and an error related to reel rotation in the main process and the timer interrupt process (main). When a predetermined error display condition is satisfied after detecting various errors as described above, an error code indicating the content of the error is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. The predetermined error display condition is when various errors are detected when the reels are not rotation-controlled due to the game, and various errors are detected when the reels are rotation-controlled. The case is when all reels are stopped.

As shown in FIG. 65, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the navigation notification display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 at the start of the game as described above, performs the navigation notification, and then performs the navigation notification. 3 When a predetermined waiting period elapses from the time when the stop switch in which the stop operation is performed is released, the number of medals to be paid out according to the winning situation is used as the payout number display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12. It is configured to display the number of medals to be paid out. In such a configuration, from the time when the navigation notification display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and the navigation notification is started, the stop switch on which the third stop operation is performed is released, and a predetermined standby is further performed. If various errors related to the game, especially errors related to inserting medals and errors related to reel rotation, are detected during the time limit until the period elapses, control related to the game is continued until the above time limit elapses. Control to set the error code indicating the content of the detected error in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 as error display data and display the error code on the game auxiliary display 12 when the time limit elapses. After starting, control to the error state.

After that, when the release condition according to the type of the detected abnormality (for example, the operation of the reset switch 23 in the predetermined procedure) is satisfied, the control of the game is restarted from the time before the control of the error state is started. .. By resuming the control of the game, it is determined whether or not the control after the third stop operation is performed and a predetermined periodic period has elapsed, that is, whether or not any of the small wins has been won, and the small When a winning combination has occurred, the number of medals paid out by winning is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 as the payout number display data, and the number of medals paid out is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. Let me.

As described above, when various errors are detected in the state where the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the navigation notification display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and performs the navigation notification, By setting error display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 when the navigation notification is completed and a predetermined waiting period has elapsed, the error notification is performed in the period from the start to the end of the navigation notification. Is designed to limit what is done.

A conventional slot machine includes a main control unit that controls the progress of a game and a sub-control unit that controls the production. A game auxiliary display capable of displaying an error code indicating the content thereof is provided, and a command capable of identifying the internal lottery result can be transmitted to the sub control unit. According to the internal lottery result specified based on the command, an operation mode advantageous to the player is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like provided in the sub control unit to notify the player.

In such a configuration, an advantageous operation mode cannot be specified due to a defect in the sub control unit or the liquid crystal display, which may cause a disadvantage to the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 side In addition to controlling the display of the advantageous operation mode in the above, the game auxiliary display 12 for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player is used to display the advantageous operation mode. Assuming that the number of medals to be paid out and the operation mode advantageous for the player are displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 provided in the main control unit 41, the number of medals to be paid out to the player on one display and the player can use it. Since both of the advantageous operation modes are displayed, there is a risk that the displayed contents may be misunderstood when the display at that time is switched.

On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can display the number of medals to be paid out to the player as predetermined contents and an error code indicating the contents when an error related to the game occurs. A display 12 is provided, and the game auxiliary display 12 can display a navigation number that can identify an advantageous operation mode (stop order and stop timing) of the stop switch that is advantageous for the player as a display content different from the predetermined content. It is possible, and after displaying the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12, when displaying the number of medals to be paid out as a predetermined content, the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 is temporarily initialized to the hidden state. Since the predetermined content is displayed, when the navigation number is displayed on the display directly controlled by the main control unit 41 side, the game auxiliary display that displays the number of medals to be paid out as the predetermined content without providing a new display means. By displaying the navigation number using 12, both the predetermined content and the navigation number can be displayed, and when the predetermined content is displayed after the navigation number is displayed on the game assistance display 12, the game assistance is displayed. Since the display content of the display 12 is once initialized to be hidden and then the predetermined content is displayed, it is misunderstood whether the display content displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 is a navigation number or a predetermined content. It can be prevented from being stored.

When the main control unit 41 displays the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 and then displays the number of medals to be paid out as a predetermined content, the main control unit 41 temporarily initializes the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 and hides it. The configuration may be such that the predetermined content is displayed after the state of the above, and the period during which the game auxiliary display 12 is hidden may be at least a period during which the player or the like can recognize that the light has been turned off. In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 provides a predetermined waiting period for waiting after initializing the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and after displaying the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12, the predetermined content When displaying the number of medals to be paid out, the game auxiliary display 12 is surely controlled to be hidden.

Further, when the main control unit 41 displays the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 and then displays the number of medals to be paid out as a predetermined content, the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed during the predetermined waiting period. The mode may be a period during which the player or the like can recognize at least that the lights have been turned off while the navigation notification is switched to the notification of the number of payouts. For example, the timer interrupt process (main) is waited for at least once. By doing so, the timer interrupt process (main) is performed and the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is switched. Therefore, while the navigation notification is switched to the notification of the number of payouts, the game auxiliary display 12 is temporarily turned on. It can be controlled to the off state. Further, for example, when the stop switch of the third stop is operated and the stop switch is released, the timer is operated and the timer measures the passage of a predetermined standby time. By waiting for the waiting period, the game auxiliary display 12 may be temporarily controlled to be turned off while the navigation notification is switched to the notification of the number of payouts.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment outputs a buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 when the stop switch of the third stop is operated when the navigation notification is performed by the game auxiliary display 12. By setting the payout number display data in the output buffer after initializing once, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be temporarily turned off while the navigation notification is switched to the payout number notification. However, while switching from the navigation notification to the notification of the number of payouts, by displaying a display not related to the game (for example, "-" or "_"), the display contents of the navigation notification and the notification of the number of payouts are displayed. It is possible to prevent the content from being mistaken for the content.

Further, when the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment displays the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 and then displays the number of medals to be paid out as a predetermined content, the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 is temporarily initialized. By setting the payout number display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 to display the number of medals to be paid out, the display contents of the game auxiliary display 12 are temporarily initialized. When setting the payout number display data, by setting the data to display the total number of medals to be paid out with the winning of the small winning combination, it is completed after the medal payout is started. The total number of medals to be paid out is displayed over the period until the medals are paid out. However, when the main control unit 41 displays the number of medals to be paid out on the game auxiliary display 12, the initial data of the number of medals to be paid out is displayed. After setting the data to display 0 medals as, every time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals, the payout number display data is updated to the total number of paid medals, and the payout is made. The total number of completed medals may be sequentially displayed, and finally, the total number of medals paid out in connection with the winning of the small winning combination may be controlled to be displayed. Even in such a configuration, as in the configuration of the present embodiment, when the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and then the number of medals to be paid out is displayed as a predetermined content, the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed. By initializing the contents once and setting the payout number display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, whether the display contents displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 are navigation numbers or predetermined contents. Can be prevented from being misidentified.

Further, when displaying the number of medals to be paid out on the game auxiliary display 12, after setting the initial data of the number of medals to be paid out, the payout number display data is updated every time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals. Then, in the configuration of controlling to update the display of the game auxiliary display 12, 0 sheets are shown as the initial data of the payout number display data and data for hiding the display on the game auxiliary display 12 is set. Then, every time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals, the payout number display data may be controlled to be updated so as to be added one by one. With such a configuration, the period from the start of payout of medals due to the winning of a small role until the payout of the first medal is detected, that is, the number of medals paid out is 0. For a certain period, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be hidden, and then the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed from the time when the payout of the first medal is detected, and the total number of medals for which the payout is completed is displayed. When the numbers are sequentially displayed, that is, when the number of medals to be paid out is displayed as a predetermined content after displaying the navigation number on the game assistance display 12, the navigation number is displayed as the display content of the game assistance display 12. After the display, the number of medals to be paid out will be displayed once the display is hidden, and the same effect as the configuration of the present embodiment will be obtained, and the display content displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 will be displayed. It is possible to prevent the navigation number and the predetermined content from being mistakenly recognized.

Further, when displaying the number of medals to be paid out on the game auxiliary display 12, after setting the initial data of the number of medals to be paid out, the payout number display data is updated every time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals. Then, in the configuration of controlling to update the display of the game auxiliary display 12, when the navigation notification is completed and the predetermined waiting period elapses, 0 is shown as the initial data of the payout number display data. Data for hiding the display on the game auxiliary display 12 is set, and then, every time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals, the payout number display data is controlled to be updated so as to be added by 1. It may be configured. With such a configuration, the period from the end of the navigation notification to the elapse of the predetermined waiting time and the initial data of the payout number display data are set, and the payout sensor 34c is used to obtain the first medal. The display of the game assistance display 12 can be hidden for a period from the detection of the payout to the update of the payout number display data, and the same effect as the configuration of the present embodiment is obtained, and the game assistance is achieved. It is possible to prevent the display content displayed on the display 12 from being misidentified as whether it is a navigation number or a predetermined content.

Further, when displaying the number of medals to be paid out on the game auxiliary display 12, after setting the initial data of the number of medals to be paid out, the payout number display data is updated every time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals. Then, in the configuration of controlling to update the display of the game auxiliary display 12, the display contents of the game auxiliary display 12 are displayed by initializing the navigation notification display data when the third stop operation is performed. Is temporarily hidden, and when a predetermined waiting period elapses after the navigation notification display data is initialized, 0 is shown as the initial data of the payout number display data and the display on the game auxiliary display 12 is hidden. The data may be set to be, and then controlled so as to update the payout number display data by 1 each time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals. With such a configuration, the period in which the navigation notification display data is initialized after the navigation notification is completed, and the period from the initialization of the navigation notification display data to the elapse of a predetermined waiting time. From the time when the initial data of the payout number display data is set to the period from the time when the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of the first medal and the payout number display data is updated, the game auxiliary display 12 The display can be hidden, and the same effect as that of the configuration of the present embodiment is obtained, and it is misidentified whether the display content displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 is a navigation number or a predetermined content. It is possible to prevent it from being done. It should be noted that these periods, that is, the period in which the navigation notification display data is initialized after the navigation notification is completed, the period from the initialization of the navigation notification display data to the elapse of the predetermined waiting time, and the withdrawal. By applying only one of the periods from the time when the initial data of the number of medals display data is set until the payout of the first medal is detected by the payout sensor 34c and the number of medals to be paid out is updated. , After displaying the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12, it may be temporarily hidden and the number of medals paid out may be displayed, or any two of these periods may be displayed. It may be a configuration to be applied.

Further, when displaying the number of medals to be paid out on the game auxiliary display 12, after setting the initial data of the number of medals to be paid out, the payout number display data is updated every time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals. Then, in the configuration of controlling to update the display of the game auxiliary display 12, "1" to "9" can be displayed as the display mode of the number of payouts on the game auxiliary display 12, and the navigation A part of the display mode (navigation numbers "1" to "13" and ".") In the notification is included in the display mode of the number of payouts, but the display mode in the navigation notification and the display mode of the number of payouts However, when the displays on the two indicators 12L and 12R are integrated, the display mode is different. For example, in the navigation notification, the eighth segment of the indicator 12R and the indicators 12L and 12R corresponding to the navigation number are used. In the payout number display, only the 1st to 7th segments of the indicators 12L and 12R corresponding to the payout number are turned on, so that the display contents of the navigation notification are displayed. It is possible to prevent the display content of the notification of the number of payouts from being misunderstood.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment starts the control of rotating the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R at a predetermined constant speed after the start of the game, until the stop switch of the third stop operation is released. Since the game auxiliary display 12 continuously displays the navigation number that can identify the advantageous operation mode (stop order and stop timing) of the stop switch that is advantageous for the player over the period of the game, the period from the start to the end of the game. It is possible to continuously make the player recognize an advantageous operation mode that is advantageous to the player.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 starts the control of rotating the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R at a predetermined constant speed at the start of the game, and starts the third stop operation at the end of the game. The navigation number is continuously displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 for a period until the stop switch of is released. However, as the game starts, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed as the game progresses. The navigation number is continued to the game auxiliary display 12 for a period from one start timing until the operation of 1 becomes effective to one end timing after the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated as the end of the game. When the start switch 7 is operated with a predetermined number of bets set, for example, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are set at a predetermined constant speed at the start of the game. When starting the rotation control, the stop switch of the third stop operation is pressed, for example, from the start timing of any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R when the operation is enabled, as the end of the game. When, when all reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, when the payout of medals is started or ended due to winning, or when the bet number setting operation is performed for the next game. The navigation number may be continuously displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 for a period until the end timing of the game.

Among such configurations, in particular, one start timing is controlled to rotate the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R at a predetermined constant speed when the start switch 7 is operated with a specified number of bets set. By setting any of the above, the display of the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 can be started before the operations of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R become effective. Further, one start timing is set to either when the control for rotating the reels 2L, 2C, 2R at a predetermined constant speed is started, or when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective. For example, in the period from the operation of the start switch 7 to the start of the control for rotating the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R at a predetermined constant speed, a reel effect of rotating the reel in a mode different from that of a normal game is performed. Even if the configuration is such that the game is performed or the game is controlled to a freeze state in which the progress of the game is delayed for a predetermined time, the display of the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 can be started after the reel effect, the freeze state, or the like ends. It is possible to limit the display of the navigation number during the period when the reel effect is performed. Further, by setting one start timing to be when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective, an event that occurs in the period until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective, for example, Regardless of whether or not the above-mentioned reel effect or reel acceleration due to recovery from power failure occurs, the display of the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 is started at a predetermined timing at the start of the game. be able to.

Further, in particular, by setting the end timing of one to the time when the stop switch of the third stop operation is pressed, all reels 2L, 2C, from the time when the stop switch of the third stop operation is pressed, thereafter. Since the display content on the game auxiliary display 12 can be hidden during the period from when 2R is stopped until the winning judgment is made, when displaying the number of medals to be paid out in connection with winning, the navigation system is used. It is possible to prevent the number and the number of payouts from being mistaken for each other.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is information on the result of the game as a predetermined content, and is used on the game auxiliary display 12 used to display the number of medals to be paid out to the player due to the occurrence of a prize at the end of the game. , The navigation number that can identify the advantageous operation mode (stop order and stop timing) of the stop switch that is advantageous for the player is displayed as the display content different from the predetermined content, and the stop switch that is advantageous for the player. While the advantageous operation mode is displayed during the game, the number of payouts as a predetermined content is displayed after the end of the game, so that the display period of the navigation number and the display period of the number of payouts overlap on the game auxiliary display 12. You don't have to.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment causes the game auxiliary display 12 to display a navigation number capable of specifying a stop mode that is advantageous for the player and the number of medals to be paid out in connection with the winning of a small winning combination. Since the display mode of the navigation number displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and the display mode of the number of medals to be paid out do not include a common mode, it is determined whether the navigation number is displayed or not. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding whether the number of payouts is displayed as the content.

In addition, the display mode of the navigation number to be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and the display mode of the number of medals to be paid out are when the display on the two displays 12L and 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 is integrated. The configuration does not include a common mode. For example, the display mode of the navigation number may include a part of the display mode of the number of payouts and vice versa.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 pays out a part of the display modes (navigation numbers "1" to "13" and ".") Of the game auxiliary display 12 in the navigation notification. (For example, "8" when paying out 8 medals) is included in the display mode for notifying the number of medals to be paid out (for example, "8" when paying out 8 medals). It may be a configuration that does not include. With such a configuration, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is not controlled to the same mode by the navigation notification and the notification of the number of medals, and the display mode by the navigation notification and the notification of the number of medals to be paid out are notified. It is possible to prevent the display mode from being mistaken for.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 lights the eighth segment of the display 12L in the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 in the navigation notification, while in the display mode of notifying the number of medals to be paid out. By turning off the 8th segment of the display 12, the display mode of one of the two displays 12L and 12R is used to notify the display mode of the navigation notification or the number of medals to be paid out. Although it is a configuration that can identify whether it is a display mode, when the display modes of at least two indicators 12L and 12R are viewed as a unit, the display mode by the navigation notification and the display mode by the notification of the number of medals to be paid out can be identified. It may be a possible configuration. With such a configuration, for example, when the navigation number "8" is notified in the navigation notification, "8" is displayed on the display 12L and "-" is displayed on the display 12R to display "-8" as an integrated display. On the other hand, in the notification of the number of medals to be paid out, "" (no display) is displayed on the display 12L and "8" is displayed on the display 12R so that "8" is displayed as an integrated display. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display mode by the navigation notification and the display mode by the notification of the number of medals to be paid out from being mistakenly recognized.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is in a state where the game auxiliary display 12 is displaying the navigation number as an advantageous operation mode that is advantageous for the player, and the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and the power is cut off. Is detected, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is initialized to hide the display contents of the game auxiliary display 12, so that the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and the main It is possible to prevent an unintended display from being performed on the game auxiliary display 12 at the time of power interruption when the operation of the control unit 41 or the like becomes unstable.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 initializes the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 when a power failure is detected while the game auxiliary display 12 is displaying the navigation number. The display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be hidden. However, the game auxiliary display 12 may be controlled to be hidden when a power failure is detected, for example, in an output buffer. The game auxiliary display 12 is hidden by clearing the output port that outputs a control signal to the LED drive circuit 47 that controls the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 based on the set data. By limiting the output of the drive signal output from the LED drive circuit 47 that controls the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 to the game auxiliary display 12, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be hidden. It may be a configuration or the like. Even in such a configuration, as in the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent an unintended display from being performed on the game auxiliary display 12 at the time of power interruption.

In the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment, the reel is controlled to a predetermined constant speed rotation as the game progresses, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effective, and the game is played on the game auxiliary display 12. After the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped while the navigation number indicating the advantageous operation mode that is advantageous to the person is displayed, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted to the state before the power failure. When returning, after redisplaying the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12, when the reel whose rotation was controlled before the power failure becomes constant speed rotation, the operation reception of the stop switch of the corresponding reel is accepted. By controlling to enable it, when recovering from a power failure, the display of the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 is restarted before the operation reception of the stop switch becomes effective, so the navigation number is erroneously displayed. It is possible to prevent the stop switch from being operated in an operation mode other than the advantageous operation mode suggested by.

When the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment returns the control state to the state before the power failure, the main control unit 41 returns the state of the stop switch operation reception and the reel excitation pattern to the state before the power failure. When the control unit 41 returns, the operation reception of the stop switch is enabled and the reel rotation control is started with the excitation pattern before the power failure. The reel stopped due to the power failure is pressed before the power failure. Rotation control is started by the excitation pattern, that is, the constant speed pattern for rotating at a constant speed rotation, but in order to start the rotation of the stopped reel, the torque is insufficient and the rotation is not started. After starting the rotation control of the reel, a predetermined period (a period longer than the time required for the reel sensor to detect the reference position when the reel is rotated) elapses without the reference position being detected by the reel sensor. When this happens, it is determined that the reel rotation error is detected, the operation reception of the stop switch is invalidated, the excitation pattern is changed from the stopped state to the starting pattern for accelerating, and the reel rotation control is started again. Can be accelerated to a predetermined constant speed rotation. Then, the operation reception of the stop switch, which is invalidated due to the determination of the reel rotation error, can be re-enabled when the reel accelerates to a predetermined constant speed rotation. In such a configuration, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted and the main control unit 41 is restored, the navigation notification display data is reset in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, so that the slot machine When the power supply to 1 is resumed, after the game auxiliary display 12 starts displaying the navigation number by the navigation notification, the reception of the stop operation by the stop switch can be enabled, and the player can enable the game. When the stop operation can be performed by the stop switch, the navigation number can be reliably displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 to perform the navigation notification. Further, in such a configuration, when the main control unit 41 returns, the stop operation by the stop switch is once enabled and then disabled, and then the rotation control of the reel is performed again. When the reel rotates at a constant speed, the stop operation by the stop switch is re-enabled, but when the main control unit 41 returns, the navigation notification display data is displayed in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12. By resetting, the navigation notification by the game auxiliary display 12 can be continuously displayed even during the period from when the main control unit 41 is restored until the stop operation by the top switch is enabled again. When the player can perform the stop operation by the stop switch, the navigation number can be surely displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 to perform the navigation notification.

In the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment, the start switch 7 is operated with the specified number of bets set, and after the game is started, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are all operated. The predetermined contents are in the state before the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R of the above are stopped and the game is ended, and the navigation number indicating the advantageous operation mode is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 for the player. When an error that causes the error code to be displayed is detected, when the game ends, the error code is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 so that the error is detected during the game. Therefore, since it is restricted from displaying the error code as a predetermined content on the game auxiliary display 12 during the period until the game ends, the display content displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 is a navigation number indicating an advantageous operation mode. It is possible to prevent the misidentification of whether it is an error code or an error code as a predetermined content.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 displays an error code as a predetermined content other than the navigation number while displaying the navigation number indicating the advantageous operation mode for the player on the game auxiliary display 12. If the condition to be used is satisfied, the game auxiliary display 12 does not display the predetermined content until the end of the game, but the game auxiliary display 12 displays the navigation number other than the navigation number. It suffices if the display content is not displayed, and even if the display content other than the error code is applied as the predetermined content, the display content displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 is the navigation number or the predetermined content. It is possible to prevent the misidentification of whether or not.

Next, the control related to the setting of the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 66.

As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the payout number display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and as the first display content, the medal given by winning a small winning combination. It is possible to display the number of payouts, and by setting the navigation notification display data in the output buffer, it is possible to display the navigation number suggesting a stop operation mode that is advantageous for the player as the second display content. Further, by setting error display data in the output buffer, it is possible to display an error code indicating the content as a special display content when an error occurs.

As shown in FIG. 66A, the main control unit 41 has the payout number display data set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and during the period in which the payout number is displayed as the first display content. When an error is detected in, then when the error display condition is satisfied as a predetermined display switching condition for switching the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 to the special display content, the error state is controlled and the output buffer is controlled. A save process for saving the data to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is performed, and the payout number display data set in the output buffer is saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Then, by initializing the output buffer once, the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be hidden, and then the error display data is set in the output buffer as the data for displaying the special display content. While controlling the game auxiliary display 12 to display an error code as a special display content, it controls the error state and stands by.

Then, when the reset switch 23 is operated according to a predetermined operation procedure to release the error state and the return condition is satisfied, the reset process for returning the data saved in the RAM 41c to the output buffer is performed. By returning the payout number display data for displaying the payout number as the first display content from the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to the output buffer, the game auxiliary display 12 displays the payout number as the first display content. ..

In this way, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the error display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 when the error display condition is satisfied after detecting the error, so that the error is detected. During the period from when the error display condition is satisfied, the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 is restricted from being changed, and when the period elapses, the error code is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. You can do it.

Further, when the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment detects an error when the game is started and at least one reel is rotationally controlled, all the reels are stopped and all the reels are stopped. By stopping the reel, the error is notified when the game ends, but if an error is detected when the game is started and the rotation of the reel is controlled, an error is detected. In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 may detect the error when the game auxiliary display 12 displays the navigation number as the navigation notification. , The game auxiliary display 12 may display an error code indicating the content of the error.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 displays the total number of medals to be paid out as the payout number display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 (8 in the present embodiment). By setting the data to display, if an error is detected during the period when the total number of medals to be paid out to the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed as the first display content, then the error display condition is changed. When the configuration is established, the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 is switched so as to display an error code indicating the content of the error detected as the special display content (see FIG. 61), but the main control unit 41 has a configuration. After setting the initial data of the payout number display data when displaying the payout number of medals on the game auxiliary display 12, the payout number display data is updated every time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals. , The display of the game auxiliary display 12 may be controlled to be updated. In such a configuration, every time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals, the payout number display data is updated and the data is small. While controlling the payout of a predetermined number of medals with the winning of a winning combination, for example, a payout error (E1) is detected due to a shortage of medals in the hopper unit 34, and the error display condition is satisfied. In this case, the payout number display data for displaying the number of medals last detected by the payout sensor 34c (for example, the fourth piece, etc.) is saved in the save area. After that, by initializing the output buffer once, the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be hidden, the error display data indicating the payout error is set in the output buffer, and the error code is displayed. Then, when the return condition is satisfied, as the payout number display data, the payout number display data for displaying the number of medals last detected by the payout sensor 34c (for example, the fourth piece, etc.) is displayed on the game auxiliary display. By returning to the output buffer of 12, the display of the number of payouts on the game auxiliary display 12 can be returned to the display content when an error is detected.

As shown in FIG. 66 (b), the main control unit 41 has the navigation notification display data set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and during the period when the navigation number is displayed as the second display content. When an error is detected in, after that, when the error display condition is satisfied, the error state is controlled, and the same save process as when switching the above-mentioned first display content to the special display content is performed. , The navigation notification display data set in the output buffer can be saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

Then, error display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and while displaying an error code as a special display content, it waits in an error state, and when the recovery condition is satisfied, it is saved in the above-mentioned RAM 41c. By performing the same return processing as when returning the data of the first display content to the output buffer, the navigation notification display data of the RAM 41c is returned to the output buffer, and the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed before the error is detected. A similar navigation number can be displayed.

As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment regardless of whether the payout number display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 or the navigation notification display data is set. By performing the common evacuation process, the payout number display data and the navigation notification display data can be evacuated to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

Further, when the main control unit 41 returns the payout number display data saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, the navigation notification display data saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is also saved. Is also returned to the output buffer, by performing a common return process, it is possible to return the payout number display data and the navigation notification display data saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to the output buffer. ing.

In the configuration in which both the number of medals to be paid out to the player and the advantageous operation mode for the player are displayed on one display as in the present embodiment, a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out is displayed. There is a possibility that the processing and the display processing for displaying the advantageous operation mode interfere with each other, and an unintended display is performed on the game auxiliary display.

On the other hand, the game auxiliary display 12 included in the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can display the display contents based on the predetermined data by setting the predetermined data in the output buffer. In this configuration, the main control unit 41 sets the payout number display data as predetermined data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and pays out the medal given by winning a small winning combination as the first display content. It is possible to display the number of sheets, and by setting the navigation notification display data in the output buffer, it is possible to display the navigation number suggesting a stop operation mode that is advantageous for the player as the second display content. Further, by setting error display data in the output buffer, it is possible to display an error code indicating the content as a special display content when an error occurs, and the game auxiliary display 12 has a configuration in which the error code is displayed. When the error display condition is satisfied as the condition for displaying the special display content while the number of medals to be paid out is displayed as the display content of 1, the save process is executed and the number of payout number set in the output buffer is displayed. After saving the data to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, by setting the error display data for displaying the error code as a special display content in the output buffer, the error code is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and the error state is changed. When the return condition is satisfied by being released, the return process is executed and the payout number display data saved in the RAM 41c is returned to the output buffer, so that the first display is displayed again on the game auxiliary display 12. It is possible to display the number of medals to be paid out as the content, and an error occurs while the game auxiliary display 12 is displaying a navigation number suggesting a stop operation mode advantageous to the player as the second display content. When the display condition is satisfied, the above-mentioned save process is executed to save the navigation notification display data set in the output buffer to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and then display an error code as a special display content. By setting the error display data of the above in the output buffer, the error code is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and when the return condition is satisfied by canceling the error state, the above return process is executed. By returning the navigation notification display data saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to the output buffer, the game auxiliary display 12 can display the navigation number again as the second display content. , Data for making the first display content set in the output buffer or the second display content when the condition for switching to the display of the special display content is satisfied while the first display content or the second display content is being displayed. The data for saving the table contents, setting the special display contents in the output buffer to display the special display contents, and displaying the saved first display contents when the return condition is satisfied, or the first Since the data for displaying the display content of 2 is returned to the output buffer and the first display content or the second display content is displayed again, different types of information can be displayed correctly.

Further, by executing the common save process, the payout number display data set in the output buffer is saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the navigation notification display data set in the output buffer is saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Since it is possible to save the display contents, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the save process for saving these display contents.

Further, the main control unit 41 executes a common save process when the switching condition for displaying the special display content is satisfied even when the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 is hidden. The hidden data set in the output buffer may be saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. With such a configuration, regardless of the display content displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, the hidden data may be saved. Since the processing when the switching condition for displaying the special display content is satisfied can be standardized, the capacity of the processing performed when the switching condition for displaying the special display content is satisfied can be reduced.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment restores the payout number display data saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to the output buffer by executing the common return process, and is saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Since it is possible to return the navigation notification display data to the output buffer, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the return processing for returning these display contents.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment stops the power supply to the slot machine 1 in a state where the game auxiliary display 12 is displaying the navigation number indicating the advantageous operation mode that is advantageous for the player. When a power failure is detected, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is initialized to hide the display contents of the game auxiliary display 12, but the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed. Regardless of the displayed content, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 may be initialized when a power failure is detected. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an unintended display from being performed on the game auxiliary display 12 at the time of power failure regardless of the display state on the game auxiliary display 12.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can display the predetermined display contents on the game auxiliary display 12 by setting the predetermined data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12. When switching the contents, the data set in the output buffer is saved in the RAM 41c and new data is set, so that the display contents of the game auxiliary display 12 can be switched to the display contents based on the new data. However, when the first output buffer and the second output buffer are provided so as to be switchable and the first output buffer is set as the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, the first output buffer is set. While the display content based on the data set in the output buffer of is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, when the second output buffer is set as the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, the second output buffer is displayed. As a configuration in which the display contents based on the data set in the output buffer are displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, the game auxiliary display 12 is configured by switching the output buffer between the first output buffer and the second output buffer. The display contents of the above may be switched.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67, in a configuration in which a first output buffer and a second output buffer are provided as output buffers of the game auxiliary display 12, the main control unit 41 displays the game auxiliary display. Occurs when an error is detected when the number of payouts is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 by setting the payout number display data in the first output buffer set as the output buffer of the device 12. While the error display data including the error code indicating the content of the error is set in the second output buffer, the payout number display data set in the first output buffer is retained as it is. After that, when the error display condition is satisfied, the game auxiliary display 12 is changed to the game auxiliary display 12 by controlling the error state and switching the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 from the first output buffer to the second output buffer. While controlling to display the error code based on the error display data set in the output buffer of 2, control the error state and wait.

Then, when the reset switch 23 is operated in a predetermined operation procedure to release the error state and the return condition is satisfied, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is changed from the second output buffer to the first. By switching to the output buffer, the game auxiliary display 12 displays the number of payouts based on the payout number display data held in the first output buffer. Further, when the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is switched when the return condition is satisfied, the second output buffer is initialized based on the fact that the error state is cleared.

Further, although not shown, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is set as the first output buffer, and the navigation notification display data is set in the first output buffer so that the game auxiliary display 12 displays the navigation number. When an error is detected and an error code indicating the content of the error is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, the error display data is displayed in the second output buffer when the error is detected. After that, when the error display condition is satisfied, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is switched to the second output buffer, so that the game auxiliary display 12 can display the error code, and then. By switching the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 to the first output buffer when the return condition is satisfied, the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 can be returned to the navigation number.

With such a configuration, as in the configuration of the present embodiment, the first display content is the number of medals to be paid out by winning a small winning combination, and the second display content is a stop operation that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to display the navigation number suggesting the mode and the error code indicating the content when an error occurs as a special display content on the common game auxiliary display 12.

Further, when the main control unit 41 detects an error, the main control unit 41 sets error display data including an error code indicating the content of the error that has occurred in the second output buffer, the error state is released, and the recovery condition is satisfied. When this is done, the second output buffer is initialized and the error display data is erased. Therefore, the second output is performed for the period from the time when the error is detected until the recovery condition is satisfied, that is, the period during which the error occurs. Since the error display data is held in the buffer, it has become possible to perform a predetermined determination process, for example, an error occurrence status determination, using the data set in the second output buffer. There is.

Further, the main control unit 41 sets the error display data in the second output buffer when an error is detected, and at the same time, holds the data set in the first output buffer as it is. Using the data set in the output buffer, it is possible to perform a predetermined determination process, for example, determining the control status such as whether the navigation notification is being performed or the data is being paid out.

Further, the main control unit 41 switches the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 to the second output buffer when the error display condition is satisfied after setting the error display data in the second output buffer, so that the output is output. After switching the buffer to the second output buffer, the game auxiliary display 12 can display the display contents based on the data set in the second output buffer without delay.

Further, even in such a configuration, when displaying the number of medals to be paid out on the game auxiliary display 12, after setting the initial data of the number of medals to be paid out, every time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals. , The payout number display data may be updated to control the display of the game auxiliary display 12 to be updated. Even in such a configuration, an error occurs while the payout number display data is being updated. Then, when the error display condition is satisfied, the payout number display data in the middle of updating is output as the first output during the period in which the error code is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 based on the second output buffer. Since it is held in the buffer, when the return condition is satisfied, the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed based on the first output buffer, so that the display of the number of payouts on the game auxiliary display 12 is errored. Can be restored to the display content when is detected.

In this way, the main control unit 41 sets the game auxiliary display 12 and the data for displaying the predetermined display contents on the game auxiliary display 12, as the first output buffer and the second output buffer. In a configuration including an output buffer, the main control unit 41 displays a navigation number indicating an advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player as a normal display content and an error code indicating the content of an error occurring as a special display content on the game auxiliary display. It is a configuration that can be displayed on 12, and by setting the first output buffer as the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and setting the navigation notification display data in the first output buffer, the normal display contents are displayed. It is possible to display the navigation number as, and when the error display condition is satisfied as the switching condition to display the special display content while the normal display content is being displayed, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed. By switching from the first output buffer to the second output buffer, the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed with the special display content based on the data set in the second output buffer, and the error state is cleared. By switching the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 from the second output buffer to the first output buffer when the return condition is satisfied, the game auxiliary display 12 is again navigated as the first display content. Even with the configuration in which the numbers are displayed, different types of information can be correctly displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 as in the configuration of the present embodiment.

Further, the main control unit 41 sets the game auxiliary display 12 and the data for displaying the predetermined display contents on the game auxiliary display 12, as the first output buffer and the second output buffer. In the configuration including, the main control unit 41 displays the error code as a special display content before the error display condition is satisfied as the switching condition, and after the error is detected, the content of the error that has occurred. By configuring the error display data including the error code indicating the above to be set, the error display data for displaying the error code as a special display content is output to the second output without being aware of the timing when the error display condition is satisfied. The timing to set in the buffer can be designed relatively freely.

Further, the main control unit 41 sets the game auxiliary display 12 and the data for displaying the predetermined display contents on the game auxiliary display 12, as the first output buffer and the second output buffer. In the configuration including, in a predetermined determination process (for example, error determination), the data set in the first output buffer or the second output buffer can be referred to, so that the first output buffer can be referred to. Since the predetermined determination process can be performed using the data set in the output buffer or the second output buffer (for example, in the case of error determination, the data set in the second output buffer), a predetermined determination is made. It is not necessary to have the data used for processing separately from the data of the display contents.

Further, the main control unit 41 sets the game auxiliary display 12 and the data for displaying the predetermined display contents on the game auxiliary display 12, as the first output buffer and the second output buffer. In the configuration provided with, as normal display contents, the number of medals to be paid out to the player in connection with winning (first display contents), and the display period does not overlap with the first display contents, which is an advantageous operation for the player. The main control unit 41 sets the first display content and the second display content in the first output buffer, including the navigation number (second display content) indicating the mode, so that the game auxiliary display 12 can be used. By configuring the configuration to display the number of medals paid out and the navigation number, different display contents that do not overlap in the display period can be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 by setting them in the first output buffer. There is no need to provide an extra output buffer.

Further, the main control unit 41 sets the game auxiliary display 12 and the data for displaying the predetermined display contents on the game auxiliary display 12, as the first output buffer and the second output buffer. When a power failure is detected, the first output buffer and the second output buffer are set regardless of which display is being displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. By configuring the configuration to initialize the existing data, it is possible to prevent an unintended display from being displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 at the time of power failure.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the game control board 40 can be connected to the test device 1300 via the first interface board (IF1) 1100 and the second interface board (IF2) 1200, and is slotted. A test signal generated in relation to the result of the game in the machine 1 is output from the game control board 40 to the test device 1300, and a test signal is input from the test device 1300 to the game control board 40. By connecting the game control board 40 and the test device 1300, it is possible to automatically perform a simulation test.

The game control board 40 is connected to the IF1 board 1105 and is connected to the first information output circuit 40a for outputting the first test signal, the input circuit 40d for inputting the test signal, and the IF2 board 1205 for the second test. A second information output circuit 40b that outputs a signal is mounted.

The first test signal shows the control state and the result of the game, and is an input request lamp signal, a startable lamp signal, a BB signal, an in-game signal, a replay game signal, and a 1st to 3rd reel stoptable lamps. Signal, 1st to 3rd reel index signal, payout request signal, payout count signal, stop signal, 7-segment display a to g signal for setting value display, internal winning flags 1 to 8 signals, signal delay signal, 1st reel Includes a motor excitation signal, a second reel motor excitation signal, and a third reel motor excitation signal. These first test signals are output under the control of the main control unit 41.

The insertion request lamp signal is a drive signal of the insertion request LED 17, that is, a signal indicating whether or not the insertion request LED 17 is lit, and it is possible to specify whether or not a medal insertion is requested.

The start enable lamp signal is a drive signal of the start enable LED 18, that is, a signal indicating whether or not the start enable LED 18 is lit, and it is possible to specify whether or not the game start operation is required. ..

The BB signal, the game signal, and the replay game signal are signals indicating that the game state is in BB, medium, or replay game, respectively, and the game state at that time can be specified.

The 1st to 3rd reel stop possible lamp signals are the drive signals of the left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, that is, signals indicating whether or not the left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R are lit. Therefore, it is possible to specify whether or not the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel can be stopped.

The first to third reel index signals are detection signals of the reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R, and can identify the passage of the reference positions of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel.

The payout request signal is a drive signal of the hopper motor 34b, that is, a signal indicating whether or not the hopper motor 34b is driven, and it is possible to specify that the medal payout operation is being performed.

The payout count signal is a signal output every time the payout of medals accompanying a winning is detected, and is a signal for counting the payout of medals on the test apparatus 1300 side.

The stop signal is a signal indicating that the stop state is controlled. The 7-segment display a to g signals for setting value display are driving signals of LEDs constituting each segment of the setting value display 24, and the setting value displayed on the setting value display 24 can be specified. ..

The internal winning flags 1 to 8 signals are signals indicating the winning status of the winning combination. Further, the signal delaying signal is a signal indicating that the signal is delayed due to the execution of the effect during the game.

The first to third reel motor excitation signals are the drive signals of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, that is, the reel motors that drive the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel, and the driving status of each reel can be specified. ..

The test signal includes an on switch signal, a reel start switch signal, a 1st to 3rd reel stop switch signal, a payout switch signal, a stop release switch signal, a setting key switch signal, and a setting switch signal, and is controlled by the test apparatus 1300. It is input to the board 40. These test signals are signals that function in the same manner as the detection signals of various switches and sensors included in the slot machine 1, are detected by the switch detection circuit 44 included in the game control board 40, and are detected by the main control unit 41. The detection of the switch or sensor corresponding to the above is determined.

The throw-in switch signal is a signal corresponding to the throw-in medal sensor 31, and the reel start switch signal is a signal corresponding to the start switch 7. The first to third reel stop switch signals are signals corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, respectively. The payout switch signal is a signal corresponding to the payout sensor 34c. The stop release switch signal is a signal corresponding to the reset switch 23. The setting key switch signal is a signal corresponding to the setting key switch 37. The setting switch signal is a signal corresponding to the reset / setting switch 38.

The first information output circuit 40a is a circuit for outputting the first test signal to the IF1 substrate 1105, and the first test signal output from the first information output circuit 40a is via the IF1 substrate 1105. Is output to the test device 1300.

The input circuit 40d is a circuit for inputting a test signal output from the test apparatus 1300 via the IF1 board 1105, and the test signal input to the input circuit 40d is detected by the switch detection circuit 44. ..

The IF1 board 1105 includes an input terminal for inputting a first test signal output from the first information output circuit 40a, and an output terminal for outputting the input first test signal to the test apparatus 1300. ing. The input terminal and the output terminal are connected via a photocoupler, and the information contained in the first test signal output from the first information output circuit 40a is electrically isolated from the test apparatus 1300. It is designed to be transmitted to the side. Further, the IF1 board 1105 includes an input terminal for inputting a test signal output from the test apparatus 1300 and an output terminal for outputting the input test signal to the input circuit 40d. The input terminal and the output terminal are connected via a photocoupler so that the information contained in the test signal output from the test apparatus 1300 is transmitted to the input circuit 40d in an electrically isolated state. It has become. The configuration is such that the first test signal and the test signal are transmitted while the input terminal and the output terminal are electrically insulated. For example, the input terminal and the output via a photo interrupter or an isolator are used. It may be configured to connect to a terminal.

The second test signal indicates an operation mode notified by the navigation notification, and includes a game start signal and a navigation notification signal. The second test signal is output under the control of the main control unit 41.

The game start signal is a signal indicating the start of the game. Further, as for the navigation signal, in the control related to the navigation notification performed by using the game assistance display 12 described above, the navigation notification display data for displaying the navigation number on the game assistance display 12 is the output buffer of the game assistance display 12. It is a drive signal for lighting the 8th segment of the display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 based on the setting of, and the navigation notification is executed, and the type of the winning push order and the game When the navigation number indicating the stop operation mode that is advantageous to the person is displayed on the indicators 12L and 12R, it is turned on, the navigation notification is not executed, and the navigation number is not displayed on the indicators 12L and 12R. It is a signal indicating whether or not the navigation notification is being executed by sometimes turning off.

The display signal is based on the fact that the navigation notification display data, the payout number display data, and the error display data are set in the output buffer of the game assistance display 12 in the control related to the navigation notification performed by using the game assistance display 12 described above. It is a drive signal for lighting the first to seventh segments of the indicators 12L and 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 in a lighting mode for displaying any of the navigation number, the number of payouts, and the error code, and is related to the navigation notification. It includes a plurality of information such as information, information on the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize, and information on an error code indicating the content when an error occurs.

The navigation notification signal is a signal generated by extracting only the information related to the navigation notification from the display signal by the conversion circuit 40c mounted on the second information output circuit, and the navigation number is displayed during the navigation notification. It is a drive signal for lighting the first to seventh segments of the indicators 12L and 12R in the lighting mode to be displayed, and is a signal capable of specifying the navigation number indicating the stop operation mode notified by the navigation notification.

The second information output circuit 40b is a circuit for outputting a second test signal to the IF2 board 1205, and the second test signal output from the second information output circuit 40b is via the IF2 board 1205. Is output to the test device 1300.

Further, in the second information output circuit 40b, the navigation signal and the display signal input to the game auxiliary display 12 provided on the game control board 40 are branched and input on the game control board 40. At the same time, a conversion circuit 40c is provided which converts the display signal into a navigation notification signal by enabling or disabling the display signal based on the navigation signal, and outputs the display signal. The display signal of the display 12 can be output to the IF2 board 1205 as a navigation notification signal.

The IF2 board 1205 is a test device based on an input terminal to which a second test signal output from the second information output circuit 40b is input and the input second test signal (game start signal, navigation notification signal). It includes an IF2 control unit 1203 that converts it into a second test signal that can be recognized on the 1300 side, and an output terminal that outputs a second test signal generated by the IF2 control unit 1203 to the test device 1300. ..

The IF2 control unit 1203 is composed of a CPU, RAM, ROM, a reset circuit for resetting the CPU, and the like, and the navigation notification signal output from the second information output circuit 40b is designated as a stop execution position signal and a stop reel. It is converted into a signal and stop strobe signal and output. The stop execution position signal, stop reel designation signal, and stop strobe signal output from the IF2 control unit 1203 are output from the output terminal via the photocoupler, and are output from the IF2 control unit 1203 side and the test device 1300 side. The signal is transmitted in a state of being electrically isolated from and. It is sufficient that the stop execution position signal, the stop reel designation signal, and the stop strobe signal are transmitted while the IF2 control unit 1203 and the output terminal are electrically insulated. For example, a photo interrupter or an isolator may be used. The IF2 control unit 1203 and the output terminal may be connected to each other via the device.

The stop execution position signal is a signal indicating the most recommended stop operation position for the reel indicated by the stop reel designation signal described later according to the current gaming state and the effect mode, and is a corresponding reel included in the most recommended stop operation position. It is possible to specify the number of steps (0 to 336) of the reel motor.

The stop reel designation signal is a signal that specifies whether the reel that recommends the stop operation at the stop operation position indicated by the stop execution position signal is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, and stops. It is possible to specify the reel to which the stop operation at the stop operation position indicated by the execution position signal is applied.

The stop strobe signal is a signal requesting acquisition of a stop execution position signal and a stop reel designation signal.

Further, the game control board 40 and the IF1 board 1105 are connected via a power supply line, and power used by a device such as a photocoupler mounted on the IF1 board 1105 is supplied from the game control board 40 via the power supply line. On the other hand, the game control board 40 and the IF2 board 1205 are not connected by a power supply line, and the IF1 board 1105 and the IF2 board 1205 are connected via a power supply line and supplied from the game control board 40 to the IF1 board 1105. A part of the generated power is supplied via the IF1 board 1105 as power used by devices such as the IF2 control unit 1203 and the photocoupler mounted on the IF2 board 1205. Therefore, as the power supplied from the game control board 40 to the IF1 board 1105 via the power supply line, the power used by the device mounted on the IF1 board 1105 and the power used by the device mounted on the IF2 board 1205 are used. Power is supplied to ensure both.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game control board 40 is provided with a connection terminal to which wiring from the IF1 board 1105 and the IF2 board 1205 can be connected, and a first information output circuit 40a, a second information output circuit 40b, and an input circuit 40d. A wiring pattern for transmitting the first test signal output from the main control unit 41 and various drive circuits to the socket of the first information output circuit 40a, and a second test signal are provided together with a possible socket. A wiring pattern for transmitting to the socket of the second information output circuit 40b and a wiring pattern for transmitting a test signal from the connection terminal to the switch detection circuit 44 via the input circuit 40d are formed, and the main control unit 41 is formed. The first test signal and the second test signal output from the various drive circuits are output via these wiring patterns, the first information output circuit 40a, the second information output circuit 40b, and the connection terminal, and the connection terminal. , The test signal input via the input circuit 40d and the wiring pattern is input to the switch detection circuit 44.

Further, since the connection terminal is composed of, for example, a signal pin to which a probe from the IF1 board 1105 can be connected and a connector to which a cable from the IF1 board 1105 can be connected, the connection terminal is connected to the IF1 board 1105 via these connection terminals. It is possible to easily connect the wiring of.

Further, the connection terminals are provided for convenience in connecting the IF1 board 1105 and the IF2 board 1205, and the connection terminals for inputting and outputting these test signals and test signals are shipped to the amusement store. It is not necessary for the game control board 40 of the slot machine to be used. Therefore, the game control board 40 of the present embodiment is formed with a plurality of cutting holes for cutting the portion provided with the connection terminal, and can be cut along these cutting holes. At the time of shipment to, the portion provided with the connection terminal can be cut so that unnecessary signals cannot be input / output. As a result, for example, the hall equipment detects the internal winning flags 1 to 8 signals, identifies the winning status of the internal winning flags from the internal winning flags 1 to 8 signals, and notifies that fact. It is possible to prevent it from being easily used for the purpose of. Further, it is possible to prevent an unnecessary signal from being easily input to the game control board 40.

Further, the first information output circuit 40a and the second information output circuit 40b are provided for convenience in order to output the first test signal and the second test signal to the IF1 board 1105 and the IF2 board 1205. The input circuit 40d is provided for convenience in order to input a test signal from the IF1 board 1105, and is not necessary for the game control board 40 of the slot machine shipped to the game shop. is there. Therefore, the game control board 40 of the present embodiment is provided with a socket on which the first information output circuit 40a, the second information output circuit 40b, and the input circuit 40d can be mounted, and the first information output circuit 40a and the first information output circuit 40a are provided. 2 The information output circuit 40b and the input circuit 40d can be easily removed. At the time of shipment to the amusement store, the first information output circuit 40a, the second information output circuit 40b, and the input circuit 40d are removed and unnecessary. It is possible to make it impossible to input and output various signals. As a result, for example, the hall equipment detects the internal winning flags 1 to 8 signals, identifies the winning status of the internal winning flags from the internal winning flags 1 to 8 signals, and notifies that fact. It is possible to prevent it from being easily used for the purpose of. Further, it is possible to prevent an unnecessary signal from being easily input to the game control board 40.

In addition, the number of slot machines provided by a third-party organization for conducting tests is usually about several, and other slot machines for mass production shipped to amusement stores receive these test signals and test signals. Since there is little need to output, these mass-produced slot machines may be equipped with a game control board 40 that has a wiring pattern but does not have the above-mentioned connection terminals, thereby mass-producing. It is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost of the slot machine for the machine. Further, in this case, since the wiring pattern for transmitting the test signal and the test signal is formed on the game control board 40, the IF1 board 1105, the IF2 board 1205, and the test device 1300 can be mounted only by mounting the connection terminals. It becomes possible to connect easily. Further, only the test slot machine is provided with a wiring pattern for transmitting a test signal and a test signal, and a connection terminal for connecting to the IF1 board 1105, IF2 board 1205, and test device 1300, and the slot machine for mass production is provided with a connection terminal. , These wiring patterns and connection terminals may not be provided. That is, the main control unit 41 controls the output of the test signal, but the test signal may not actually be output. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the slot machine for mass production can be further reduced.

Further, the slot machine for mass production is equipped with the game control board 40 which does not have the sockets of the first information output circuit 40a, the second information output circuit 40b, and the input circuit 40d described above, although the wiring pattern is formed. However, this can reduce the manufacturing cost of the slot machine for mass production. Further, in this case, since the wiring pattern for transmitting the test signal and the test signal is formed on the game control board 40, a socket is mounted to mount the first information output circuit 40a and the second information output circuit 40b. The IF1 board, IF2 board, and test device 1300 can be easily connected only by attaching the input circuit 40d. Further, only the test slot machine is provided with a wiring pattern for transmitting the test signal and the test signal, and a socket for attaching the first information output circuit 40a, the second information output circuit 40b, and the input circuit 40d for mass production. The slot machine may not be provided with these wiring patterns or sockets. That is, the main control unit 41 controls the output of the test signal, but the test signal may not actually be output. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the slot machine for mass production can be further reduced.

In the present embodiment, the simulation test is automatically performed by exchanging the test signal and the test signal between the slot machine 1 and the test apparatus 1300, and the test apparatus 1300 automatically performs the simulation test. As a result of these tests, it is possible to output the payout rate of the slot machine 1. Specifically, the ratio of the number of times the payout count signal was detected during the test period (the number of medals paid out) to the number of times the input switch signal was output during the test period (the number of medals consumed) was calculated. The result (number of consumption / number of payouts) will be output as the payout rate.

The IF2 control unit 1203 indicates a reel that first recommends a stop reel designation signal as the first stop reel within a maximum of 2 seconds from the time when the main control unit 41 outputs the game start signal, depending on the presence or absence of navigation notification. It is updated to the output state, the stop execution position signal is updated to the output state indicating the stop operation position recommended for the reel, and a certain time (50 ms) after the update of the stop reel designation signal and the stop execution position signal is completed. A stop strobe signal is output over a period of time, the recommended first stop reel and its stop operation position are notified to the test apparatus 1300, and after the stop strobe signal is stopped, a certain time (50 ms) is waited. Next, in the same procedure, the second stop reel and its stop operation position, which are sequentially recommended, are notified to the test apparatus 1300, and the third stop reel and its stop operation position are notified to the test apparatus 1300. After the notification of the third stop reel and its stop operation position, the stop execution position signal and the stop reel designation signal are cleared when a certain time (50 ms) has elapsed.

In this way, the IF2 control unit 1203 sequentially transfers the first stop reel and its stop operation position, the second stop reel and its stop operation position, and the third stop reel and its stop operation position to the test apparatus 1300 according to the recommended operation mode. By notifying the response, the operating procedure recommended by the test apparatus 1300 can be specified.

In the present embodiment, the first stop reel and its stop operation position, the second stop reel and its stop operation position, and the third stop reel and its stop operation position are continuously set with respect to the test apparatus 1300 for a maximum of 2 seconds. However, it is also possible to transmit these sequentially at the start of the game and at the time when the reels are stopped, without transmitting these continuously.

The ROM of the IF2 control unit 1203 stores a recommended operation mode table in which recommended operation modes are registered in advance according to the presence or absence of navigation notification, and the IF2 control unit 1203 recommends according to the presence or absence of navigation notification. The operation mode is acquired from the recommended operation procedure table, and the stop execution position signal and the stop reel designation signal are output based on the acquired operation mode. It should be noted that the IF2 control unit 1203 may acquire the recommended operation mode by using a program for determining the recommended operation mode according to the presence or absence of the navigation notification without having the recommended operation mode table registered in advance.

In the present embodiment, when the navigation notification signal indicates that the navigation notification is not performed and the navigation number (10 to 13) suggesting the winning of the BB is not output, the stop order is left, middle, and right. The stop reel designation signal is output in the order of Outputs the execution position signal. It should be noted that such an operation mode corresponds to an operation mode in which the medal payout rate is highest in a situation where navigation notification is not performed.

In addition, when the navigation notification signal indicates that the navigation notification is being performed and the navigation number (10 to 13) suggesting the winning of the BB is output, the order is the stop order of left, middle, and right. A stop reel designation signal is output, and a stop execution position signal indicating a stop operation position at which a symbol constituting a special combination according to a navigation number can be drawn is output for the corresponding stop reel. For example, when BB1 is elected as a special role and 11 is output as the navigation number, stop execution indicating the stop operation position at which the symbol of "blue 7" can be drawn in for each rotating reel. If the position signal is output, other BBs 2 and 3 are elected as special roles, and 10, 12 and 13 are output as the navigation numbers, "Red 7" is output according to the output navigation number. A stop execution position signal indicating a stop operation position at which the "white 7" and "BAR" symbols can be drawn is output.

Further, when the navigation notification signal indicates that the navigation notification is being performed, the stop reel designation signal is output in the order of the stop order specified from the navigation notification signal, and the corresponding stop reel is arbitrarily selected. Outputs a stop execution position signal indicating the stop operation position.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the recommended operation mode is acquired according to the presence or absence of the navigation notification, and the stop execution position signal and the stop reel designation signal indicating the acquired operation mode are output to the test device 1300. The reel stop switch signal can be output on the device 1300 side in the recommended operation mode depending on the presence or absence of the navigation notification, and the payout rate close to the market payout rate can be obtained by the test by the test device 1300.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the special role (BB) is won as a result of the internal lottery, the special role (BB) is won after the implementation condition of the special role navigation notification determined on the main control unit 41 side is satisfied. A navigation number (10 to 13) suggesting a symbol constituting a special combination is set, and a stop execution position signal and a stop reel designation signal indicating an operation mode for stopping the symbol corresponding to the navigation number are sent to the test device 1300. After the special role is won in the internal lottery in the slot machine on the market, the sub-control unit 91 notifies the winning of the special role by the final notification, and then the operation is performed in the stop operation mode in which the special role is won. In the same way that the special role is won, the navigation number is output and the special role is won in the game after the execution condition of the special role navigation notification is satisfied and the final notification is performed. It becomes possible to output a reel stop switch signal, and a payout rate close to the payout rate in the market can be obtained by a test with the test apparatus 1300.

Further, in the present embodiment, since a signal capable of specifying the number of steps of the reel motor corresponding to the output timing of the stop switch signal recommended as the stop execution position signal is output to the test apparatus 1300, it is arranged on the reel. Even if the number of symbols or the number of steps assigned to one symbol differs depending on the model of the slot machine, the output control of the stop switch signal with respect to the stop execution position signal can be shared on the test apparatus 1300 side.

In the test system including the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment and the test device 1300 capable of testing the game by the slot machine, the first test signal among the test signals output from the game control board 40 is , The second test signal is output to the test apparatus 1300 via the IF1 substrate 1105, and the second test signal is output to the test apparatus 1300 via the IF2 substrate 1205.

In such a configuration, when the power line is connected from the game control board 40 to the IF1 board 1105 and the IF2 board 1205 in order to supply power to the IF1 board 1105 and the IF2 board 1205, the game control boards 40 and 1 The number of wirings between the interface board (IF1) and the IF2 board 1205 is increased.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game control board 40 and the IF1 board 1105 can be connected via a power supply line, and the game control board 40 directly supplies power to the IF1 board 1105. Therefore, the power is not directly supplied from the game control board 40 to the IF2 board 1205, and the power supplied to the IF1 board 1105 is supplied from the IF1 board 1105 to the IF2 board 1205. , The wiring between the game control board 40 and the IF1 board 1105 and the IF2 board 1205 can be reduced.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game control board 40 can output the first test signal to the test device 1300 via the IF1 board 1105, and the game control board 40 can output the first test signal to the test device 1300 via the IF2 board 1205. On the other hand, the configuration is such that a second test signal can be output, and the game control board 40 can be connected to the IF1 board 1105 via a power supply line, and the game control board 40 directly supplies power to the IF1 board 1105. While it can be supplied, it is not connected to the IF2 board 1205 via the power supply line, power is not directly supplied from the game control board 40 to the IF2 board 1205, and the power is not directly supplied to the IF2 board 1205 via the IF1 board 1105. Since power can be supplied to the game control board 40, the number of wirings between the game control board 40 and the IF1 board 1105 and the IF2 board 1205 can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game control board 40 can output a navigation notification signal including information related to navigation notification to the IF2 board 1205 as a second test signal, and the IF2 board 1205 can output the navigation notification signal. The IF2 control unit 1203 is provided with an IF2 control unit 1203 that generates signals (stop execution position signal, stop reel designation signal, stop strobe signal) in a mode that can be input by the test apparatus 1300, and the IF2 control unit 1203 is a game control board. Since it is operated by the power supply supplied from the 40 to the IF1 board 1105, it is not necessary to output the power supply from the game control board 40 to the IF2 board 1205, and only the second test signal is output. The IF2 control unit 1203 generates a signal in a mode that can be input by the test device 1300 and outputs the signal to the test device 1300, so that the test signal output from the game control board 40 can be simplified. it can.

The game control board 40 may generate a second test signal that can be input by the test device 1300, and output the second test signal to the test device 1300 via the IF2 board 1205. good.

Further, the IF1 board 1105 only relays the first test signal output from the game control board 40, but the IF1 board 1105 also has a control unit on which a CPU or the like is mounted and is mounted on the game control board 40. The output first test signal may be changed to a mode that can be input by the test apparatus 1300. With such a configuration, the test signal output from the game control board 40 can be simplified. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, a photocoupler is mounted on the IF1 board 1105 and the IF2 board 1205, and the input terminal and the output terminal on each board are connected via the photocoupler and output from the game control board 40. The first test signal and the second test signal are output to the test apparatus via the photocoupler mounted on the IF1 substrate 1105 and the IF2 substrate 1205, so that the slot machine 1 and the test apparatus 1300 are electrically connected. Since they are not connected to each other, it is possible to prevent the other device from being damaged due to an abnormality in one device.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game control board 40 is equipped with indicators 12L and 12R that display the stop order of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R notified by the navigation notification, and the indicators 12L and 12R are notified by the navigation notification. The display signal, which is a drive signal for lighting, is branched and output to the IF2 board as a navigation notification signal via the second information output circuit 40b, so that the indicators 12L and 12R The drive signal of can be used as a navigation notification signal.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can execute the navigation notification when the AT is controlled, and the game control board 40 sends a first test signal indicating the result of the game to the IF1 board 1105. The configuration includes a first information output circuit 40a for output and a second information output circuit 40b for outputting a navigation notification signal including information related to navigation notification to the IF2 board 1205. The control unit 41 may not execute the navigation notification, and the game control board 40 may not output the navigation notification signal to the IF2 board 1205. In such a configuration, the first information output circuit 40a of the present embodiment may be used. Whether or not a means for executing navigation notification and a means for outputting a navigation notification signal are provided by outputting a test signal indicating the result of the game to the IF1 board 1105 using the same circuit as Regardless of this, the game control board 40 can have a common circuit for outputting a test signal indicating the result of the game to the IF1 board 1105.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display signal and the navigation signal are input to the second information output circuit 40b, and only the information related to the navigation notification is extracted from the display signal by the conversion circuit in the second information output circuit 40b to perform the navigation notification. The signal is generated and the navigation notification signal is transmitted from the second information output circuit 40b to the IF2 board 1205, but the main control unit 41 directly generates a signal containing only the information related to the navigation notification. By inputting the signal to the second information output circuit 40b, the signal may be transmitted from the second information output circuit 40b to the IF2 board 1205.

Further, it may be configured to output as a navigation notification signal by using all or a part of the data of the first internal winning command, the second internal winning command, and the push order command transmitted to the sub control unit 91. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to generate a signal only for outputting the navigation notification signal. As such a configuration, for example, the main control unit 41 can transmit a push order command to the IF2 control unit 1203, and the IF2 control unit 1203 specifies a navigation number based on the push order command, and the said The stop reel designation signal is output in the order in which the reels are stopped according to the navigation number, and the stop execution position signal indicating the stop operation position at which the configuration symbol corresponding to the navigation number can be drawn for the corresponding stop reel is output. It may be configured to be used.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lighting mode in which the indicators 12L and 12R are turned on by the navigation notification is such that the indicators 12L and 12R are turned on in one lighting mode when the push order combination is won, so that the display is turned on from the first stop. All the stop orders up to the third stop can be specified, and the drive signal for lighting the indicators 12L and 12R is branched in the lighting mode and transmitted to the test device 1300 via the IF2 board 1205. As for the lighting mode for lighting the indicators 12L and 12R by the navigation notification, after indicating the reels 2L, 2C and 2R to be stopped next, the stopping order is sequentially changed by switching the lighting mode each time the stop operation is performed. It may be configured to notify so that it can be specified. In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 sends a signal capable of specifying all the stop orders from the first stop to the third stop when the push order combination is won. It is preferably configured to generate and transmit to the test apparatus 1300 via the IF2 substrate 1205, thereby specifying the stop order notified by the navigation notification at an earlier stage on the test apparatus 1300 side. Is possible.

Further, in the present embodiment, the navigation notification is configured to notify the stop operation mode (stop order and stop operation timing) that is advantageous to the player, but the advantage for the player does not change as an effect. May be configured to perform navigation notification for performing the reel stop operation in a predetermined stop operation mode. In such a configuration, for example, as one re-game combination in which a prize is won and a re-game is given regardless of the stop order, the operation is performed in one stop order (for example, right, middle, left stop order). The combination of 1 symbols (for example, "Red 7-Red 7-Red 7") is stopped, and the stop operation is performed in another stop order (for example, left middle right stop order), so that the first symbol is used. In a configuration in which a combination of symbols different from the combination of symbols (for example, "replay-replay-replay") is stopped, when the main control unit 41 decides to stop the combination of the first symbols as an effect. , When it is decided not to stop the combination of the first symbol by outputting the navigation number indicating the stop order of one, the navigation number indicating the other stop order is output, so that the first effect is produced. When stopping the combination of the symbols of 1, the IF2 control unit 1203 specifies the navigation number based on the push order command, and outputs the stop reel designation signal in the order of stopping the reels according to the navigation number. In addition, by outputting a stop execution position signal indicating the stop operation position at which the configuration symbol corresponding to the navigation number can be drawn in for the corresponding stop reel, the stop operation close to that of the slot machine on the market can be performed even by the test by the test device 1300. Can be done.

Further, with such a configuration, for example, a configuration in which the advantage of the next game or later is changed on condition that the combination of the first symbols is stopped (the combination of the first symbols is stopped). A configuration in which the game is shifted to a predetermined gaming state, a configuration in which the number of games controlled by the AT is added by stopping the combination of the first symbols, etc.), and a combination of the first symbols according to the navigation number. Even in the configuration in which the player is suggested to stop the operation mode, the stop reel designation signal is output in the order in which the reels are stopped according to the navigation number, and the corresponding stop reel is configured according to the navigation number. By outputting the stop execution position signal indicating the stop operation position at which the symbol can be drawn in, it is possible to obtain a payout rate close to the payout rate in the market by the test by the test apparatus 1300.

Further, with such a configuration, for example, a combination having the same degree of advantage (for example, a replay), a combination composed of a combination of the first symbols and a combination composed of a combination of the second symbols can be used. , Indicates a stop operation mode in which the winning combination of the first symbol combination can be won in order to simply stop the combination of the first symbol on the reel when winning in the internal lottery. When outputting the navigation number, the stop reel designation signal is output in the order in which the reels are stopped according to the navigation number, and the stop operation position at which the configuration symbol corresponding to the navigation number can be drawn in for the corresponding stop reel. By outputting the stop execution position signal indicating, the reel can be stopped with a content close to the content of the stop mode of the reel stopped in the slot machine on the market by the test by the test apparatus 1300.

[About the database in RAM91c]
Next, the game history database in the RAM 91c of the slot machine 1 will be described. In the following, the database may be referred to as "DB". The game history database in the RAM 91c will be described with reference to FIG. 69 (A). FIG. 69A shows an example of a game history database. The game history database contains the number of digested games, the number of winnings of a predetermined role (bonus, small role, at least one of replayed roles, etc.), the number of ATs (the number of times controlled by AT), and the experience during the game history update period. It consists of value, character level, etc. The game history update period is the period from the time when the password is input to the time when the two-dimensional code is output. The password is issued by the management server 1200, and can be obtained (displayed on the display unit of the mobile terminal 1100) by the player accessing the management server 1200 by the mobile terminal 1100. The player can also play the game without entering the password.

Within the game history update period, the number of games in the game history database is increased and updated by 1 each time one game is consumed. Within the game history update period, the number of ATs in the game history database is increased and updated each time the AT is controlled.

Next, the experience value will be described. When the predetermined mission shown in FIG. 74 is achieved, the sub-control unit 91 executes the mission achievement notification and gives the experience value associated with the mission. Every time an experience value is given, only the given experience value is added and updated. Every time the updated experience value reaches a predetermined number (30 in this embodiment), the level of the character is updated by 1 addition. The sub-control unit 91 of the slot machine 1 can execute an effect according to the level of the character. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the 2D code is displayed by the player performing the 2D code output operation in the password mode. When the two-dimensional code is imaged by the player's mobile terminal 1100, the number of games accumulated during the game history update period, the number of winnings, the number of ATs, the character level, the experience value, etc. (that is, various types stored in the RAM 91c). Information, hereinafter referred to as “stored information”), is transmitted to the management server 1200 via the mobile terminal 1100. Further, in the RAM 91c of the present embodiment, the game history information is not stored for each terminal identification information. Therefore, the storage capacity of the RAM 91c can be reduced.

[About the game history database]
Next, the game history database stored in the storage unit 220 of the management server 1200 will be described. FIG. 69 shows an example of the game history database. As shown in FIG. 69, the game history database contains terminal identification information (SIM data) capable of identifying the mobile terminal 1100 owned by the player, game date and time, password (last issued), number of digested games, and so on. The number of winnings, the number of ATs, the current level of the character, the experience value acquired by the player, etc. of the predetermined role (bonus, small role, at least one of the replaying roles, etc.) are classified by player (by terminal identification information). It is registered. The stored information transmitted via the player's mobile terminal 1100 is stored in the game history database of the storage unit 220.

[About the startup process executed by the main control unit 41]
The main control unit 41 executes the start-up process when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed after the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped (power cut off). Here, as a factor of stopping the power supply to the slot machine 1, a store clerk or the like turns off the power switch 39 of the slot machine 1, and a sudden power failure such as a power failure is said. Including things.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the activation process by the main control unit 41. FIG. 70 shows the main processing. The main control unit 41 determines whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state (S22). When the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state (Y in S22), the main control unit 41 shifts to the setting change state (S24). The setting change state is a state in which the set value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38 (see FIG. 36) provided inside the slot machine 1 after the front door 1b is opened. Further, the set value is a value that specifies the winning probability in the internal lottery, and is a value that is stored in the set value work. The set value consists of 6 levels from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest degree of advantage for the player (higher medal payout rate), and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the degree of advantage. (The medal payout rate will be lower). That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is.

Further, in S24, the main control unit 41 transmits a setting start command to the sub control unit 91 (S24), and shifts to the processing of S26. The setting start command is a command that can identify that the setting change state has been started. The sub-control unit 91 recognizes that the transition to the setting change state has been started by receiving the setting start command.

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 37 is in the OFF state (N in S22), the main control unit 41 shifts to the processing of S26 without performing the processing of S24. In S26, the notification state of the predetermined notification unit is controlled to the state before the power failure. Here, the slot machine 1 has a backup power supply. Therefore, even if a sudden power failure (for example, a power failure) occurs, the backup power is supplied to the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91, so that the information stored in the backup area for a predetermined period of time is stored. (Hereinafter, also referred to as pre-power failure information) can be retained. When the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 recover from the power failure, the display states of various notification units can be returned to the display state before the power failure based on the information and flags saved in the backup area. .. Here, as shown in FIG. 80, the predetermined notification units are "1BETLED14, 2BETLED15, 3BETLED16 (hereinafter, also referred to as BET display unit)" and "Payout number display unit (game auxiliary display) 12". And, "a transmission region 51b (hereinafter, also referred to as a winning display unit) corresponding to the see-through window 3 that lights the reel LED 55 when the small winning combination wins and notifies that the small winning combination has won the prize". After the processing of S26, the process proceeds to the processing of S32.

In S32, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the setting start command has been transmitted (that is, whether or not the process in S24 has been executed). Explaining the method of this determination, for example, when the process of S24 is executed, the setting start command transmission completed flag is stored in the RAM of the main control unit 41. In S32, it is determined whether or not the setting start command transmission completed flag is stored, and if it is determined that the setting start command transmission completed flag is stored, YES is determined in S32. On the other hand, if it is determined in S32 that the setting start command transmission completed flag is not stored, it is determined as NO in S32. If YES is determined in S32, the setting start command transmission completed flag is deleted.

In S34, it is determined whether or not the set value confirmation operation has been executed. Here, the set value confirmation operation is an operation of confirming the set value changed in the setting change state. The setting value confirmation operation of the present embodiment is "after the operation of the start switch 7, the operation of turning off the setting key switch 37 after the operation of the start switch 7, and the operation of turning off the setting key switch 37. This is an operation of closing the front door 1b. " In S34, it waits until the set value confirmation operation is executed (NO in S34). Further, when it is determined in S34 that the set value determination operation has been executed, the process proceeds to the process of S36.

In S36, the setting change state is terminated and a setting termination command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91. The setting end command is a command that can identify that the setting change state has ended. The sub-control unit 91 recognizes that the setting change state has been completed by receiving the setting end command.

On the other hand, if the main control unit 41 does not transmit the setting command (start command) (N in S32), the main control unit 41 ends the process without performing the process of S34.

Further, in the start-up process, in addition to the process shown in FIG. 70, an error detection process for detecting the presence or absence of an error is executed in each unit of the main control unit 41.

[About the startup process executed by the sub-control unit 91]
The sub-control unit 91 executes the start-up process when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed after the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped (power cut off). FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the activation process in the sub control unit 91. The sub-control unit 91 executes the initial operation of the accessory 2000 (S52). Here, the initial operation of the accessory 2000 is to displace the accessory 2000 existing at the initial position (position shown in FIG. 34) to the drive position (position shown in FIG. 82). By executing the initial operation of the accessory 2000 in this way, the store clerk or the like can confirm whether or not the accessory 2000 is normally displaced when the power failure is restored.

Next, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the setting start command has been received (S54). Here, the setting start command is transmitted in S24 of FIG. 70. When the sub-control unit 91 receives the setting start command (Y in S54), the sub-control unit 91 displays the characters "setting is being changed" (see S56, FIGS. 83 (B-1) and (B-2)). Next, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the setting end command has been received (S58). When the sub-control unit 91 does not receive the setting end command (N in S58), it waits until it receives the setting end command, and when it receives the setting end command (Y in S58), " The display of the characters "setting is being changed" is terminated (S60), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the sub-control unit 91 does not receive the setting start command (N in S54), the sub-control unit 91 ends the process. Further, in the start-up process, in addition to the process shown in FIG. 71, an error detection process for detecting the presence or absence of an error is executed in each unit of the sub-control unit 91.

[Processing during game executed by sub-control unit 91]
Next, the in-game processing executed during the game by the sub-control unit 91 will be described. The term "during a game" means a state after the activation process is completed. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the processing during the game. The sub control unit 91 determines whether or not the AT lottery has been executed (S102). When the AT lottery is executed (Y in S102), the sub control unit 91 executes the effect lottery. In the production lottery, one of the notification production described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 79, the rock-paper-scissors production described with reference to FIG. 82, and no production is determined by a random number lottery. When the execution of the rock-paper-scissors effect is decided by the effect lottery, the type of the rock-paper-scissors effect is determined using the effect table shown in FIG. 73 (S104). The rock-paper-scissors production is a production that includes a fanning production and an AT result production. The fanning effect is an effect that incites whether or not the AT has been won (a production that suggests the possibility of winning the AT). Further, the AT result effect is an effect executed after the execution of the fanning effect, and is an effect showing the result of the AT lottery.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82 (B), the fanning effect is an effect in which the character 2000 and the enemy character image 400 wave their hands to each other. The fanning effect is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). By the AT lottery executed in S102 after the fanning effect, when the AT is won, the winning effect in which the character 2000 wins the rock-paper-scissors is executed as the AT result effect. On the other hand, when the AT is not won by the AT lottery executed in S102, the defeat effect in which the character 2000 loses to the rock-paper-scissors is executed as the AT result effect. Note that FIG. 82C shows a winning effect.

Furthermore, there are two types of fanning effects: no flame effect, small flame effect, and large flame effect. The small flame effect is an effect of displaying the small flame image at the place where the enemy character image 400 waves. The large flame effect is an effect of displaying the large flame image at the place where the enemy character image 400 waves. The flameless effect is an effect in which the character 2000 and the enemy character image 400 wave their hands to each other without displaying the flame image. Note that FIG. 82B shows a large flame effect in which the flame image 310, which is a large flame, is displayed. The small flame effect is an effect in which a flame image smaller than the large flame is displayed (not shown in particular).

FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining a rock-paper-scissors production table. FIG. 73 (A) is a table for determining the rock-paper-scissors effect when the AT is not won. FIG. 73 (B) is a table for determining the rock-paper-scissors effect when the AT is won.

In the examples of FIGS. 73 (A) and 73 (B), no flame loses, small flame loses, large flame loses, flameless wins, small flame wins, and large flame wins are defined. Losing without flame refers to a production in which a flameless production is executed as a fanning effect, and a defeat effect is executed as an AT result effect. Small flame defeat refers to a production in which a small flame effect is executed as a fanning effect, and a defeat effect is executed as an AT result effect. The big flame defeat is a production in which a large flame production is executed as a fanning effect and a defeat production is executed as an AT result production. Winning without flame refers to an effect in which a flameless effect is executed as a fanning effect and a victory effect is executed as an AT result effect. A small flame win is a production in which a small flame effect is executed as a fanning effect and a winning effect is executed as an AT result effect. A big flame win is a production in which a large flame effect is executed as a fanning effect and a winning effect is executed as an AT result effect.

In FIG. 73 (A), the execution probabilities of losing without flame, losing small flame, and losing large flame are defined as 98%, 1%, and 1%. In FIG. 73 (B), the execution probabilities of the flameless win, the small flame win, and the large flame win when the number of granted AT games is 1 to 150 are defined as 50%, 25%, and 25%. There is. Further, it is stipulated that the execution probabilities of non-flame win, small flame win, and large flame win when the number of granted AT games is 151 to 2 are 10%, 20%, and 70%.

The description returns to FIG. When the processing of S104 is completed, the process proceeds to S106. On the other hand, when the AT lottery is not executed (N in S102), the process proceeds to S106 without performing the process of S104.

In S106, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the mission achievement condition is satisfied. FIG. 74 shows an example of a mission database. This mission database is stored in ROM 91b. In the example of FIG. 74, the mission achievement condition and the start timing of the mission achievement notification when the mission is achieved are defined for each mission. Further, when the mission achievement condition is satisfied, the sub-control unit 91 gives an experience value corresponding to the mission corresponding to the mission achievement condition.

In this embodiment, there are 100 types of missions. In the following, the mission identification information will be described as a reference code for the mission. For example, the mission of the mission identification information M1 is the mission M1. For example, the mission achievement condition of mission M1 is a condition that is satisfied when the bell wins five times after being controlled during the game history update period.

Further, the mission achievement condition of the mission M3 is a condition that is satisfied by executing the rock-paper-scissors effect (see FIG. 82). Further, the mission achievement condition of the mission M5 is a condition that is satisfied by digesting 500 games after being controlled during the game history update period. Further, when the mission achievement condition of the mission M3 or the mission achievement condition of the mission M5 is satisfied, the accessory 2000 operates. In this way, among the missions, there are missions (hereinafter, referred to as "role-related missions") in which the accessory 2000 operates by achieving the missions M3 and mission M5.

In S106, when it is determined that any of the mission achievement conditions of missions M1 to M100 is satisfied (Y in S106), the mission achievement conditions of the character-related missions (missions M3, M5, etc.) are satisfied. Whether or not it is determined (S108). When it is determined that the mission achievement condition of the accessory-related mission is satisfied (Y in S108), the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the mark detection circuit 105a has detected the mark 201 (see FIG. 37). (S122). When it is determined to be YES in S122, that is, when it is determined that the accessory 2000 is normally displaced, the process proceeds to S128. In S128, the sub-control unit 91 executes notification of the achieved mission (hereinafter, referred to as mission achievement notification). For example, when the mission achievement condition of the mission M1 is satisfied, a character such as "Mission M1 achieved! Congratulations!" Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. At the same time, the sub-control unit 91 assigns an experience value corresponding to the mission M1 (adds and updates the experience value stored in the game history database shown in FIG. 69 (A)).

On the other hand, when the mission achievement condition of the accessory-related mission is not satisfied (N in S108), the sub-control unit 91 executes the process of S128 without performing the process of S122, and ends the process. ..

If the mark 201 is not detected (N in S122), the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the achievement of the accessory-related mission (S124). When it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of the character-related mission achievement condition (Y in S124), the sub control unit 91 performs the character error processing (S126), executes the mission achievement notification (S128), End the process.

Here, the processing of S124 will be described. When the mission achievement condition of the accessory-related mission is satisfied (Y in S108), if the accessory drive device 99a is normal, the accessory 2000 is normally displaced. Therefore, it should be determined as YES in S122. However, when the determination is YES in S108 and the mark 201 is not detected for a predetermined time (S124), it means that the accessory drive device 99a has failed or is likely to fail. Is. In such a case, the accessory error processing (S126) is executed.

In the accessory error processing, for example, the liquid crystal display 51 may display that the accessory is an error. Further, an error signal indicating that the accessory is an error may be output to the hall computer (not shown) installed in the game store. As a result, it is possible to notify the clerk or the like that the accessory drive device 99a is out of order.

Further, after the processing of S126 is completed, the mission achievement notification of S128 is executed and the experience value is given. That is, even when the mark 201 is not detected, the mission achievement notification is executed and the experience value is given. This is terrible for the player if the mission achievement notification is not executed because the accessory drive device 99a is out of order even though the mission achievement condition of the accessory-related mission is satisfied. There is a risk of diminishing interest. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the mission achievement condition of the accessory-related mission is satisfied, the mission achievement notification and the experience value are given regardless of whether or not the mark 201 is detected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered. It should be noted that the predetermined time is a time at which it can be determined that the accessory drive device 99a is out of order, and is a time measured in advance. The predetermined time of this embodiment is, for example, 10 seconds.

In S108, and for at least some of the mission achievement conditions of missions M1 to M100 (hereinafter referred to as "specific missions"), the missions once achieved after being controlled during the game history update period are twice. Even if the above is achieved, it may be determined that the established mission achievement condition has not been achieved. For example, a case where the specific mission is mission 1 will be described. When the bell wins five times for the first time after being controlled during the game history update period, it is determined to be YES in S106. Further, when the bell wins 5 times (that is, when the bell wins 10 times after being controlled during the game history update period), it is determined as NO in S106. As a result, it is possible to prevent the mission achievement notification and the experience value from being executed in duplicate.

Further, the accessory 2000 may be operated even when the mission achievement condition of the accessory-related mission is not satisfied. For example, when a predetermined accessory operating condition is satisfied, the accessory 2000 may operate with a predetermined probability (including 100%). It is preferable that the operating condition of the accessory is a condition that is advantageous to the player. For example, the accessory operation condition may be a condition that is satisfied by winning a bonus.

[About reel control when winning a small role]
75 to 79 are diagrams for explaining reel control at the time of winning a small winning combination. 75 to 79 will be described when the execution of the notification effect is determined in the effect lottery executed when the AT lottery target combination is won. By executing the notification effect, it is possible to suggest which lottery target combination has been won. Despite these effects being executed, the character image displayed in the notification effect (for example, a pattern showing a cherry or a pattern showing a watermelon) shows the display result on the invalid line, not on the winning line. If this is the case, the display result on the invalid line may be mistaken for the result of the game.

In the present embodiment, in order to prevent the player from misidentifying the image displayed in such a notification effect, the following reel control is executed in relation to the symbol actually displayed on the winning line LN. doing. FIG. 75 shows reel control when a strong cherry lip or a weak cherry lip is won. In FIG. 75, the stop operation is executed in the stop order of left, middle, and right. When stopping in the left, middle, and right stop order, aim the 3rd red 7 symbol shown in FIG. 35 in the frame of the see-through window 3 (upper position of the frame) on the left reel 2L and stop the stop switch 8L. Let me. If you press the stop switch at such a position, you can prevent the cherry and watermelon from being missed. When the strong cherry lip is won, the notification effect of displaying the character image of the cherry in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51 is executed.

FIGS. 75 (a) to 75 (c) show the case where the operation is performed at the timing when the pressing is successful, and FIGS. 75 (d) to 75 (f) show the case where the operation is performed at the timing when the pressing fails. The timing at which the pressing is successful and the timing at which the pressing is unsuccessful will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 35. For example, when the left reel 2L is first stopped when the strong cherry lip is won, the timing at which the second cherry symbol in FIG. 35 can be stopped at the lower stage of the left reel 2L is the timing at which the push is successful. Since the range from the 2nd cherry symbol to the symbol 4 frames ahead can be pulled in, the 18th blank symbol, the 19th replay symbol, the 20th bell symbol, and the 1st watermelon symbol are on the left reel 2L. When the stop switch 8L is stopped when the cherry symbol is in the lower position or when the second cherry symbol is in the lower position of the left reel 2L, the cherry symbol is stopped at the lower position of the left reel 2L. Is possible. Such a case is the timing when the push is successful. Further, when the stop operation of the stop switch 8L is executed when the red 7 symbol to the 17th bar symbol of No. 3 is in the lower position of the left reel 2L, the cherry symbol stops at the lower position of the left reel 2L. It becomes impossible to make it. Such a case is the timing at which the push failure occurs.

When the stop switch 8L is stopped at the timing when the strong cherry lip is successfully pressed, the cherry symbol stops at the lower stage of the left reel 2L as shown in FIG. 75 (a). Next, the stop switch 8C is stopped by aiming the third red 7 symbol shown in FIG. 35 in the frame of the see-through window 3 on the middle reel 2C. When the stop switch 8C is stopped at the timing when the pressing is successful, the cherry symbol is stopped in the middle stage of the middle reel as shown in FIG. 75 (b). Further, since the cherry symbols are always arranged within 5 frames on the right reel 2R, when the strong cherry lip is won, the cherry symbols always stop in the upper row as shown in FIG. 75 (c). As shown in FIG. 75 (c), three cherry symbols are stopped on the winning line LN, and the replaying combination wins a prize. This shows the case where the symbol combination showing the winning of the lip 15 at the time of winning the strong cherry lip shown in FIG. 45 is derived.

Further, when the stop switch 8L is stopped at the timing when the strong cherry lip is won, the replay symbol is stopped at the lower stage of the left reel 2L as shown in FIG. 75 (d). Next, in the middle reel 2C, when the stop switch 8C is stopped at the timing when the pressing is successful, the replay symbol is stopped in the middle stage of the middle reel as shown in FIG. 75 (e). However, since the cherry symbols are always arranged within 5 frames on the right reel 2R, FIG. 75 (f) is displayed on the right reel 2R when the strong cherry lip is won, regardless of whether or not it is the timing of the failure of pressing. ), The cherry pattern always stops at the top. As shown in FIG. 75 (f), on the winning line LN, the symbols are stopped at the symbol combination of replay-replay-cherry, and the replay combination is won. This shows the case where the symbol combination showing the winning of the lip 16 at the time of winning the strong cherry lip shown in FIG. 45 is derived.

If the left reel 2L is successfully pressed and the middle reel 2C is not pressed, the cherry-replay-cherry symbol combination is displayed on the winning line LN. Further, if the left reel 2L has failed to be pressed and the middle reel 2C has been successfully pressed, the replay-cherry-cherry symbol combination is displayed on the winning line LN. In any case, the cherry pattern will be displayed on the winning line LN (upper part of the right reel 2R).

The sub-control unit 91 executes an effect suggesting winning of the cherry lip, and as shown in FIGS. 75 (a) to 75 (c), when the stop switches 8L to 8R are operated at the timing when the pressing is successful, the left Cherry symbols are aligned on the winning line LN including the reel 2L and the middle reel 2C. Further, when the sub-control unit 91 executes an effect suggesting the winning of the cherry lip and the stop switches 8L to 8R are operated at the timing when the pressing failure occurs, as shown in FIGS. 75 (d) to 75 (f). , The replay symbol is aligned on the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C on the winning line LN, while the cherry symbol is derived on the right reel 2R on the winning line LN. In this way, even when the stop switches 8L to 8R are operated at a timing different from the success timing, a display result indicating the winning of the cherry lip is derived on the right reel 2R on the winning line LN. That is, the symbol displayed in the notification effect is always displayed on the winning line LN. Therefore, it can be shown that the display result displayed on the winning line LN is the cherry lip winning at both the timing when the pressing is successful and the timing when the pressing is unsuccessful, and the display result displayed on the winning line LN. It is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that is not the result of the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (c), when the stop switches 8L to 8R are operated at the timing when the push is successful at the time of winning the strong cherry lip, if only the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C on the winning line LN are used. Cherry patterns are also available on the right reel 2R. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the cherry symbol is derived to the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C, the cherry symbol can also be derived to the right reel 2R, as shown in FIGS. 75 (c) and 75 (f). In addition, the control contents for the right reel 2R can be standardized.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 75 (c) and 75 (f), even when the pressing is successful and the cherry symbol is derived to all reels, the pressing fails and the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C are displayed. Even if the cherry symbol is not derived and the cherry symbol is derived to the right reel 2R on the winning line LN, the replaying role wins as a winning of the strong cherry lip. Therefore, even if the cherry symbol is not derived to the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C, a prize is generated, so that the interest of the game is improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (g), when the stop switches 8L to 8R are stopped at the timing when the weak cherry lip is successfully pressed, the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C on the winning line LN are operated. The cherry symbol is derived at the same time, and the cherry symbol is not derived on the right reel 2R on the winning line LN. Instead, in the right reel, the cherry symbol is derived on the invalid line LM4 (lower stage of the right reel 2R). Therefore, if the winning suggestion effect suggesting the winning of the cherry rip is executed and the stop operation is executed at the timing when the pressing is successful, the strong cherry rip is won or weak depending on the position of the cherry symbol on the right reel 2R. You can check if you have won the cherry reel. Note that FIG. 75 (g) shows a case where a symbol combination indicating the winning of the lip 15 at the time of winning the weak cherry lip is derived.

Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (h), when the stop switches 8L to 8R are stopped at the timing when the weak cherry lip is won, the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C on the winning line LN are stopped. The replay symbol is derived and the cherry symbol is derived to the right reel 2R on the winning line LN. The symbol combination (replay-replay-cherry) on the winning line LN is the same as the symbol combination on the winning line LN when the stop switches 8L to 8R are stopped at the timing when the push failure occurs when the strong cherry lip is won. Is. Therefore, it is possible to indicate that the display result displayed on the winning line LN is a cherry lip winning, and it is possible to prevent misidentification of the display result displayed on the winning line LN. Since the same display results are derived from FIGS. 75 (f) and 75 (h), it can be determined that the cherry rip has been won, but the strength of the cherry rip cannot be determined.

If only one of the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C is successfully pressed when the weak cherry lip is won, the cherry symbol is derived on the winning line LN of the reel that was successfully pressed and fails. Reel control is performed on the reel to derive the replay symbol. Then, with respect to the right reel 2R, control is performed so that the cherry symbol is derived on the winning line LN (upper stage of the right reel 2R).

FIG. 76 shows the time when the middle cherry lip is won. In FIG. 76, the stop operation is executed in the order of stopping in the middle, left, and right. When the middle reel 2C is first stopped, the stop switch 8L is stopped by aiming the No. 3 red 7 symbol shown in FIG. 35 within the frame of the see-through window 3. The red 7 symbol is a symbol that is common to the cherry symbol in that it has a red aspect.

When the middle reel 2C is pressed at the timing when the middle reel 2C is successfully pressed when the middle reel 2C is won, the red 7 symbol stops in the middle of the middle reel 2C as shown in FIG. 76 (a). Further, when the left reel 2L is operated at the timing when the pressing is successful, the cherry symbol stops in the middle stage of the left reel 2L as shown in FIG. 76 (b). Further, when the right reel 2R is operated at the timing when the pressing is successful, as shown in FIG. 76 (c), the cherry symbol stops at the upper stage of the right reel 2R and the red 7 symbol stops at the lower stage of the right reel 2R. To do. Note that FIG. 76 (c) is a symbol combination in the case where the BB5 is simultaneously won together with the middle cherry winning. In this way, not only the arrangement of the cherry symbols on the right reel 2R, but also the red 7 symbols on the middle reel 2C can suggest the winning of the cherry lip, and the result of the game that wins the cherry is not on the winning line LN. It is possible to prevent misidentification of.

When the stop switch is operated at the timing when both the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C fail to be pressed, the replay symbol is derived on the winning line LN to the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C, and the right reel is right reel. The cherry pattern is derived in the upper part of 2R. That is, the same control as in FIG. 75 (f) and FIG. 75 (h) is executed. In this way, regardless of whether the weak cherry lip, the strong cherry lip, or the middle cherry lip is won, it is possible to standardize the control when the control is executed at the timing when the push failure occurs. If only one of the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C is successfully pressed, the cherry symbol is derived on the winning line LN of the reel that was successfully pressed, and the replay symbol is displayed on the failed reel. Reel control to derive is performed. Then, with respect to the right reel 2R, control is performed so that the cherry symbol is derived on the winning line LN (upper stage of the right reel 2R).

FIG. 77 shows the time when the watermelon was won. In FIG. 77, the stop operation is executed in the stop order of left, middle, and right. FIGS. 77 (a) to 77 (c) show the case where the operation is performed at the timing when the pressing failure occurs. The timing of failure to press the button will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 35. For example, when the left reel 2L is first stopped when the watermelon is won, the first watermelon symbol, the sixth watermelon symbol, and the eleventh watermelon symbol in FIG. 35 can be stopped at the upper stage of the left reel 2L. It is the timing to become. Then, when the 12th bell symbol to the 16th bar symbol are stopped at the timing of stopping at the upper stage of the left reel 2L, the timing at which the push failure occurs.

When the stop switch 8L is stopped at the timing when the watermelon is won, the BAR symbol stops at the upper stage of the left reel 2L as shown in FIG. 77 (a). The BAR symbol is a symbol used as a symbol constituting the watermelon. Next, in the middle reel 2C, since the watermelon symbol is always arranged within 5 frames, regardless of the timing of pressing, the middle reel 2C is placed in the middle stage as shown in FIG. 77 (b) when the watermelon is won. The watermelon pattern always stops. Further, when the stop switch 8R is stopped at the timing when the watermelon is won, the blank symbol a (bra a) is stopped at the lower stage of the right reel 2R as shown in FIG. 77 (c).

In the middle reel 2C, the watermelon symbol is always arranged within 5 frames. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 77, when the watermelon is won, the reel control is executed so that the watermelon symbol is always displayed in the middle row in the middle reel 2C. can do. By doing so, the watermelon symbol is displayed on the winning line, so that the symbol displayed in the notification effect is always displayed on the winning line LN. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that the result of the game in which the watermelon is won is not on the winning line LN.

FIG. 78 shows when a strong cherry lip, a weak cherry lip, or a middle cherry lip is won. In FIG. 78, the stop operation is executed in the order of stopping right, middle, and left. As shown in FIG. 78A, the right reel 2R is first stopped when the reel is rotating. As shown in FIG. 78 (b), when the right reel 2R is first stopped, when the cherry lip is won, the cherry symbol always appears in the upper stage of the right reel 2R on the winning line. Therefore, it is possible to suggest that the cherry lip is won at the stage of the first stop. However, at this point, it is unclear what kind of symbols are stopped on the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C, so it is not known whether the cherry lip is strong, weak, or middle.

When the stop switches 8L and 8C are stopped at the timing when the push is successful, when the strong cherry lip is won, the cherry symbols are aligned on the winning line as shown in FIG. 78 (c). In addition, when the stop switches 8L and 8C are stopped at the timing when the push is successful, when the weak cherry lip is won, as shown in FIG. 78 (d), the replay-cherry-cherry is displayed on the winning line. The patterns are aligned. Further, when the stop switches 8L and 8C are stopped at the timing when the pressing is successful, when the middle-stage cherry lip is won, as shown in FIG. 78 (e), on the invalid line LM2 (middle stage of the left reel 2L). The cherry pattern is derived from. Note that FIG. 78 (e) shows the case where the bonus and the middle cherry lip are simultaneously won. In the case of winning the middle cherry lip alone, the red 7 symbols will not be aligned downward to the right.

In this way, when the right reel 2R is stopped first when the cherry lip is won, the cherry symbol is derived to the right reel 2R on the winning line LN. Therefore, it can be suggested that the display result displayed on the winning line LN before the operation of the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C is the cherry winning. That is, it is suggested that the symbol displayed in the notification effect is displayed on the winning line LN at the time of the first stop. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that the result of the game in which the cherry is won is not on the winning line LN.

FIG. 79 shows the time when the watermelon was won. In FIG. 79, the stop operations are executed in the order of stopping in the middle, right, and left. As shown in FIG. 79 (a), the middle reel 2C is first stopped from the time when the reel is rotating. As shown in FIG. 79 (b), when the middle reel 2C is first stopped, when the watermelon is won, the watermelon symbol always appears in the middle stage of the middle reel 2C on the winning line. Therefore, it is possible to suggest that the watermelon is won at the first stop stage.

In this way, when the middle reel 2C is stopped first when the watermelon is won, the watermelon symbol is derived to the middle reel 2C on the winning line LN. Therefore, it is possible to prevent misidentification of the display result displayed on the winning line before the operation of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R.

[About the notification mode of various notification units]
Next, a notification mode of a predetermined notification unit (1BETLED14, 2BETLED15, 3BETLED16 (BET display unit), payout number display unit 12 (game auxiliary display), transmission area 51b (winning display unit)) will be described. FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining a notification mode of various notification units.

FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (c) show the notification states of various notification units when a middle bell is awarded as a small winning combination as a result of playing a game. Further, FIGS. 80 (d) to 80 (f) show the notification states of the various notification units when the initial state is reached due to the establishment of various conditions. For example, when the middle bell is won, nine medals are paid out as shown in FIG. 41. When the middle bell wins a prize, the BET display unit is maintained in the lit state as shown in FIG. 80 (a). Further, when a prize is won in the middle bell, as shown in FIG. 80 (b), the payout number display unit 12 is displayed with a value indicating nine pieces. The payout number display unit 12 is displayed by segment display. Further, when a prize is generated in the middle bell, as shown in FIG. 80 (c), it is indicated by lighting the reel LED 55 that the middle bell has won a prize. It can be confirmed from the winning display unit that the portion corresponding to the bell symbol (index symbol shown in FIG. 41) shown in the middle of the reels 2L to 2R emits light.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (c), when 30 seconds have elapsed as a predetermined time without BET operation after the small winning combination of the middle bell is generated, the various notification units are displayed in FIG. 80 (d). )-(F), the display mode changes to the initial state. For example, when 30 seconds have passed from the state of FIG. 80 (a), the display mode of the BET display unit changes to the LED off state shown in FIG. 80 (d). Further, the payout number display unit 12 changes from the display of "09" shown in FIG. 80 (b) to the state of "00" shown in FIG. 80 (e). Further, the winning display unit changes from the lighting state of the reel LED 55 shown in FIG. 80 (c) to the lighting state of the reel LED 55 shown in FIG. 80 (f).

Here, the elapsed time of 30 seconds may be timed by a timer (not shown) that starts counting after the display by paying out the small winning combination provided on the game control board 40 side is executed. Further, regarding the lighting time of the reel LED 55, the control of turning off the reel LED 55 may be executed based on the information regarding the timing of the timer transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91. The time when the small winning combination is won may be started from the time when the three reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, or from the time when the payout of medals is completed.

Here, 30 seconds shown as a predetermined time is the same time as the transition time to the specific mode. The specific mode is a mode in which a demonstration effect (demonstration effect) is executed. In the demonstration effect, for example, the characters and story contents appearing in the effect of the slot machine 1, the video explaining the effect to be executed, and the like flow in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51. In order to cancel the demo production as a specific mode, it is sufficient to insert a medal or perform a BET operation.

In the specific mode, the power saving mode may be entered after 30 seconds have elapsed as a predetermined time. The power saving mode is a mode in which the amount of light and the volume are reduced as compared with those during the game in order to suppress the power consumption in the slot machine 1 when the player is not playing the game. For example, in the power saving mode, the amount of light in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51 is reduced and the volume is set to none. Further, in the display area, the characters "power saving mode" indicating that the power saving mode is currently set are displayed. To cancel the power saving mode as a specific mode, a medal may be inserted or a BET operation may be performed.

In this way, the demo effect is executed 30 seconds after the end of the previous game. Therefore, it is possible to standardize the timer for timing 30 seconds from the small winning combination and the timer for timing the demo effect to be executed 30 seconds after the end of the previous game. Further, the power saving mode may be set after 30 seconds have passed since the end of the previous game. In this way, it is possible to standardize the timer for timing 30 seconds from the small winning combination and the timer for timing the power saving mode after 30 seconds have passed from the end of the previous game.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the setting is changed, the display states of the various notification units are changed from the display states shown in FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (c) to the display states shown in FIGS. It changes to the display state of the initial state shown. The setting change state is a state in which the set value can be changed by the reset / setting switch 38. A power supply box 100 is provided inside the housing 1a. The power box 100 is provided with a keyhole into which a clerk inserts a setting key in order to switch to a setting change state when the power is turned on (at startup). When the setting key owned by the clerk is inserted into the keyhole and the key is turned to the right, the setting key switch 37 is turned on. The state in which the setting key switch 37 is turned on is the setting change state. On the other hand, when the setting key is inserted into the keyhole and the key is turned counterclockwise, the setting key switch 37 is turned off.

Since the setting key switch 37 cannot be operated unless the front door 1b is unlocked and opened, a person other than the clerk who owns the door key cannot operate the setting key switch 37 from the outside. Further, since the setting key switch 37 cannot be operated unless the setting key is inserted into the keyhole, a person other than the clerk who owns the setting key cannot operate the setting key switch 37.

Further, the power supply box 100 has a setting switch 38 for changing the set value of the winning probability (payout rate) of the internal lottery in the setting change state, and a power switch 39 operated when the power is turned on / off. It is provided. Here, a state in which the set value can be confirmed by displaying the set value read from the RAM on the set value display 24 on the set value display 24 is referred to as a setting confirmation state.

The display state of the various notification units shown in FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (c) at the time of winning a small winning combination changes to the display state of FIGS. 80 (d) to (f) as the initial state by changing the setting. Change.

Further, when there is a settlement operation in which the credit and the set number of bets are settled and returned by pressing the settlement switch 10, the display states of the various notification units shown in FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (c) are shown in FIG. It changes to the display state of the initial state of 80 (d) to (f). Further, by the BET operation of setting the bet number by operating the MAXBET switch 6 or the like, the BET display unit changes from the lighting state of FIG. 80 (a) to the extinguishing state of FIG. ) Will be lit. Further, the payout number display unit 12 and the winning display unit are changed from the display state as shown in FIGS. 80 (b) and 80 (c) to the initial state as shown in FIGS. 80 (e) and 80 (f) by the BET operation.

Further, the slot machine 1 has a backup power supply. Therefore, even if a sudden power failure (for example, a power failure) occurs, the backup power is supplied to the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91, so that the information stored in the backup area for a predetermined period of time is stored. Can be retained. When the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 recover from the power failure, the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 display various notification units in FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (c) before the power failure based on the information and flags saved in the backup area. After recovering from the power failure by turning on the power again, the state is controlled again to the state shown in FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (c). Then, the various notification units are shown in FIGS. 80 (d) to 80 (f) after a lapse of 30 seconds from the end of the power failure recovery process for recovering from the power failure and the start of the game process for starting the game. It will be displayed. In addition, if a power failure occurs during the rotation of the reel, the reel is returned to the initial position after returning, and the various notification units complete the power failure recovery process for recovering from the power failure and start the game. After a lapse of 30 seconds from the start of the process, the display states of FIGS. 80 (d) to 80 (f) are displayed.

Here, the preparation that has been conventionally executed in order to know whether or not the set value has been changed from the closing of the hall (amusement park) on the previous day at the start of business on the next day will be described. The preparation is an act of winning a winning combination when the store is closed the day before and ending the game in a state where a number of "1" or more is displayed on the payout number display unit 12 (state of FIG. 80 (b)). .. As a result of such an act, if the value is maintained at the start of business the next day (state in FIG. 80 (b)), the setting has not been changed and the displayed content is "0" ( It turns out that the setting (state in FIG. 80 (e)) has been changed. Further, if the BET display unit and the winning display unit are maintained in the lit state at the start of business the next day, it is easily understood that the settings have not been changed.

As a countermeasure against such preparation, the clerk in the hall had to execute the game a plurality of times after the store was closed in order to set the display of the payout number display unit 12 to "0". Further, even if the display of the payout number display unit 12 can be set to "0" by the settlement operation or the BET operation, the settlement operation or the BET operation must be executed after the store is closed, which is troublesome. ..

In the present embodiment, in order to reduce the work load of the clerk in such a hall and prevent the preparation, a small winning combination is generated, and 30 seconds from the state where the number of medals to be paid out is displayed on the payout number display unit 12. Is executed, the display of the payout number display unit 12 is changed to "0", which is the initial state. Similarly, the BET operation unit and the winning display unit are also controlled so as to change from the lighting state to the initial state of turning off when 30 seconds have passed from the small winning combination winning.

[About the display pattern of the payout number display section]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining a display pattern of the payout number display unit (game auxiliary display) 12. As a display pattern of the payout number display unit 12, it can be displayed by a pattern as shown in FIG. 81. In the table of FIG. 81, the column at the time of winning the replay on the left side shows the state in the slot machine 1. Further, in the patterns A to C which are the display patterns of the payout number display unit 12, "initial" indicates the initial state of the display of the payout number display unit 12 (for example, FIG. 80 (e)), and is "maintained". ”Indicates a state in which the display of the payout number display unit 12 is maintained (for example, FIG. 80 (b)). The payout number display unit 12 is controlled to the "initial" or "maintenance" state indicated by "◯" in the table in the state of the slot machine 1. "X" in the table indicates an uncontrolled state. Further, "-" in the table is the initial state at the time of lever operation because the payout number display unit 12 has changed to the initial state at the time of BET operation in the operation of starting a series of games from BET operation to lever operation. It is shown that. Although the case where "0" is displayed on the payout number display unit 12 as the initial state is shown, the initial state may be indicated by a symbol other than 0, or a combination of 0 and the symbol (for example, "" 0. ") may be used, or the display may be turned off.

As shown in FIG. 81, in any of the patterns A to C, the payout number display unit 12 is in the initial state at the time of replay winning as a replay combination. Further, at the time of the settlement operation, the payout number display unit 12 is in the initial state in the A pattern and the B pattern, but the display of the payout number display unit 12 is maintained in the C pattern. Further, in a series of operations from the BET operation to the lever operation, in the A pattern, the display of the payout number display unit 12 is maintained during the BET operation, but the payout number display unit 12 is in the initial state during the lever operation. Further, in the B pattern and the C pattern, the payout number display unit 12 is in the initial state when the BET operation is performed, and remains in the initial state when the lever is operated.

Further, when 30 seconds have passed since the game was stopped, the payout number display unit 12 is in the initial state in the A pattern, and the display of the payout number display unit 12 is maintained in the B pattern and the C pattern. Further, after the setting change state (after default), the payout number display unit 12 becomes the initial state (default state) in any of the patterns A to C. Further, after the power failure is restored, the display of the payout number display unit 12 is maintained in the state before the power failure in any of the patterns A to C. The display state of the payout number display unit 12 is not limited to the patterns A to C, and may be a combination of any of the initial state and the state in which the display is maintained in each state.

[About rock-paper-scissors production]
Next, the details of the rock-paper-scissors production will be described with reference to FIG. 82. When the rock-paper-scissors effect is determined by the effect lottery, when the rock-paper-scissors effect is started, the accessory 2000 is displaced from the initial position (see FIG. 34) to the drive position (position in FIG. 82 (A)). Further, the arm member 300 hidden in the accessory 2000 is projected. In the rock-paper-scissors production, the character 2000 functions as an ally character.

As shown in FIG. 82 (A), the rock-paper-scissors effect is started by displaying a notification image such as "rock-paper-scissors chance" notifying that the rock-paper-scissors effect is started on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, the sub-control unit 91 electronically displays the enemy character image 400 as an enemy character in the area on the left side of the display area of the liquid crystal display 51. In this way, the enemy character image 400 and the character 2000 (friendly character) face each other in the left-right direction.

After that, the sub-control unit 91 outputs sounds such as "rock-paper-scissors" and "ken" from the speakers 53 and 54 in accordance with the time signatures of "rock-paper-scissors" and "rock-paper-scissors" as a fanning effect. Further, the sub-control unit 91 swings the arm member 300 of the accessory 2000 in the vertical direction in accordance with the beats of "Jan" and "Ken" as a fanning effect. At the same time, the sub-control unit 91 executes the determined fanning effect (any of no flame effect, small flame effect, and large flame effect) as the fanning effect. In addition, as a fanning effect, the enemy character image 400 is also displayed in a manner of waving his arm.

After the fanning effect is completed, the AT result effect as shown in FIG. 82 (C) is executed. The sub-control unit 91 outputs, for example, a voice such as "pon" from the speakers 53 and 54 in accordance with the beat of "pon" of rock-paper-scissors. Further, the sub-control unit 91 changes the finger member 311 of the arm member 300 of the accessory 2000 to any of goo, choki, and par, as shown in FIG. 82 (C), in accordance with the beat of "pon". .. As described above, the finger member 311 of the arm member 300 has a structure that can be changed to any of goo, choki, and par by the control of the sub control unit 91 as a decisive factor. FIG. 82 (C) shows an example in which the finger member 311 gives a choki as a decisive factor. Further, the sub-control unit 91 displays the effect image 320 according to the changed shape of the finger member 311 at a position where the accessory 2000 overlaps with the arm member 300. In the present embodiment, a shadow image showing the shadow of the arm member 300 is displayed as the effect image 320. This makes it possible to make the kimarite look three-dimensional. In the example of FIG. 82C, the effect image 320 imitating the kimarite of choki is displayed.

On the other hand, the enemy character image 400 is also changed to an image showing any of goo, choki, and par as a decisive factor. The sub-control unit 91 maintains the shape of the finger member 311 of the accessory 2000 after the change for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and also continues to display the enemy character image 400 that is making a decisive factor for the predetermined time. Let me. Further, although not shown in FIG. 82 (C), when the AT is won, an image such as "Rock-paper-scissors win! AT game 300 game GET!" Is displayed. On the other hand, when the AT is not won, an image such as "Rock-paper-scissors loses! Sorry!" Is displayed.

[About the difference in the display of the liquid crystal display 51 between the execution of the fanning effect and the execution of the startup process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the difference in the display of the liquid crystal display 51 between the execution of the fanning effect and the execution of the activation process will be described. FIG. 83 (A) shows the execution of the fanning effect, and FIG. 83 (B) shows the initial operation (S52) of the accessory 2000 during the execution of the activation process (see FIG. 71). ..

FIG. 83 (A-1) shows the display of the accessory 2000 and the liquid crystal display 51 during the execution of the fanning effect. FIG. 83 (A-2) is an omission of the accessory 2000 of FIG. 83 (A-1). As shown in FIGS. 83 (A-1) and 83 (A-2), a flame image 310, an enemy character image 400, and the character "rock-paper-scissors" are displayed as decorative displays during the fanning effect.

FIG. 83 (B-1) shows the display of the accessory 2000 and the liquid crystal display 51 during the execution of the activation process. FIG. 83 (B-2) is an omission of the accessory 2000 of FIG. 83 (B-1). As described in S52 of FIG. 71, in the activation process by the sub-control unit 91, a process of displacing the accessory 2000 to the drive position is executed as an initial operation of the accessory 2000. As shown in FIGS. 83 (B-1) and 83 (B-2), while the startup process is being executed, the decorative display shown in FIG. 83 (A-2) is not executed, and the characters "setting is being changed" (FIG. (See S56 of 71) is displayed. Note that no image of this character is displayed when the setting change state is not controlled (that is, when the setting start command is not transmitted in S24 of FIG. 70).

Further, although not particularly shown, as the initial operation of the accessory 2000 during the activation process, after the accessory 2000 waved the hand as shown in FIG. 83 (B-1) for 5 seconds, a predetermined deciding factor. (In this embodiment, goo) is issued. When the accessory 2000 makes the predetermined decision, the effect image 320 displayed during the rock-paper-scissors production is not displayed.

[About the main effects obtained by the second embodiment]
Next, the main effects obtained by the second embodiment will be described.

(1) According to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 83 (A), during the game (for example, during the fanning effect), when the accessory 2000 is displaced to the drive position, the decorative display (FIG. 82). The fun of the game can be improved by executing the flame image 310 of (B), the enemy character image 400, the display of the character "rock-paper-scissors", and the effect image 320 of FIG. 82 (C). If, during the initial operation of the game machine (during the activation process), the same decorative display as when the fanning effect is executed is executed, when the clerk or the like confirms the initial operation of the accessory 2000, The decorative display may hinder the confirmation of the initial operation of the accessory 2000. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), the decoration display is not executed during the initial operation (during the activation process) of the game machine. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the decorative display from hindering the confirmation of the accessory 2000, it is possible to facilitate the confirmation process of the accessory 2000.

(2) Further, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), the character "setting is being changed" which is not displayed during the game when the setting is changed during the initial operation (during startup processing). Is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the clerk or the like recognize that the setting is changed. Further, since the decorative display is not executed during the activation process, it is possible to prevent the decorative display from hindering the visibility of the characters "setting is being changed".

(3) By the way, conventionally, when a movable member such as an accessory 2000 is operated, a display means such as a liquid crystal display 51 can display an effect image or the like in accordance with the operation of the movable member. (For example, JP2013-208308A) has been disclosed. However, in the gaming machine described in this document, it is not possible to display the effect display according to the situation when the movable member operates, and the effect display of the movable member and the display means are linked. There was a problem that the effect was insufficient. The present embodiment has been devised in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing the effect of the effect of linking the movement of the movable body and the effect of the effect of the display means. Is. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 73, any one of a flameless effect, a small flame effect, and a large flame effect can be executed as the fanning effect. Further, depending on these effects, it is possible to prevent the flame image from being displayed or to make the size of the flame image different (different decorative displays can be displayed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect of linking the displacement of the accessory 2000 and the decorative display. Further, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-208308, it is not considered that the confirmation operation is in progress. Therefore, in the game machine described in this document, the effect of "the confirmation process of the accessory 2000 can be facilitated" and the visibility of the characters "setting being changed" are hindered by the decorative display. The effect of "can be prevented" cannot be obtained.

(4) By the way, conventionally, there is a game machine provided with a display means such as a liquid crystal display 51 and a movable member such as an accessory 2000. In such a game machine, when the movable member is displaced to a position where it overlaps with the display means, a predetermined image is displayed on the display means to emphasize the operation of the movable member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-099572). In the game machine described in this document, only a rough predetermined image is displayed in order to emphasize the operation of the movable member, and it is not possible to sufficiently enhance the interest of the game by the production using the movable member. The present embodiment has been devised in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present embodiment is to provide a game machine capable of further enhancing the game entertainment by directing using movable members.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 82 (C), the finger member 311 of the accessory 2000 can be changed into a goo, a choki, and a par, and an effect image 320 corresponding to the changed shape can be displayed. is there. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect of linking the change of the finger member 311 and the display of the effect image 320.

(5) By the way, conventionally, a gaming machine that gives a player some command (mission) during a game and notifies the player of the achievement of the mission when the mission is achieved during the game is disclosed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-158854). In the gaming machine described in this document, if the effect conditions predetermined as the mission include the operation of the movable member, the mission is achieved when the movable member operates due to a cause other than the effect operation. There was a case. The present embodiment has been devised in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine that prevents the achievement of a mission when a movable accessory operates due to a cause other than the effect operation.

In the present embodiment, among the 100 types of mission achievement conditions shown in FIG. 74, there is a mission for operating the accessory 2000 (for example, missions M3 and M5). When the mission achievement condition of mission M3 or mission M5 is satisfied, the accessory 2000 operates and the mission achievement notification is executed. However, when the accessory 2000 performs an operation different from the effect operation, the execution of the mission achievement notification is restricted (the mission achievement notification is not executed). In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71, in the activation process of the sub-control unit 91, the initial operation of the accessory is executed in S52, but the mission achievement notification is not executed based on this initial operation. If the mission achievement notification is executed during the initial operation of the game machine (during the activation process), when the clerk confirms the initial operation of the accessory 2000, the confirmation to the initial operation of the accessory 2000 is confirmed. There is a risk that the mission achievement notification will be hindered. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the mission achievement notification is not executed during the initial operation of the game machine (during the activation process). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the confirmation of the accessory 2000 from being hindered by the mission achievement notification, it is possible to facilitate the confirmation process of the accessory 2000.

(6) Further, there are a plurality of timings at which the accessory 2000 operates. In the present embodiment, the accessory 2000 operates when the mission achievement conditions of the accessory-related missions (missions M3 and M5) shown in FIG. 74 are satisfied, or when the predetermined accessory operating conditions are satisfied. Therefore, since the chances of operating the accessory 2000 can be increased, the interest of the game can be improved.

(7) Further, when the mission achievement condition of the accessory-related mission is satisfied (YES in S108 of FIG. 72), even if the accessory 2000 does not operate due to a failure of the accessory drive device 99a or the like (S124). YES), mission achievement notification is executed (S128). Therefore, it is possible to solve the "irrationality that the mission achievement notification is not executed because the accessory 2000 cannot operate due to a failure or the like even if the mission achievement condition of the accessory-related mission is satisfied". It is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

(8) By the way, as a conventional slot machine, a winning line related to the occurrence of a prize (result of a game) and an invalid line not related to the occurrence of a prize are set, and when a winning combination is won, a predetermined notification effect is produced. There is a document (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-083302) that discloses a winning combination that occurs when a winning symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination stops on the winning line. In addition, as a winning combination, when the winning symbol combination is set as a loose pattern and the winning symbol combination is stopped on the winning line, the alignment of the predetermined symbols is stopped on the invalid line, and the winning is generated. A role (for example, the upper bell) was provided. However, the notification effect executed in the slot machine described in this document suggests a predetermined symbol that stops on the invalid line, not a symbol that constitutes the winning symbol combination that stops on the winning line. As a result, there is a risk that the player may misidentify the predetermined symbol stopped on the invalid line as if it were the result of the game. The present embodiment has been devised in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present embodiment is to provide a slot machine that prevents the result of a game from being misunderstood.

Specifically, when the sub-control unit 91 executes an effect suggesting winning of the cherry lip, and the stop switch is operated at the timing when the pressing is successful, as shown in FIGS. 75A to 75C, , Cherry symbols are aligned on the winning line LN including the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C. In addition, the sub-control unit 91 executes an effect suggesting winning of the cherry lip, and as shown in FIGS. 75 (d) to 75 (f), when the stop switch is operated at the timing when the pressing failure occurs, the winning line While the replay symbols are aligned on the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C on the LN, the cherry symbol is derived on the right reel 2R on the winning line LN. In this way, even when the stop switch is operated at a timing different from the success timing, a display result indicating that the cherry lip has been won is derived on the right reel 2R on the winning line LN. Therefore, it can be shown that the display result displayed on the winning line LN is a cherry lip winning, and the display result displayed on the winning line LN is mistaken as the display result displayed on the invalid line. Can be prevented.

(9) As shown in FIG. 75 (c), when the stop switches 8L to 8R are operated at the timing when the push is successful at the time of winning the strong cherry lip, the left reel 2L and the middle reel on the winning line LN Cherry patterns are available not only on 2C but also on the right reel 2R. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the cherry symbol is derived to the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C, the cherry symbol can also be derived to the right reel 2R, as shown in FIGS. 75 (c) and 75 (f). In addition, the control contents for the right reel 2R can be standardized.

(10) Further, as shown in FIG. 78 (b), when the right reel 2R is stopped first at the time of winning the cherry lip, the cherry symbol is derived to the right reel 2R on the winning line LN. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display result displayed on the winning line LN before the operation of the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C from being mistakenly recognized as the display result displayed on the invalid line.

(11) Further, as shown in FIGS. 75 (c) and 75 (f), the cherry symbol is not derived to the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C due to the failure of the push, and the cherry symbol is drawn to the right reel 2R on the winning line LN. Even if is derived, the reel player will win as a prize for the strong cherry lip. Therefore, even if the cherry symbol is not derived to the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C, a prize is generated, so that the interest of the game is improved.

(12) By the way, as a conventional slot machine, measures are taken to prevent the preparation to grasp whether or not the setting change related to the advantage and disadvantage of the player is executed between the closing of the hall (game hall) and the start of business the next day. There was a document (eg, Japanese Patent No. 5757489) disclosing the slot machine taken. Here, the preparation is an act of winning a winning combination when the store is closed the day before and ending the game with a number of "1" or more displayed on the display device. By such an act, if the value is maintained at the start of business the next day, it means that the setting has not been changed, and if the displayed content is "0", it means that the setting has been changed. .. In this document, in order to prevent such preparation, a technique has been disclosed in which the display content can be set to "0" by a simpler medal settlement operation or BET operation than before. However, even in the slot machines described in this document, in order to prevent the preparation, an operation by a clerk is required, which takes time and effort. The present embodiment has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present embodiment is to provide a slot machine that prevents preparation while reducing the work load of a clerk.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 80, 30 seconds have passed since the small winning combination was generated and the number of medals to be paid out was displayed on the payout number display unit 12, so that the payout number display unit 12 is displayed. Is being controlled to change to "0", which is the initial state. Similarly, the BET display unit and the winning display unit are controlled so that the lighting state changes to the initial state of turning off when 30 seconds have passed from the small winning combination winning. In this way, it is possible to prevent the preparation while reducing the work load of the clerk in the hall.

(13) Further, as shown in FIGS. 80 (b) and 80 (e), the payout number display unit 12 notifies the information regarding the number of medals to be paid out. In this way, it is possible to take measures against the preparation for the payout number display unit 12 on which the player can easily execute the preparation.

(14) Further, as shown in FIG. 80, when the power of the slot machine 1 is turned off and the power is turned on again with the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display unit 12, 30 seconds have elapsed. By doing so, the display mode of the payout number display unit 12 is controlled to display "0". In this way, it is possible to control the notification state of the payout number display unit 12 to a state in which "0" is displayed by the power-on operation at the time of opening the store without waiting for the passage of time when the store is closed.

(15) Further, the demo effect will be executed 30 seconds after the end of the previous game. Therefore, it is possible to standardize the timer for timing 30 seconds from the small winning combination and the timer for timing the demo effect to be executed 30 seconds after the end of the previous game.

(16) Further, the power saving mode may be set after 30 seconds have passed since the end of the previous game. In this way, it is possible to standardize the timer for timing 30 seconds from the small winning combination and the timer for timing the power saving mode after 30 seconds have passed from the end of the previous game.

(17) Further, as shown in FIGS. 80 (b) and 80 (e), when 30 seconds have passed with the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display unit 12, "0" is displayed on the payout number display unit 12. Controlled by state. In this way, by waiting for 30 seconds to elapse, the display state of the payout number display unit 12 can be changed to the same display mode after the end of the setting change state without the operation of the clerk.

[Third Embodiment]
The third embodiment applies the idea described in the second embodiment to the pachinko gaming machine as much as possible. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, a big hit lottery is executed when the gaming medium (game ball) passes through a predetermined starting area. The jackpot lottery is a lottery that determines one of "not controlled by the jackpot", "controlled by the jackpot without probability change", and "controlled by the jackpot with probability variation". The jackpot state is an advantageous state in which a round game in which the variable winning device is opened is executed a predetermined number of times. The jackpot with probability variation means that the jackpot is controlled to the probability variation state after the end of the jackpot state. The probability change state is a state in which the probability of winning a big hit is higher than that of a predetermined state (a state in which the probability change state is not controlled).

In addition, an effect display device capable of displaying various images is provided near the center of the game area. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine is equipped with a character 2000, and can also perform rock-paper-scissors production. The execution opportunity of the rock-paper-scissors production is a big hit lottery in this embodiment. Further, in the activation process of the pachinko gaming machine, the initial operation of the accessory 2000 is executed (the process corresponding to S52 in FIG. 71). An error detection process for detecting the presence or absence of an error is executed in each part of the main control unit and each part of the sub control unit. Further, in the second embodiment, in the example of FIG. 83, the characters "setting is being changed" are displayed during the initial operation. In the third embodiment, the error detection process is executed during the initial operation, and when it is detected that there is no error, the character "no error" is displayed. Further, in the table of FIG. 73, FIG. 73 (A) is a table used when the big hit is not won in the big hit lottery, and FIG. 73 (B) is a table used when the big hit is won in the big hit lottery. is there. Further, in FIG. 73 (B), "the number of granted AT games is 1-150" is replaced with "when the jackpot without probability change is won", and "the number of granted AT games is 151-300". , "When the jackpot with probability change is won" is replaced. Even with such a pachinko machine, the effects described in the second embodiment can be achieved.

[Modification example 4]
Although the main embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. Hereinafter, a modified example 4 of the above-described embodiment applicable to the present invention will be described.

[Information displayed during initial operation]
In the second embodiment, the specific information displayed on the liquid crystal display during the execution of the startup process is the character "setting is being changed" in the second embodiment and "no error" in the third embodiment. Explained as a character. However, this specific information may be any information as long as it is not displayed during the game. For example, in the startup process of the second embodiment, the error detection process for detecting the presence or absence of an error is executed, and when it is detected that no error exists, the character "no error" is displayed. May be good. Further, in the error detection process, when the error detection process is executed by using the checksum, characters such as "checksum OK" may be displayed as specific information.

Further, the specific information of at least one of the second embodiment and the third embodiment may be other information. For example, characters such as "initial operation is being executed" may be displayed as specific information. Further, the specific information may not be displayed during the initial operation.

[About benefits]
In the above-mentioned example, as a privilege, the value that directly affects the payout rate of medals and pachinko balls, such as AT winning and the number of AT games that can be controlled by AT, is illustrated. However, the privilege may be a value that improves the degree of advantage for the player, and may be, for example, a value that does not directly affect the medal payout rate. Specifically, when a high-probability state of winning an AT with a higher probability than usual is provided in the AT lottery, execution of a probability suggestion effect for suggesting whether or not the current state is a high-probability state. , Execution of premier effect with voice on liquid crystal display 51 (special character appearance, execution of special bonus effect during the next bonus), execution of set value suggestion effect to suggest the set value, By collecting a certain number, points can be given that can be exchanged for services specified at the game store where the slot machine 1 is installed, and a two-dimensional code that allows you to download privilege videos and privilege information on a predetermined website is displayed on the liquid crystal display. It may be displayed on the vessel 51.

Further, although the number of AT games is illustrated as an example of the privilege, the privilege related to AT is not limited to this, and for example, the right (navistock) that allows the AT to control a predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games) may be a privilege. Good. In addition, when the number of times the navigation effect can be executed is determined and the AT is controlled until the navigation effect is executed for the determined number of times the navigation effect can be executed, the number of times the navigation effect can be executed is also a privilege. Good. Further, for example, when the upper limit grant amount is determined and the AT is controlled until the granted game value (the number of medals paid out) reaches the determined upper limit grant amount, the upper limit grant amount may be a privilege. Further, when the AT is controlled from the time when the predetermined AT start condition is satisfied until the predetermined AT end condition is satisfied and the continuous lottery for whether or not to continue the AT is performed when the AT end condition is satisfied, the continuation is continued. The continuation probability determined to continue in the lottery may be a privilege.

[About the aspect of the character]
In the present embodiment, as a mode in which the accessory 2000 (finger member 311) can be changed, as shown in FIG. 82 (C) or the like, it has been described as being one of goo, choki, and par. However, the modifiable aspect of the accessory 2000 may be another concept. The mode in which the accessory 2000 can be changed may be, for example, a driving position of the accessory 2000. For example, when the driving distance (moving distance) of the accessory 2000 when the first privilege is given is L1, and the second privilege which is more advantageous than the first privilege (the amount of the privilege is large) is given. Let L2 be the driving distance (moving distance) of the accessory 2000. According to such a configuration, the moving distance of the accessory 2000 allows the player to recognize the advantage of the privilege given, so that the moving distance can be attracted attention.

Further, the effect image of the accessory 2000 can be displayed with different decorations according to the moving distance of the accessory 2000. For example, when the driving position of the accessory 2000 is the driving position where the driving distance is L1, the effect image is displayed at the driving position. Further, when the driving position of the accessory 2000 is the driving position where the driving distance is L2, the effect image is displayed at the driving position.

According to such a configuration, the moving distance of the accessory 2000 can be diversified, and the decorative display can be executed according to the changed mode of the accessory 2000. , The effect of the effect linked with the decorative display can be improved.

Further, the operation of the accessory is not limited to the one in which the accessory is displaced, and also includes the one in which the accessory is not displaced but at least a part of the accessory is changed.

[About the operation different from the production operation of the character 2000]
In the present embodiment, the initial operation in the activation process (see S52 in FIG. 71) is illustrated as an operation different from the effect operation of the accessory 2000. However, an operation different from the effect operation of the accessory 2000 may be another operation.

For example, when the AT lottery is executed and the AT is not won in the AT lottery, the accessory 2000 located at the initial position moves in the driving position direction, but does not move to the driving position and is on the way. It is also possible to execute a specific control that returns to the initial position with. The specific control is, in other words, the control of Gase. The operation different from the effect operation of the accessory 2000 may be an operation of moving the accessory 2000 halfway by this specific control.

Further, due to a failure of the accessory driving device 99a or the like, the accessory 2000 may operate even though the conditions for moving the accessory 2000 are not satisfied. The operation different from the effect operation of the accessory 2000 may be the operation of the accessory 2000 at the time of failure of the accessory driving device 99a.

Further, when the game machine is vibrated from the outside by a player or the like, the character 2000 operates even though the conditions for operating the accessory 2000 are not satisfied. There is. The operation different from the effect operation of the accessory 2000 may be the operation of the accessory 2000 when such vibration is applied.

[About mission achievement notification]
The slot machine of the second embodiment has been described as being composed of only physical reels (hereinafter, referred to as main reels). However, a sub reel may be provided in addition to the main reel. The sub reels are provided according to the number of main reels, for example, three sub reels are provided. Further, the fluctuation control and stop control of the sub reel are executed corresponding to the fluctuation control and stop control of the main reel. Further, the sub reel may be a reel electronically displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, or may be a physical reel. Further, each identification information of the main reel is a figure that is difficult for the player to identify (for example, a figure that is all similar), while each identification information of the sub reel is a figure that is easy for the player to identify (for example, FIG. 35). It may be a figure as shown in. According to such a configuration, the player advances the game while observing the fluctuation and stop of the sub reel. In addition, the mission achievement notification is to display a mission achievement character such as "Mission M1 achieved! Congratulations!" When the mission M1 is achieved.

In the case of such a configuration, when the sub reel is fluctuating, the mission achievement notification is executed with priority over the fluctuation display of the sub reel, and when the display result is derived by stopping the sub reel, the display result is obtained. Priority is given to the mission achievement notification.

For example, "When the sub reel is fluctuating, the mission achievement character is displayed on the layer in front of the sub reel, while when the display result is derived by stopping the sub reel, the area where the display result is displayed. The specific display control of "displaying the mission achievement character in a predetermined mode (for example, small)" may be executed in a region different from the above.

According to such a configuration, the mission achievement character is displayed in an easy-to-see manner during the fluctuation of the sub reel, which is not so important to the player, so that the player can recognize the mission achievement character. On the other hand, when the display result of the sub reel, which is important for the player, is derived, the mission achievement character is displayed in an easy-to-see manner so as not to interfere with the visibility of the displayed result of the derived sub reel. be able to.

Further, in the second embodiment, the specific display control may be executed after the main reel is provided without the sub reel. In this case, it is preferable to execute the specific display control in a manner that does not hinder the player's eyes while the main reel is changing. For example, the mission achievement characters may be displayed on the front of the main reel in a light density. Further, when the display result is derived by stopping the main reel, the mission achievement character may be displayed in a predetermined mode (for example, small).

Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment may also execute the specific display control.

[About decorative display]
(1) The decorative display of the present embodiment has been described as being executed when a part of the accessory 2000 overlaps with the liquid crystal display 51. However, the decorative display may be executed when all of the accessory 2000 overlaps with the liquid crystal display 51. Further, the decorative display may be executed when the accessory 2000 does not overlap with the liquid crystal display 51.

(2) The decorative display of the present embodiment has been described as a process of displaying a specific image (in the example of FIG. 83, an image of a flame image 310 and an enemy character image 400, etc.) on the liquid crystal display 51. However, the decorative display does not have to be a process of displaying an image. For example, a light emitting board may be used in which predetermined information (for example, the character "chance") is displayed by emitting light. When such a configuration is adopted, the decorative display may be a process of causing the light emitting board to emit light.

(3) In the present embodiment, it has been described that the process executed with the driving of the accessory 2000 is a decorative display. However, the process executed with the driving of the accessory 2000 may be the execution of the accessory effect. The accessory effect may be an effect that includes at least one of an effect that displays a predetermined image, an effect that outputs a predetermined effect sound, and an effect that causes the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined mode.

For example, when the accessory effect is an effect that outputs a predetermined sound, the control described with reference to FIG. 83 has the following configuration. During the fanning effect, the accessory 2000 is driven and the effect sound is output. Further, during the execution of the activation process (initial operation), the accessory 2000 is driven, but the effect sound is not output. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent "the effect sound output by the accessory effect from hindering the confirmation to the accessory 2000", so that the confirmation process of the accessory 2000 can be facilitated.

[About reel arrangement]
In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35, the cherry symbol is always arranged within 5 frames within the pullable range on the right reel 2R. Therefore, when the cherry lip was won, it was possible to always derive the cherry symbol from the right reel 2R on the winning line LN. However, in addition to the right reel 2R, at least one of the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C may be arranged with the cherry symbol within a pullable range. By adopting such a reel arrangement, various controls can be supported.

For example, in the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R, the cherry symbol may be arranged within a pullable range. With such a reel arrangement, if the left symbol is missed when the strong cherry lip is won, the replay-cherry-cherry symbol combination can be derived. In this way, the cherry lip winning can be shown more clearly. In addition, if the left symbol is missed when the weak cherry lip is won, it can be shown that the strong cherry lip is missed by deriving the symbol combination of replay-replay-cherry. Further, for example, when the replay symbols are likely to be aligned on the invalid line LM4, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the cherry rip has been won by deriving the cherry symbol in the middle stage of the middle reel 2C. By changing the symbol arrangement in this way, it is possible to correspond to various derivation displays, and it is possible to flexibly execute the control suitable for the machine.

[About announcement production]
In the second embodiment, it has been described that the effect using the character image is executed as the notification effect. However, the notification effect may be controlled to light the effect LED 52, the reel LED 55, or the like, and may be indicated by the lighting color. Further, the notification effect is not executed when the start switch 7 is operated, but may be executed at any timing in one game. For example, it may be suggested by making the LED emit red light that all reels have won the cherry lip after stopping.

[About push order]
In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75, it is derived even when the same lottery target combination is won by either the timing when the pressing is successful or the timing when the pressing is unsuccessful. The design combination was different. However, when the same lottery target combination is won, the symbol combinations derived depending on the pushing order (operation procedure) may be different.

For example, replay-replay-cherry and cherry-cherry-cherry are set as winning combinations as a symbol combination at the time of winning a strong cherry lip. Then, as the push order, the left first stop is set as the correct answer procedure, and the middle and right first stops are set as the incorrect answer procedure. In such a case, if the left first stop is executed when the strong cherry lip is won, the cherry-cherry-cherry is preferentially drawn in, and if the middle or right first stop is executed, the replay- Replay-Cherry may be preferentially drawn in. If the cherry symbols are always placed within the pull-in range on all reels, the cherry-cherry-cherry can always be derived when the correct answer procedure is used. Further, the cherry lip winning may be confirmed at the position of the cherry symbol on the left reel 2L, and which of the strong cherry lip, the weak cherry lip, and the middle cherry lip may be determined.

Further, the display result which is the correct answer procedure may be derived only when the variable display of the symbol is stopped in a specific pressing order and the operation is operated at a specific timing.

[About the number of payouts]
In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75, it is shown that the winning is generated at any timing of the timing at which the pressing is successful and the timing at which the pressing is unsuccessful. However, the number of medals to be paid out may be different depending on the timing at which the pressing is successful and the timing at which the pressing is unsuccessful. For example, when the symbol is derived at the timing when the pressing is successful, the number of payouts may be larger than that when the symbol is derived at the timing when the pressing is unsuccessful. Also, regarding the push order, the number of payouts may be larger in the correct answer procedure than in the incorrect answer procedure. Further, the number of medals to be paid out may be the same at the timing when the pressing is successful and the timing when the pressing is unsuccessful.

[Regarding the prescribed prize]
In the second embodiment, a replaying role such as a cherry lip is illustrated as a predetermined prize, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a small winning combination accompanied by a medal may be used. In this case, the small winning combination as the predetermined prize may be composed of the same symbol combination as the cherry lip and watermelon shown in the second embodiment. In such a case, the identification information on the winning line LN becomes the specific identification information (cherry symbol) as the display result of the right reel 2R which is the specific variable display unit among the plurality of variable display units regardless of the timing and the pressing order. The display result may be derived. For example, when a cherry, which is a small role as a predetermined prize, is won, a prize suggestion effect of the cherry is executed. Then, when the left reel 2L is stopped at the timing when the push is successful, the cherry symbol may be derived on the winning line LN of the left reel 2L and three medals may be paid out. Further, when the left reel 2L is stopped at the timing when the push failure occurs (when the cherry symbol is dropped on the winning line LN of the left reel 2L), the medal may not be paid out. However, even if the cherry symbol is dropped on the winning line LN of the left reel 2L, the cherry symbol can be stopped on the winning line LN of the right reel 2R regardless of the timing (for example, replay-replay). -Since the cherries are aligned with the winning line LN), it is possible to prevent misunderstanding between the winning suggestion effect of winning the cherry and the display result. Even if the small role is missed, the medals may be paid out not a little as compared with the case where the small role is not missed. Further, the same number of medals may be paid out regardless of whether the small winning combination is missed or the small winning combination is not missed.

[Regarding the specific identification information that can be derived on the predetermined line as the display result of the predetermined variable display unit]
In the second embodiment, as the specific identification information that can be derived on the predetermined line as the display result of the predetermined variable display unit, an example in which the symbol of the right reel among the symbol combinations that generate the cherry lip is described has been described. However, the specific identification information that can be derived on the predetermined line as the display result of the predetermined variable display unit may be a symbol that is not related to the occurrence of the predetermined winning. That is, the predetermined winning may be generated regardless of the identification information stopped on other reels by stopping the specific identification information on some reels. In this case, the display result of the predetermined variable display unit may be generated. The specific identification information that can be derived on the predetermined line may be a symbol that stops at another reel. More specifically, for example, the predetermined winning may be any of the cherry-ANY-ANY and the lip-ANY-ANY. Even in this case, if the predetermined winning prize is won, the reel control is performed so that the cherry symbol of the right reel 2R is always pulled onto the winning line LN, and the display result displayed on the winning line LN is performed. Can be prevented from being mistaken as a display result displayed on the invalid line.

[About the specified line]
In the second embodiment, when the stop operation is executed at the timing when the pressing is successful, a specific symbol (cherry symbol) is displayed on the winning line LN as a predetermined line, and at the timing when the pressing fails. When the stop operation was executed, a specific symbol (cherry symbol) was displayed on the winning line LN only on the right reel. However, the predetermined line may be an invalid line instead of the winning line. Then, when the stop operation is executed at the timing when the pressing is successful, a specific symbol is displayed on the invalid line, and when the stop operation is executed at the timing when the pressing fails, the specific symbol is displayed on the invalid line. A specific symbol may be displayed on the.

[Reel stop timing]
In the second embodiment, when the right reel 2R is first stopped when the cherry lip is won, the cherry symbol is derived to the right reel 2R on the winning line LN. However, even if the right reel 2R is not stopped first, the cherry symbol may be derived to the right reel 2R on the winning line LN. For example, the cherry symbol may be derived to the right reel 2R on the winning line LN even when the right reel 2R is stopped second at the first stop.

[About winning suggestion production]
In the second embodiment, the main control unit 41 may determine the winning suggestion effect instead of the sub control unit 91 determining the winning suggestion effect. For example, when the AT lottery is performed by winning the simultaneous winning combination in the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 performs a process for executing the BB winning and the winning suggestion effect suggesting whether or not the AT has been won at a predetermined timing. May be done. As the winning suggestion effect, for example, a freeze effect that delays the progress of the game for a predetermined period when the start switch 7 is operated may be provided. During the freeze effect, the reels 2L to 2R are rotated in a predetermined mode to execute a pseudo game in which a specific symbol combination is temporarily stopped. The simulated game can be executed a plurality of times during the freeze effect. The freeze effect is not limited to the one executed when the start switch 7 is operated, but when the first stop operation is performed or the third stop operation is performed, the display result is derived and one game is completed. It may be executed at times.

In addition, the reliability of winning the BB or AT is highest in the freeze effect, followed by the continuous hit effect, the button effect, and the character B effect, and the winning suggestion effect is the lowest so that the character A effect is the lowest. The ratio may be set so that the type is determined. It should be noted that the effect to be executed is not limited to the one in which one winning suggestion effect is determined, and a plurality of winning suggestion effects may be determined. Further, the predetermined timing for executing the winning suggestion effect is not limited to this, and is determined by the main control unit 41 from a plurality of timings (more specifically, the main control unit 41 notifies the result by the AT winning suggestion effect). The timing may be the number of games (for example, any of 0 to 32 games) from the games won by the specific lottery target combination, which is determined by a random number lottery or the like). The main control unit 41 outputs a command for specifying the type of the winning suggestion effect to the sub control unit 91 at a predetermined timing for executing the winning suggestion effect, and if the winning suggestion effect is a freeze effect, the said The process for freeze effect may be executed. The winning suggestion effect other than the freeze effect may be determined by the sub-control unit 91 as described in the second embodiment.

[About red 7 design]
In the second embodiment, the case where the cherry symbol stops at any of the winning line LNs when any of the cherry rips is won has been described. However, when the cherry lip is won, it is not necessary to derive the cherry symbol on any of the winning line LNs. For example, there may be a case where the cherry symbol does not stop on the effective line in FIG. 76 (c) when the middle cherry lip is won (when the cherry symbol is not derived on the upper right reel). In such a case, the red 7 symbol is a symbol common to the cherry symbol in terms of the red aspect. Therefore, when the red 7 symbol stops on the winning line LN, even if the cherry symbol is not derived, the winning suggestion effect suggesting the winning of the cherry lip at the time of winning the cherry lip (for example, the red character image). (Notification by red LED) can be executed. As described above, since there are related symbols (designs having a common color) on the winning line LN, it is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying even if the winning suggestion effect is executed.

[About the state at RT3]
In the second embodiment, during RT3, the maintenance rips 1 to 3 may be read out as lottery target combinations to be drawn internally. As a result, for example, in the case where the RT3 is controlled even though the AT is non-AT, when the maintenance rips 1 to 3 are won, the fall rip can be won by the operation procedure to facilitate the fall to the RT1.

[About the notification unit]
In the second embodiment, a BET display unit, a payout number display unit 12, and a winning display unit are shown as notification units. However, the notification unit may be indicated by another part in the slot machine 1. For example, the effect LED 52 may be used to notify the small winning combination by its lighting color so that the lighting is extinguished after a lapse of a predetermined time.

Further, the second embodiment may be applied to only one of the notification units. For example, the second embodiment may be applied only to the payout number display unit 12 as the notification unit.

[About the initial state]
In the second embodiment, as the initial state of the notification unit, a display indicating “0” and a display in which the lighting is erased are shown. However, the initial state of the display state of the notification unit does not indicate "0", and may be a display that is not displayed in the normal state. Further, instead of turning off the lights completely, the brightness of the display may be reduced and the display may be dim.

[About power failure]
In the second embodiment, when a power failure occurs in the slot machine 1, it is displayed in the display mode of the notification unit after the power failure is restored and before the power failure occurs, and the display mode becomes the initial state after 30 seconds have passed. showed that. However, the display mode of the notification unit is set to the initial state based on the fact that the time before the power failure occurs and the total value of the counted timer value and the timer value after the power failure is restored is 30 seconds. It may be.

[About specific mode]
In the second embodiment, the time for shifting to the specific mode and the time for the display mode of the notification unit to be in the initial state from the time of winning the small winning combination are the same. However, these two periods do not have to be the same.

[Setting confirmation status]
In the second embodiment, a case where the display state of various notification units changes to the initial state when the setting change state in which the set value can be changed by the reset / setting switch 38 is shown is shown. However, the display state of the various notification units may be changed to the initial state when the setting confirmation state in which the setting value after the setting change state can be confirmed is reached.

[About off]
In the second embodiment, the following control may be executed when the deviation occurs. In the case of deviation, the payout number display unit 12 and the winning display unit in FIG. 80 remain in the initial state, but the BET operation unit may maintain the lighting display state. Then, the display mode of the BET operation unit may be turned off 30 seconds after the disconnection. When the BET operation unit is in the lit state, if a power failure occurs, the lit state may be maintained after recovery, and the light may be turned off after the setting change state, the settlement operation, and the BET operation. ..

[About the replay role]
In the second embodiment, the following control may be executed when the re-game combination is won. For example, when a replay prize, which is a replay combination, occurs, the payout number display unit 12 remains in the initial state, but the BET operation unit is controlled to be lit immediately after being turned off once. In addition, the winning display unit is controlled to be lit. In such a state, the winning display unit may be turned off after 30 seconds have passed. It is preferable that the BET operation unit is controlled to be lit even after 30 seconds have passed. Further, in the setting change state, the BET operation unit and the winning display unit may be controlled to the initial state. Further, at the time of winning the replay, the BET operation and the settlement operation may be controlled so as not to be accepted. It should be noted that the BET operation and the settlement operation may be controlled so as to be accepted at the time of winning the replay. Further, if a power failure occurs at the time of winning a replay, the lighting state before the power failure may be maintained. If a power failure occurs at the time of winning the replay, the light may be turned off to return. In such a case, the LEDs of the 1BETLED14, 2BETLED15, and 3BETLED16 may be controlled to be lit when the player inserts a medal (when one is detected) or when the BET operation is executed. In this way, even if the replay prize is awarded when the store is closed and the game is completed, the lights are controlled to be turned off when the store is opened, so that preparation can be prevented.

[Advantageous state]
In the above-mentioned example, as an advantageous state, a big bonus (BB) or AT in which the winning probability of a small winning combination is higher than that in a predetermined state is exemplified for a slot machine, but it may be an advantageous state for a player. This is not limited to this, and an example of a slot machine will be described below.

Advantageous states include, for example, regular bonus () and replay time (RT) in which the probability of winning a predetermined winning combination is high, the concentration state of small winning combination, and the pull-in range of at least one reel becomes narrower than usual. At the same time, the challenge time (CT), which allows the generation of all small wins in each game, and the winning probability of the winning wins are not changed, but the operation procedure for winning the winning small wins is performed for a predetermined period ( For example, it may be a pseudo-bonus that notifies over (until 50 games are exhausted). In addition, there may be a state in which the probability of being controlled by these advantageous states is high, a state in which the probability of being controlled in the freeze state is high, and the number of games such as the number of AT games is high. An advantageous state different from the above embodiment may be set, such as a state in which the game is added and a state in which the number of additional games in the AT is likely to be increased. In addition, it is indirectly advantageous for the player, such as a condition for obtaining a privilege on the communication network and a state in which the probability of satisfying the condition for executing a premium effect (freeze effect, premium effect, etc.) is high. It may be a special privilege or a state of improving the interest of the game. Further, the permissible determination means for determining whether or not to allow the transition to the advantageous state is not limited to the internal lottery process, and may be a means for determining regardless of the winning combination.

[About production and notification]
In the above-described example, an example in which the liquid crystal display 51 is used to perform an effect or notification is given. For example, the speakers 53, 54 and the back lamp arranged on the back side (inside) of the reel (reel LED 55 of the above embodiment) ), A transmissive liquid crystal display arranged on the front side of the reel (a liquid crystal display configured so that the reel can be visually recognized), lamps and LEDs attached to the front door 1b, vibration of the stop switch, and surroundings of the stop switch. The effect may be executed by a means different from the above-described embodiment, such as blowing air from the air or changing the temperature of the stop switch.

[About AT]
In the above example of the slot machine, an example in which the main control unit 41 executes the control related to the AT has been described, but the control related to the AT executed by the main control unit 41 includes the execution of the AT lottery. The AT lottery may include a determination of winning or non-winning of the AT lottery, a determination of whether or not to stock the number of AT games, a determination of the number of AT games, a lottery for adding the number of AT games, and the like. Further, as a control related to AT, control of a high probability state of AT lottery can be mentioned. To control the high probability state of the AT lottery, control that the winning probability of the AT lottery becomes high, control that shortens the period until the AT is controlled according to the result of the internal lottery, the winning probability of the additional lottery, and the game. Includes controls that give preferential treatment to numbers. Further, as the control related to the AT, it is possible to control the AT when the specified number of games have been digested. The time when the specified number of games is exhausted includes the time when the number of ceiling games is reached and the time when the number of games determined by lottery is reached. Further, as the control related to AT, there is a control for setting a precursory period. The control for setting the precursor period includes, for example, a control for executing the production of 0 to 32 games in the precursor period before the start of the AT. Further, as a control related to AT, there is a control for giving a penalty. Controls that grant penalties include determining the content of the penalty, determining or setting the penalty period. Further, as the control related to the AT, the main control unit 41 may control the lighting of the lamp or the LED indicating that the AT is in progress.

Further, as the control related to the AT, the main control unit 41 may control the lighting of the lamps and LEDs for executing the navigation effect. Further, the sub control unit 91 may execute the navigation effect in conjunction with the main control unit 41 executing the navigation effect.

When the main control unit 41 executes the control related to the AT, it is preferable that the processing of the main control unit 41 is subordinate to the main control unit 41 and executed by a control unit subordinate to the main control unit 41. .. For example, the reel stop control may be executed by a control unit provided on a board other than the game control board, and the main control unit 41 transfers the operation signal of the stop switch to the control unit. In this way, by causing the lower control unit to control the main control unit 41, it is possible to prevent insufficient capacity of the ROM 41b and RAM 41c and insufficient processing capacity of the main CPU 41a when performing control related to the AT.

Further, in the second embodiment, the main control unit 41 executes the control related to the AT described above, but the sub control unit 91 may execute the control. The sub control unit 91 performs, for example, an AT lottery process or an additional lottery process based on a command from the main control unit 41, and a process for controlling the AT according to the result, a process for executing a navigation effect, and the like. May be done.

[About setting change status and setting confirmation status]
Regarding the setting change state, the setting may be changed to the setting change state on the condition of "power ON" + "setting key switch ON" + "front door open detection". As a result, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized setting change when the front door is not opened. In addition, once the setting change state is entered, the setting change state is maintained regardless of the open / closed state of the front door until the end condition for ending the setting change state (the setting key switch is turned off after the setting value is confirmed) is satisfied. You may try to do it. As a result, even if the front door is closed during the setting change state, the setting change state is not terminated, so that it is possible to prevent the trouble of shifting to the setting change state again.

Further, the setting confirmation state may be shifted to the setting confirmation state on the condition of "setting key switch ON" + "front door open detection". As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized setting confirmation when the front door is not opened. In addition, once the setting confirmation state is entered, the setting confirmation state is maintained regardless of the open / closed state of the front door until the end condition (setting key switch OFF operation) for ending the setting confirmation state is satisfied. May be good. As a result, even if the front door is closed during the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state is not terminated, so that it is possible to prevent the trouble of shifting to the setting confirmation state again.

A configuration example in which the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above are combined will be described. The configuration example described below is a configuration example in which the second embodiment is combined based on the first embodiment.

As described in the first embodiment, the sub control unit 91 operates as the confirmation operation control means, and performs the confirmation operation of the movable means 901 to 903 under a predetermined condition. The predetermined condition is, for example, when the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on, when an operation error of the movable means 901 to 903 is detected, or when it is desired to confirm the operation or the initial position of the movable means 901 to 903. .. Therefore, the confirmation operation control means can perform the confirmation operation not only when the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the movable means 901 moves between the initial position 911 and the movable position 921. The movable means 902 moves between the initial position 912 and the movable position 922. The movable means 903 moves between the initial position 913 and the movable position 923.

The decorative display corresponding to the movable means is the effect image shown in FIGS. 5 (C) to 5 (E) in the first embodiment. This decorative display is not executed during the initial setting of the effect control board 90 (during the confirmation operation), as shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 5C to 5E, when the initial setting is completed and the position is displaced to a position other than the initial position, the decorative display is executed.

As described in the first embodiment, during the confirmation operation execution period, the player side setting switch 70 is turned off so that the player side setting switch 70 is not easily operated by the player, so that the confirmation operation is performed. Reduce the annoyance of the execution period. That is, during the confirmation operation execution period, which is the period for controlling the confirmation operation of the movable means 901 to 903, the notification that the player's operation can be accepted is not performed (the player side setting switch 70 is turned off).

Based on the above, a configuration example in which the second embodiment is combined based on the first embodiment is as follows.

It is a game machine (slot machine 1) capable of playing games.
Initial position (initial position 911 (movable means 901), initial position 912 (movable means 902), initial position 913 (movable means 903)) and positions other than the initial position (initial position 911 to operating position 921 (movable)) Means 901), movable means (movable means 901 to 903) that can be displaced to a position from the initial position 912 to the operating position 922 (movable means 902), a position from the initial position 913 to the operating position 923 (movable means 903)). When,
Movable means control means (sub control unit 91) that controls the operation of the movable means, and
Reception means (player side setting switch 70) that accepts the player's operation,
Specific control execution means (sub-control unit 91) that performs specific control (display of setting screen) according to the reception of the reception means, and
Reception notification means (lights the player side setting switch 70) to notify that the player's operation can be accepted, and
A decorative display executing means (sub-control unit 91) capable of executing a decorative display (effect images shown in FIGS. 5C to 5E) corresponding to the movable means, and
With
The movable means control means controls the confirmation operation of the movable means (moves the movable means 901 to 903 to the movable positions 921 to 923 and then moves to the initial positions 911 to 913). Confirmation operation control means (sub-control). Including part 91)
The reception notification means does not notify that the player's operation can be accepted during the confirmation operation execution period, which is the period during which the confirmation operation control means controls the confirmation operation of the movable means (player). Side setting switch 70 is turned off),
The decorative display execution means
When the movable means is displaced to a position other than the initial position during the game (other than the confirmation operation), the decorative display is executed (effect images shown in FIGS. 5C to 5E).
When the movable means is displaced to a position other than the initial position in the confirmation operation of the movable means, the decorative display is not executed (as shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B, the display of the effect image is executed. do not do),
A game machine characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent specific control from being performed while the movable means is operating.

In the present embodiment, a slot machine to which a medal is applied as a game medium used for setting a bet number and adding value for a game due to winning a prize has been described as an example. However, the slot machine that embodies the present invention may be a slot machine (so-called parrot) in which a gaming ball used in a pachinko gaming machine is applied as a gaming medium. When the game ball is used as a game medium, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls, and when the number of bets is set to 3 in the above embodiment, 15 game balls are used. Corresponds to setting the number of bets using.

Further, in the present embodiment, a slot machine that sets the number of bets using medals and credits is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a slot machine that sets the number of bets using a game ball and credits. It may be a fully credited slot machine that uses only to set the number of bets. When the game ball is used as the game value, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls, and when the number of bets is set to 3 in the above embodiment, 15 game balls are used. Corresponds to setting the number of medals using.

Further, in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to using only one of a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and game balls, and for example, a plurality of types of games such as medals and game balls. It may be something that can be used in combination with utility value. That is, it is possible to set the number of bets and play a game by using any of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, and a plurality of types of games such as medals and game balls are generated when a prize is generated. Any of the utility values may be payable.

Further, in the present embodiment, a variable display device having three reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is provided, and one game ends when all the reels are stopped, depending on the combination of display results derived to the three reels. The slot machine that wins a prize was explained. That is, a variable display device capable of deriving a display result in each of a plurality of variable display areas capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each is provided, and a game value is used for one game. The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets, and one game is completed by deriving the display result to all of the plurality of variable display areas, and the plurality of games are completed as a result of one game. The slot machine in which a prize can be generated according to the combination of the display results derived in each of the variable display areas of the above has been described. However, one game ends when the display result is derived to a variable display device capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each, and a prize is awarded according to the display result derived to the variable display device. A slot machine that can be generated is not limited to a slot machine having a variable display device having three reels, but a slot machine having only one reel or a slot machine having a variable display device having a plurality of reels other than three. It may be. Further, in the present embodiment, the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are reels that rotate in the vertical direction, but the reels 2L, 2C and 2R may be reels that rotate in any direction such as a horizontal direction or an oblique direction.

Further, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment can derive display results in each of a plurality of variable display areas (transparent windows 3) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified by each. It is equipped with a possible variable display device, and the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value (medals, credits), and all of the plurality of variable display areas. Even if the slot machine is such that one game is completed by deriving the display result and a prize can be generated according to the combination of the display results derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas as a result of one game. Good.

Further, as the present embodiment, a slot machine that pays out the game medium to the player's hand when a prize is generated has been described, but the game medium is enclosed and the game medium is brought to the player's hand when the prize is generated. An enclosed slot machine that adds game points (scores) without paying out may be adopted. The base and the drum can be distributed, and the housing is common, and only the base or the base and the drum are called a game machine.

It should be noted that the embodiments disclosed this time are examples in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and it is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

1 Slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R reel 6 MAXBET switch 7 Start switch 8L, 8C, 8R Stop switch 40 Game control board 41 Main control unit 51 Liquid crystal display 90 Production control board 91 Sub control unit 91a Sub CPU
91b ROM
91c RAM

Claims (1)

It is a game machine that can play games
A first movable means that can be displaced to an initial position and a position other than the initial position,
A second movable means that can be displaced to an initial position and a position other than the initial position,
A movable means control means that controls the operation of the first movable means and controls the operation of the second movable means .
Reception means for accepting player operations and
Specific control execution means that performs specific control according to the reception of the reception means, and
A reception notification means for notifying that the player's operation can be accepted, and
A decorative display executing means capable of executing a decorative display corresponding to the first movable means,
With
The movable means control means includes a confirmation operation control means that controls the confirmation operation of the first movable means and controls the confirmation operation of the second movable means .
The confirmation operation control means controls the confirmation operation of the second movable means after controlling the confirmation operation of the first movable means.
The reception notification means, Oite during the verify operation control means verify operation execution period confirmation operation and a period for sequential control of the check operation and the second movable means of said first movable means, said first movable from the end check the operation of the means, make a notification to the effect it is possible to accept the player's operation,
The decorative display execution means
When the first movable means is displaced to a position other than the initial position during the game may execute the decorative display,
Wherein when said first movable means in the check operation of the first movable means is displaced to a position other than the initial position does not execute the decorative display,
A game machine characterized by that.

Images